Table of Contents

Tips on how to use:

Click on the page number at the right in the contents table to go directly to that page.
Press the <Alt> and left arrow keys simultaneously to “Go Back”.
Press the <Alt> and right arrow keys simultaneously to “Go Forward”.
Press the <Ctrl> and <Home> keys simultaneously to go to the top of this document.
Press the <Ctrl> and <End> keys simultaneously to go to the end of this document.
Press the <Ctrl> and <G> keys to go directly to a page (if you know the page number), or to a
bookmark.
Try this: Press Ctrl + G, then click “Bookmark” in the left column, and then select
“Screens” in the right column and press “Go To”.
Press the <Ctrl> and <Alt> and <Z> keys to go back to the previous bookmarked page.

To search for something, use MS Word’s Edit menu, then “Search” (or press the F5 key).

Printing Tips:
To print selected articles or pages, use MS Word’s “File” menu. Select “Print”. Then in the
“Page range” box, choose “Pages” and enter the page numbers you wish to print. Click “OK”.

Table of Contents.......................................................................................................................1
Using the Coach’s Clipboard’s documents...............................................................................11
Daily fundamentals you can do at home (Homework)..............................................................12
Footwork Fundamentals ..........................................................................................................14
Offensive Stance.....................................................................................................................................................14
Pivoting....................................................................................................................................................................14
Changing Direction and Speed................................................................................................................................15
Jumping...................................................................................................................................................................15
Faking and Cutting...................................................................................................................................................16
The jab step.............................................................................................................................................................16
Defensive Footwork.................................................................................................................................................16
Defensive Stance.....................................................................................................................................................16
Defensive Slides......................................................................................................................................................16
Footfire and Slide drill.................................................................................................................................................................17

Close-out on the ball receiver..................................................................................................................................17

Basic Offensive Tips.................................................................................................................18

Cutting and Faking...................................................................................................................20
Faking .....................................................................................................................................................................20
Cutting ....................................................................................................................................................................20
Types of Cuts...........................................................................................................................................................21
Front cut .....................................................................................................................................................................................21
Back cuts ....................................................................................................................................................................................21
V-cut ...........................................................................................................................................................................................21
L-cut ...........................................................................................................................................................................................21
Curl-cut .......................................................................................................................................................................................21
Button-hook ................................................................................................................................................................................21

Shallow cut..................................................................................................................................................................................21

1
 Deep cut......................................................................................................................................................................................21
Flash Cut.....................................................................................................................................................................................22
A quick cut made often made by a post player up to the high post (free-throw line) toward the ball (Diagram D1, FC)...........22
Jam-Down, V-Cut .......................................................................................................................................................................22
Jam-Down, Back Cut .................................................................................................................................................................22

Ball Handling............................................................................................................................23
Finger Grabs ...........................................................................................................................................................23
Pound the ball..........................................................................................................................................................23
Circles .....................................................................................................................................................................23
Figure Eights ...........................................................................................................................................................23
Tipping ....................................................................................................................................................................23
Drops ......................................................................................................................................................................24
Overhead Toss, Catch Behind Back...........................................................................................................................................24

Dribbling...................................................................................................................................25
Control Dribble.........................................................................................................................................................25
Speed Dribble..........................................................................................................................................................25
Crossover Dribble ...................................................................................................................................................25
In and Out Dribble ...................................................................................................................................................25
Hesitation Dribble ("Rocker Move") ........................................................................................................................26
Behind the Back Dribble, Through the Legs Dribble ...............................................................................................26

The Lost Art of Passing............................................................................................................27

Passing into the Post..................................................................................................................................................................29
Passing Drills...............................................................................................................................................................................29

The Basic Shots -- the Lay-up .................................................................................................30

Footwork .................................................................................................................................................................30
Aim ..........................................................................................................................................................................30
The Push Release ..................................................................................................................................................30
Underhand Release ................................................................................................................................................30

The Set Shot, Shooting Form...................................................................................................32

The Jump Shot.........................................................................................................................34
The Hook Shot..........................................................................................................................35
Outside (Perimeter) One-On-One Moves.................................................................................36
Triple threat position ...............................................................................................................................................36
A few tips on the jab step... .....................................................................................................................................36
Which foot becomes the pivot foot and which is used for the jab step?..................................................................36
Three basic outside moves: ....................................................................................................................................37
Perimeter moves when a team-mate has the ball... reading the defense................................................................37

Inside (Post) Moves..................................................................................................................39

Get Position ............................................................................................................................................................39
Low post moves ......................................................................................................................................................39
1. Drop step to baseline. ............................................................................................................................................................39
2. Drop step to lane (jump hook). ...............................................................................................................................................39
3. Turn and face defender and jab step. ....................................................................................................................................39
4. Up and under move ................................................................................................................................................................39
5. Flash to the elbow or free throw line ......................................................................................................................................40
6. Back door lob .........................................................................................................................................................................40
7. Learn to read the defense. ....................................................................................................................................................40

Playing the High Post..............................................................................................................................................40

2
Becoming a Good Free Throw Shooter....................................................................................42
Setting Screens (Picks)............................................................................................................44
Important elements in executing an effective screen. .............................................................................................44
Types of Screens ....................................................................................................................................................45
1. Front screen ...........................................................................................................................................................................45
2. Back screen ...........................................................................................................................................................................45
3. Down screen ..........................................................................................................................................................................45

How to practice in the off season..............................................................................................49

Defensive Tips..........................................................................................................................51
Basic Defense..........................................................................................................................53
Slides ......................................................................................................................................................................53
Close-out on the ball receiver..................................................................................................................................53
On the Ball ..............................................................................................................................................................53
Denial ......................................................................................................................................................................54
Help-side .................................................................................................................................................................55
Defending the Low Post...........................................................................................................................................55
Trapping (setting the double-team)..........................................................................................................................56

Rebounding..............................................................................................................................57
Defensive Rebounding ...........................................................................................................................................57
Offensive Rebounding ............................................................................................................................................58

How to make the team... Tryouts!.............................................................................................59

Things to think about................................................................................................................60
Attitude, the "Right Stuff"..........................................................................................................62
When you don't have the ball....................................................................................................63
The Exceptional Player.............................................................................................................64
The Role Player........................................................................................................................65
Playing the Point guard Position...............................................................................................67
Communication........................................................................................................................................................67
Court Balance, Passing, Half-Court Offense...........................................................................................................67
Control the Tempo...................................................................................................................................................68
Know the Game Situation........................................................................................................................................68
Leadership, Attitude.................................................................................................................................................69
Skills Necessary to be a Good Point Guard............................................................................................................69

Coaching ... game strategy.......................................................................................................72

Game plan ..............................................................................................................................................................72
Game Tempo ..........................................................................................................................................................72
Type of defense ......................................................................................................................................................72
When to press, or stop pressing .............................................................................................................................73
Using time-outs .......................................................................................................................................................73
Substitutions ...........................................................................................................................................................73
Yelling at the players ..............................................................................................................................................74
End of quarter strategy ...........................................................................................................................................74

3
 Late game strategy .................................................................................................................................................74
If you are ahead... ......................................................................................................................................................................74
If you are behind... .....................................................................................................................................................................75
If the game is tied and you have the ball... ................................................................................................................................75
If the game is tied and you are on defense... .............................................................................................................................75

Planning Practices....................................................................................................................77
Sample Practice Plan..............................................................................................................................................79
Northern Lakers Practice -- January 7, 2001..........................................................................................................79

Quote of the day: "It's not the size of the dog in the fight, it's the size of the fight in the dog." --
former US President and Supreme Allied Commander Dwight D. Eisenhower.........................79
Coaching Young Players..........................................................................................................80
Coaching a young team. .........................................................................................................................................81
Here are some articles that may help .....................................................................................................................83
Running a youth clinic .............................................................................................................................................84

Running a Youth Basketball Clinic............................................................................................86

Conditioning.............................................................................................................................89
Conditioning Drills....................................................................................................................................................90

What to Eat Before a Game or Practice....................................................................................91

About Food Supplements... .....................................................................................................92
Creatine ..................................................................................................................................................................92
Androstenedione......................................................................................................................................................92

Basketball Terminology............................................................................................................94
Basketball History.....................................................................................................................98
Defensive positioning off the ball - Deny, Helpside, Help and Recover.................................................................101

Zone Defense.........................................................................................................................107
Advantages of zone defense.................................................................................................................................107
Disadvantages of zone defense............................................................................................................................107
Basic pointers for all zone defenses......................................................................................................................108

2-3 (or 2-1-2) Half-Court Zone Defense..................................................................................109

Covering the Skip Pass.............................................................................................................................................................110

1-3-1 Half-Court Zone Defense...............................................................................................111

1-2-2 and 3-2 Half-Court Zone Defenses................................................................................113
Match-up Zone Defense.........................................................................................................116
1-3-1 Match-up Zone Defense................................................................................................119
2-2-1 Half Court Press............................................................................................................123
Defending a team with a “star” player, “Junk” Defenses.........................................................125
Man-to-man defensive adjustments against a “star” player...................................................................................125
1. The “star” is the point guard. ...............................................................................................................................................125
2. The “star” is a wing-forward player. ....................................................................................................................................125
3. The “star” is a low post player..............................................................................................................................................126

Junk Defenses.......................................................................................................................................................126
“Box and 1”............................................................................................................................................................126
“1-3 and a chaser”.................................................................................................................................................127
“3-1 and a chaser”.................................................................................................................................................127

4
 "Diamond and 1" ...................................................................................................................................................128
"Triangle and 2" ....................................................................................................................................................128
“Triangle and 2”.....................................................................................................................................................128

Two Half-Court Defensive Strategies......................................................................................129

Deny the Wing Pass? ...........................................................................................................................................129
Double Teaming the Low Post ..............................................................................................................................129

Defense for the Last Few Seconds of the Game....................................................................131

Transition Defense.................................................................................................................132
Preventing the fast break.......................................................................................................................................132
Two-guards back...................................................................................................................................................132
Defending the paint area.......................................................................................................................................132
Full-Court Press Defense......................................................................................................................................133
Some basic principles apply to all presses. .........................................................................................................133
Trapping.................................................................................................................................................................133
Gapping (zone press)............................................................................................................................................134
Types of full court presses.....................................................................................................................................134
Man-to-Man Press ................................................................................................................................................................134
Zone Presses............................................................................................................................................................................134

Drills: ....................................................................................................................................................................134

Full-Court Pressure Defense..................................................................................................135

“41 Deny”...............................................................................................................................................................136

2-2-1 Zone Press....................................................................................................................137

2-2-1 Zone Press Variations...................................................................................................138
2-Up Zone Press....................................................................................................................................................138
2-2-1 "Deny" Defense ...........................................................................................................................................138

3-1-1 Zone Press....................................................................................................................139

"1-2-1-1 Zone Press – Diamond Press" .................................................................................141
"One-Fist"..............................................................................................................................................................141
"Two Fist"...............................................................................................................................................................141
"Side Fist"..............................................................................................................................................................141

Coach Sar’s 1-2-2 Presses.....................................................................................................143

"80"........................................................................................................................................................................143
"70"........................................................................................................................................................................144
"76"........................................................................................................................................................................144

Basic Concepts of Motion Offense.........................................................................................146

Basic rules:............................................................................................................................................................146
Spacing.....................................................................................................................................................................................146
Triple threat position and patience............................................................................................................................................146
Players may dribble only:..........................................................................................................................................................146
Player Movement......................................................................................................................................................................147
Passing......................................................................................................................................................................................147
After passing, players must do one of these:............................................................................................................................147

Read the defense..................................................................................................................................................147

Situations for Perimeter players:...............................................................................................................................................147

Situations for post players:....................................................................................................................................147

Post players working together:..............................................................................................................................148
5
3-2 Motion Offense Options....................................................................................................149
“1 UP”....................................................................................................................................................................149
"2-UP" ...................................................................................................................................................................149
“4-Down”................................................................................................................................................................149
“3-Cross”................................................................................................................................................................150
“3-Corner”..............................................................................................................................................................150

3-2 Motion Offense Options, More!.........................................................................................151

Wing-Low Post Motion...........................................................................................................................................151

...............................................................................................................................................................................151
Post-Post Motion...................................................................................................................................................151

3-2 Motion Offense Plays ......................................................................................................153

3-2 Motion Offense Plays -- "Red, White and Blue"................................................................154
"Blue" ....................................................................................................................................................................154
"Red" ...................................................................................................................................................................154
"White" .................................................................................................................................................................155

3-2 “Reverse”..........................................................................................................................156
3-Out, 2-In “Options” Series....................................................................................................157
Double Up vs Man-to-Man Defense........................................................................................159
Double-Up Vs. Zone Defenses...............................................................................................161
Open Post High Offense : Basic Motion.................................................................................163
Post Entries for the Open Post (5-Out) Motion Offense..........................................................177
4-Out, 1-In Motion Offense.....................................................................................................179
Rules without the ball.............................................................................................................................................179
Reading screens....................................................................................................................................................181
Rules for setting screens.......................................................................................................................................181
Rules for coming off screens.................................................................................................................................181

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved................................................................185

The Shuffle Offense...............................................................................................................................................187

Swing Offense........................................................................................................................191
Thunder Offense.....................................................................................................................194
Zone Offense..........................................................................................................................197
How to Attack the 2-3 (or 2-1-2) Zone Defense......................................................................199
Transition Offense .................................................................................................................231
Transition Offensive Concepts ..............................................................................................................................231
Running the primary fast break .............................................................................................................................231
Starting the break .................................................................................................................................................232
Secondary Fast Break...........................................................................................................................................232

Secondary Break, Transition Offense.....................................................................................233

After the opponent scores......................................................................................................................................233
After a rebound......................................................................................................................................................234

6
Beating the Full Court Press...................................................................................................237
Beating the 1-2-1-1 Full Court Press......................................................................................239
1-2-1-1 Press Breaker............................................................................................................241
Four Across Press Breaker.....................................................................................................242
Simplified Version of the 4-Across Press Breaker.................................................................................................243
Another Version of the 4-Across Press Break.......................................................................................................246

Half-Court Press Breakers......................................................................................................248

1-3-1 Motion Offense, "1"......................................................................................................253
...............................................................................................................................................253
1-3-1 Motion Offense, "2" ......................................................................................................254
1-3-1 Motion "3" .....................................................................................................................256
Play "23" (or "32") ..................................................................................................................257
Isolation "2" ............................................................................................................................258
Back-Door Play "Baseline 3" ..................................................................................................259
1-4 Stack ...............................................................................................................................261
1-4 High Post Pick and Roll ...................................................................................................262
1-4 Stack, Post-Point Pick ‘n Roll...........................................................................................263
1-4 Stack Low ........................................................................................................................264
Michigan.................................................................................................................................266
Delay Spread Offense -- “Butter" ...........................................................................................269
Rules of the "Butter" (or 4-Corners) Offense...........................................................................269
3-on-3 Plays...........................................................................................................................272
Give and Go..............................................................................................................................................................................273
Pick and Roll.............................................................................................................................................................................273
Screen Away.............................................................................................................................................................................273
Back-screen and Pin.................................................................................................................................................................274

Sideline Out-Of-Bounds Play..................................................................................................276

VS 2-3 Zone...........................................................................................................................276
Vs 2-3 Zone Variation.............................................................................................................276
Sideline Out-Of-Bounds Play #2.............................................................................................277
Out-of-bounds play #1, or "Box" ............................................................................................278
"Stack" Out-of-bounds Plays...................................................................................................279
“Stack 3”....................................................................................................................................................................................280

"3" Out of Bounds Play ..........................................................................................................281

Out-of-bounds play #5, or "Line-Up", or “4-Down” .................................................................282
Out-of-Bounds Play “54”.........................................................................................................283
Out-of-bounds play – “Spread” ..............................................................................................284
Out-of-Bounds Plays vs the 2-3 Zone.....................................................................................285
Play #1, “Splitter”...................................................................................................................................................285
Play #2, “Stack Screen”.........................................................................................................................................285

Out-of-bounds Plays “Box 1” and “Box 3”...............................................................................288

7
 “Box 1”...................................................................................................................................................................288
“Box 3”...................................................................................................................................................................288

Out-of-Bounds Play “Box Wide”..............................................................................................289

Out-of-Bounds Play "Box Around"..........................................................................................290
Out-of-Bounds Play “Double Stack”........................................................................................291
Out-of-Bounds Play, “3–Across”.............................................................................................292
Out-of-Bounds Play "3-Down".................................................................................................293
Out-of-Bounds Play “Pinball”..................................................................................................294
Zone Option...........................................................................................................................................................294

Offense for the Last Few Seconds of the Game.....................................................................295

Desperation, Last Second Full-Court Play..............................................................................296
Defense 1 on 1 Drill................................................................................................................299
Full-Court Drill.........................................................................................................................299
Defense Z-Drill........................................................................................................................300
Defense Shell Drill .................................................................................................................301
Defense Man-to-Man Positioning Drill....................................................................................303
Deny, Corner Trap Drill...........................................................................................................304
Piston Full-Court Offense-Defense Drill .................................................................................305
Take The Charge Defensive Drill............................................................................................306
Learning the Jump Stop .........................................................................................................308
Footwork Drill .........................................................................................................................310
Pick Drills ...............................................................................................................................311
Drill #1. Pass and screen-away. ...........................................................................................................................311
Drill #2. Front screen set for the ball-handler. .......................................................................................................311
Common Screening Errors....................................................................................................................................312

Drills for Teaching the 3-2 Motion Offense .............................................................................313

V-Cut Drill..............................................................................................................................................................313
V-Cut, Back-Cut Drill..............................................................................................................................................313
Point-Guard Give ‘n Go Drill..................................................................................................................................313
Dribble-Entry, Rotate Drill......................................................................................................................................314
On-Ball Screen and Roll Drill.................................................................................................................................314
Screen Away Drill .................................................................................................................................................314
Down-screen Curl Drill...........................................................................................................................................315
Back-screen Drill....................................................................................................................................................315
Feed the Low Post, Defender Behind Drill.............................................................................................................315
Defender Fronting the Low Post Drill.....................................................................................................................316
Posts 2-on-2 Drill...................................................................................................................................................316
Rebound and outlet pass ......................................................................................................................................318
Filling the Lanes.............................................................................................................................................318
Pointers:.................................................................................................................................................................319

8
 Finishing the break ...............................................................................................................................................319
3- on-1, 3-on-2 Drills .............................................................................................................................................319

Pitch 'n Fire Full-Court Drill ....................................................................................................322

4 on 4 Transition.....................................................................................................................323
The Rebound-Outlet-Break Drill .............................................................................................324
11-Man Drill (Full Court).........................................................................................................327
7-Man Half Court Drill ............................................................................................................328
Low Post Offensive Drills........................................................................................................329
Single Person Drills...............................................................................................................................................329
Mikan Drill..................................................................................................................................................................................329
Roll and Retrieve, Power Lay-up Drill.......................................................................................................................................329

Three Person Drills................................................................................................................................................329

Drop Step Drill...........................................................................................................................................................................329
Jump Hook to the Lane Drill......................................................................................................................................................330
Turn and Shoot Drill..................................................................................................................................................................330
Power Shot Drill .......................................................................................................................................................................330

Basic Dribbling Drills ..............................................................................................................331

Dribbling Eights .....................................................................................................................................................331
Up and Downs ......................................................................................................................................................331
Kills .......................................................................................................................................................................331
Circle Dribbles ......................................................................................................................................................331
Back and Forth Between the Legs ........................................................................................................................331
Crossover Dribbles ...............................................................................................................................................331
V-Dribble in Front ..................................................................................................................................................331

Tight Chairs Dribbling Drill......................................................................................................332

"Sideline Dribbling Drills" .......................................................................................................333
Sideline Moves Drill ..............................................................................................................................................333
Stutter Drill ............................................................................................................................................................345

Full Court Dribbling Drills........................................................................................................346

5-Minute Drill..........................................................................................................................................................346
Variation #1, Hesitation Move................................................................................................................................346
Variation #2, Finish the Lay-up Against Pressure..................................................................................................346

Dribbling Moves Drill...............................................................................................................347

Dribble Tag Ball Handling Drill................................................................................................348
2 Man Shooting Drills..............................................................................................................351
Drill #1, Catch and Shoot......................................................................................................................................351
Drill #2, Ball Fake and Shoot Jumper....................................................................................................................351
Drill #3, Fake and Drive for the Lay-up..................................................................................................................351
Drill #4, Anything Goes!.........................................................................................................................................351
Drill #5, Elbow Shooting.........................................................................................................................................351

Pairs-Shooting Drill.................................................................................................................352
Close-out Shooting Drill..........................................................................................................353
2 on 1 Drill..............................................................................................................................354

9
3 Man 2 Ball Shooting Drill.....................................................................................................355
Three Line Lay-up Drill...........................................................................................................356
Free Throw Shooting Drills.....................................................................................................357
Low Post Power Drill...............................................................................................................358
Pairs Passing Drills ................................................................................................................359
Chest pass.............................................................................................................................................................359
Bounce Pass..........................................................................................................................................................359
Overhead Pass......................................................................................................................................................359
Pairs Shuffle Drill (passing on the move) ..............................................................................................................359
Pairs Full-Court Dribble-Pass Drill ........................................................................................................................359
Pairs Passing, Find the Receiver ..........................................................................................................................360

Rapid-Fire Passing Drills........................................................................................................361

One-Ball Rapid Fire...............................................................................................................................................361

3 Man Passing Drills ..............................................................................................................362

"Monkey in the Middle" .........................................................................................................................................362
3 Man Weave (passing on the move)....................................................................................................................362

Laker Drill -- Full-Court Passing and Lay-up Against Pressure...............................................363

Passing Drill 3-on-3..............................................................................................................364
5-Man Weave Passing and Transition Drill.............................................................................365
Triangle Passing Drill..............................................................................................................366
Press Break Passing Drill.......................................................................................................367
Circle Box-Out Drill ................................................................................................................368
Rebounding 2 Man Drill .........................................................................................................370
3-Man Rebounding, PowerUp Drill ........................................................................................371
Hustle Drills ...........................................................................................................................372

10
 The Coach’s Clipboard
www.coachesclipboard.net

This site designed and edited by Dr. Jim Gels, Charlevoix, Mi., 2001, all rights reserved.

James A. Gels
Box 126
Charlevoix, Michigan 49720
jgelsmd@chartermi.net

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

Using the Coach’s Clipboard’s documents

These basketball documents have been created for your personal use, to further your
knowledge of the game. Most of these documents contain knowledge that the author has
learned from others, and thus he does not claim the knowledge as his own. However, in
recognition of the large amount of work done in organizing, editing, designing and writing these
materials, the author requires an acknowledgement for any of the topics reproduced.

These documents may be used for your own personal use. You may print them and
copy them for your players and the coaches in your own organization. You may use
them in your team play book.

You may not distribute these documents freely to other organizations without the
written permission of the author.

You may not use any of these materials on your own web-site without the written
permission of the author.

You may not sell or use any of these materials in a profitable way.

Disclaimer:
The author’s thoughts and opinions should not be construed as absolute truths, but instead are
simply a compilation of things that have been learned over a lifetime, and hopefully you will find
them helpful. But you should consider consulting other even more knowledgeable coaches and
sources. In using these documents, you agree not to hold the author liable for any actions,
consequences or problems associated with your using these documents.

Additional Files:
Please note that there is an Appendix to this file. This appendix contains a number of useful
coaching forms, such as a practice planner, several scouting forms, stats sheets, court
diagrams, etc.

11
 Daily fundamentals you can do at home (Homework)...
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The following tips are things that you can do at home, by yourself, to become a better player.
These skills are very important not only for beginners, but for players at all levels. No matter
how good you think you are, you can always improve on these basic skills.
(These tips are from Sidney Goldstein, author of "The Basketball Bible", and other basketball
books...check his web site: http://www.mrbasketball.net/)

Hold The Ball Correctly

The most difficult skills, including shooting, passing, catching, dribbling, and rebounding,
involve holding the ball. Work on these skills every day.
Here is how to practice holding the ball:
1. Make both hands into claws. Growl like a lion and move the claws forward like you are going
to rip something apart.
2. Make sure your fingers are far apart.
3. Put the ball between the claws and hold the ball securely. Your only contact with the ball
should be your finger ends, not the pads. The palm and other parts of the hand do not touch
the ball. Overdoing the hold this way is most beneficial.
4. Hold the ball as long as possible at home while watching TV or listening to the radio. Before
practice, hold the ball for a minute or two and at every other opportunity.

Use Your Wrists In Shooting, Passing, and Dribbling

The wrist skills, which include shooting, passing, and dribbling, involve the motion of the hand
and wrist. Waving good-bye is an example of wrist motion that needs to be practiced. This
rarely practiced motion reaps incredible benefits. Not only will you improve, but you will
permanently improve.
Here is how to practice:
1. While standing, put your arms straight up overhead, palms facing forward. Keep your elbows
straight and do not move your arms throughout the exercise.
2. With your hands slightly clawed, flick your wrist backward and let it come forward without
additional effort. Continue to flick your wrists backward. You are doing this correctly if your
hand and wrist go back and forth like a wet noodle. Make sure to keep your hands in a slightly
clawed position.
3. Continue doing this for one to two minutes. Initially this motion will be very difficult.
4. This first part of the exercise helps with shooting and passing. For help with dribbling, lower
the arms to the side with the palms facing backward.
5. With elbows straight and arms stationary, flick the wrist forward and let it come back without
effort. Continue doing this for one-two minutes. Make sure the hand is slightly clawed.
6. Do these exercises as often as possible. Make them part of your normal practice warm-up.
The more difficult this exercise is to do, the more you need it. It may take one month or more to
do these exercises properly.

Pivoting Is A Key To Many Other Skills

Many players and coaches underestimate the importance of pivoting. Every movement with the
ball initially involves pivoting. Players routinely pivot to shoot or pass. What is not so obvious is
that all moves, most fakes, and driving to the basket all depend on the ability to pivot. Poor
pivoters do not have moves and cannot drive well to the basket.
You must be able to pivot forward and backward using either foot. So each exercise must be
repeated four times: left foot forward; left foot backward; right foot forward; right foot backward.
The pivot foot is the foot that stays in place. Actually only one part of the foot, the ball of the
foot, stays stationary. As you turn, the rest of the foot rotates about the ball of the foot. If you
slide or change your pivot point after you have the ball, officials call a walking violation. Your
team loses the ball.

12
Here is how to practice pivoting:
1. Start with the left foot as pivot foot. If you have a ball, hold it in the exaggerated claw position
during this exercise.
2. Pivot forward 15 times like you are stomping on bugs as you go. As you find your balance,
increase the rotation to a half turn.
3. Repeat rotating backward 15 times.
4. Switch pivot foot. Repeat forward 15 times.
5. Repeat backward 15 times.
Have a bystander or friend watch for several things. You must keep your head up like you
would in a game.
a. Your pivot point must not change.
b. Your pivot foot does not slide.

Defense Is Easy To Learn

Your stance for defense and dribbling is very similar. In both positions you need to be ready to
run full speed in any direction. Tap dancing on your toes while in position helps you to practice
tap dancing:
How to get in position:
1. In a standing position, move your feet to slightly greater than shoulder width apart.
2. Bend your knees, keeping your back straight and vertical, not bent, till you are down as far
as you can go. Then come halfway up.
3. Move the arms slightly outward from the shoulders and move the forearms parallel to the
ground.
4. The hands should be slightly clawed in what I call the "ready" position.
What to do in position:
5. Tap dance by quickly bringing the knees slightly up (one-two inches) and down one at a
time.
6. Count to 20, one tap at a time.
7. Then sprint four steps forward. Tap and count to 20 again.
8. Pivot around and sprint four steps backwards. Face the original direction, and tap and count
to 20 again.
9. Continue for five minutes, moving back and forth and then left and right.

Practice shooting from one foot, rather than from greater distances.
Unless you shoot with the proper technique, practicing from great distances distorts your shot.
Improper practice makes your shot worse. So, practice from one foot while you develop your
shot.
Here is how to practice:
Take 10 one foot shots from the right side of the basket, then 10 from the left, and then 10 from
the center. Use the backboard from all three positions. You can repeat this many times

13
 Footwork Fundamentals
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Basketball is played on the fingertips and the balls of your feet. Everything you do involves
footwork. Some players are naturally quicker than others. But a player's effective quickness
can be greatly enhanced if he/she uses proper footwork. A naturally quick player who lacks
good footwork skills can be beaten (or contained) by a player with sound footwork
fundamentals.

Offensive Stance
You always want to be in a good "basketball position" or stance. From this position, it is easier
to start and stop, change direction and pace, jump, shoot, pass, catch and dribble. You should
have your weight on the balls of your feet (the front part of the foot near the toes) and the feet
should be shoulder width apart with the knees flexed. The head is centered above the lower
body, and your hands are about chest high with your elbows bent and your arms close to your
sides. When you actually have the ball on the perimeter, use the triple threat position so you
are in a position to either pass, shoot or dribble.

Pivoting
When you are stationary on the court, the rules say you can move one foot around, as long as
the other foot (the "pivot foot") remains planted on the floor. This is the essence of pivoting. All
players must be skilled at pivoting. There are two types of pivots, the forward pivot and the
reverse pivot (or drop-step). All pivoting is done on the ball of the foot. You do not want to
become flat-footed or have your weight back on your heels. The ball of the pivot foot must be
in contact with the floor at all times and must not slide sideways. When you pivot, just actually
spin around on the ball of your pivot foot. If you pick up your pivot foot, or change your pivot
foot to your other foot, you will be called for a traveling violation. When starting your dribble,
the ball must leave your hand before you lift your pivot foot. When shooting a jump shot, you
may jump and your pivot foot may lift off the floor, but you must release the ball from your hand
before you land again on the floor.

Which foot should be my pivot foot? Well, it could be either depending on the game situation.
Outside, perimeter players most often will use their non-dominant foot as the pivot foot when
facing the basket. For example, a right-handed player facing the basket will most often plant
the left foot as the pivot foot and make a jab step with his/her right foot (see Perimeter Moves),
and just the opposite would be the case for the left-handed player. Now a low-post player who
has his/her back to the basket is often wise to receive the ball with both feet planted (as after a
jump stop). This now allows the player the option of selecting either foot for pivoting,
depending on where the defender is located (for either a drop-step to baseline or a move to the
lane -- see Post Moves).

You must be able to pivot forward and backward using either foot.
Pivoting drills:
1. Start with the left foot as pivot foot. Pivot forward 15 times like you are stomping on bugs as
you go. As you find your balance, increase the rotation to a half turn.
2. Now backward pivot 15 times.
3. Switch pivot foot. Forward pivot 15 times.
4. Backward pivot 15 times.
Pointers:
1. You must keep your head up with eyes forward.
2. Have your knees bent a little.
2. Your pivot point must not change.
3. Your pivot foot does not slide.

14
How to Stop
There are two ways to stop, the one-two step landing and the jump-stop.
1. When doing the one-two step landing (after a sprint or speed dribble), one foot lands first
(the back foot) and then the second foot lands. The back foot becomes the pivot foot. When
stopping, let the second foot to land extend wide from the back foot for better balance.

2. When doing the jump-stop, both feet land simultaneously. The last step should be a hop
and when you land, have your weight leaning backward a little to help slow your momentum.
Using this stop, you are now free to use either foot as your pivot foot. There is confusion over
the rules and what is legal and what constitutes a traveling violation. The following is taken
from the National Federation of State High Schools web-site in regard to this rule.

"The traveling rule has not changed. What has changed is the common use of the jump stop as an offensive move. Officials
and coaches are having difficulty determining the difference between a legal and illegal move. The key to making this
determination properly is first finding the pivot foot. Then, if the player moves a foot or the feet in any direction in excess of
prescribed limits while holding the ball, a traveling violation has occurred. The limits follow:

1. A player who catches the ball with both feet on the floor may pivot, using either foot. When one foot is lifted, the other is the
pivot foot.

2. A player who catches the ball while moving or dribbling may stop and establish a pivot foot as follows:
a. If both feet are off the floor and the player lands;
(1) Simultaneously on both feet, either foot may be the pivot.

(2) On one foot followed by the other, the first foot to touch is the pivot.

(3) On one foot, the player may jump off that foot and simultaneously land on both. Neither foot can
be a pivot in this case.

b. If one foot is on the floor;

(1) It is the pivot when the other foot touches in a step.

(2) The player may jump off that foot and simultaneously land on both. Neither foot can be a pivot
in this case.

3. After coming to a stop and establishing a pivot foot:

a. The pivot foot may be lifted, but not returned to the floor, before the ball is released on a pass or try for goal;

b. If the player jumps, neither foot may be returned to the floor before the ball is released on a pass or try
for goal;

c. The pivot foot may not be lifted, before the ball is released, to start a dribble.

4. After coming to a stop when neither foot can be a pivot:

a. One or both feet may be lifted, but may not be returned to the floor, before the ball is released on a
pass or try for goal;

b. Neither foot may be lifted, before the ball is released, to start a dribble."

See Jump-Stop Drill.

I have tried to combine several of these moves into one drill. See Footwork Drill.

Changing Direction and Speed

To change direction, plant the opposite foot (the one opposite the way you want to cut), and
then push off the inside part of that foot in the direction you want to go. For example, if you
want to make a sudden cut to the left, plant the right foot and push off from the medial (inside)
part of your right foot, changing your direction to the left. Learn to change speed from a fast
run, to a slow hesitation, and then accelerate to full speed again. See the "hesitation dribble"
on this page.

Jumping
Lot of players and coaches think that jumping is some skill that you are born with...either you
have it or you don't. Well this is not entirely true. You can improve jumping ability

15
considerably, otherwise our Olympic high-jumpers would never practice. Jump rope and run
sprints to build your legs and agility.

Practice jumping every day for 5-10 minutes.

Two-footed jump. Get under the basket and jump straight up and see how high you can get on
the backboard or net. Bend at the knees and waist, weight forward a little on the balls of the
feet. Lower your hands alongside the outside of your knees. Then spring upward with
simultaneous force from not only the thigh muscles, but you also can get a lot of lift from
springing off with your feet and ankles... pushing off the tips of your toes (you can't jump flat-
footed!). At the same time your legs are working, your hands and arms are swinging up as
high as possible... the upward force of the arms swinging may provide more lift, and you need
to get them stretched as high as possible to get that rebound (or dunk). Do this jumping drill a
number of times, until your legs get tired, and then try it again later.

One-footed jump. You can also do a jumping drill where you run in from the wing at a 45
degree angle and leap as high as you can and touch the backboard (or net). When you jump,
just like doing a right-handed lay-up, you plant your left foot and go up with the right knee,
pushing off the left toes. Be sure to go vertically, and not lose a lot of your elevation by going
forward.

Faking and Cutting

You should learn to that just about every offensive move (and some defensive ones too),
should be preceded, or "set up" by a good fake to get the defender to lean the wrong way. This
is true, whether you are making an offensive jab-step, or you are coming off a screen, or even
just about to make a pass. A little "mis-direction" move, like making a ball fake, shoulder or
head fake, foot fake, or just an eye fake can open a lane for you to drive, cut, shoot or pass.
Learn how to get open by making a front-cut, a V-cut, a back-cut, or a curl (see Cutting and
Faking).

The jab step

Outside, perimeter players should learn the jab step (or drive step) as a fake to set up either
the drive to the hoop, or to create spacing for the outside shot. This move is explained in detail
on the Outside, Perimeter Moves page.

Defensive Footwork
Defense is played mainly with the feet. You must move your feet quickly to stay in front of the
offensive player. You must use a correct defensive stance. You must know how to slide
(sideways, forward and backward). You must know when to turn and sprint. You must know
how to "close-out" on the offensive man and play good "on-ball" defense.

Defensive Stance
Your weight should be on the balls of your feet (not your heels), and your feet should be about
shoulder width apart. Keep your knees bent and your back straight. Keep your head up, eyes
forward, arms out with your palms up and elbows bent a little. Force to the sideline with the
outside foot back, and the hand on that side is in the passing lane. The opposite hand is the
"dig" hand, for trying to swat the ball from below (don't hit down on the ball). Focus on the
offensive player's belly-button... it will always go in the direction that the player is going.See
also. Defensive Tips.

Defensive Slides
When guarding your opponent, slide your feet sideways, using quick, short steps, and don't get
your feet crossed. Don't hop. If you get beaten in the open floor, don't reach-in and swipe at
the ball like a matador (I call it the "o-le" move), as the opponent moves by you. And don't just
yell for help... turn and sprint after your opponent. Once you get in front of her again, get back
into your defensive stance.

16
Footfire and Slide drill
Have your players spread out, lined-up in two lines. Players are in a good defensive stance
position. On "go", all players start the "footfire" with rapid moving of their feet up and down on
the balls of their feet. After 10 seconds, call out "slide left" and the players slide several paces
to the left. Then call "go" and they resume the stationary footfire. Have them move right, left,
forward and backward using correct sliding and stance, and no crossing of the feet.

Also see Z-Drill.

Close-out on the ball receiver

Defenders must learn to "close-out" on the player with the ball. Once the offensive player
receives the pass, the defender should rush toward the ball-handler in a low stance. The last
several steps should be quick, choppy steps to stop your momentum (so the defender doesn't
dribble around you). Your baseline line foot should be back in order to force the ball-handler
toward the baseline. As you approach the ball-handler, snap your shoulders and head back to
help slow yourself down.

See 1-on-1 Drill , 2-Man Shooting Drills, and Close-out Shooting Drill

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

17
 Basic Offensive Tips
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

1. Practice, practice, practice shooting. Work with your shooting form, the "platform", "L",
"hinge" and "gooseneck" so that you learn to shoot with your fingertips and get backspin on
your shot ("rotation"). You may not be strong enough yet to do this, but most good shooters
eventually learn this. To perfect your shooting technique, practice shots within just a few feet of
the basket, every day. Then practice lay-ups, free throws, 2-pointers, even 3-pointers, and
eventually learn to shoot a jump shot. Don't be afraid to take a good shot. Look for a chance to
shoot. But don't force bad shots.
Learn the "triple-threat" position, the proper stance so you will have the option of being able to
shoot, pass or dribble.

2. Become a good dribbler and ball-handler. Dribbling and ball handling are the foundation
skills for almost any offensive move with the ball. Practice dribbling drills and moves for 15
minutes every day (see Dribbling, Basic Dribbling Drills, and Sideline Dribbling Drills)

3. Learn the "triple-threat" position, the proper stance so you will have the option of being able
to shoot, pass or dribble. See "Perimeter Moves".

4. Be a good passer. Bad passing and turnovers will destroy a team faster than anything! Make
good, short, quick, crisp passes...they're hard to intercept. Avoid long cross-court passes,
unless your teammate is wide open. Learn to use your peripheral vision and avoid throwing the
ball to your opponent. Make a good pass that your teammate can easily catch. A really good
passer can pass to a teammate without looking directly at her. Avoid telegraphing your passes
(more in practice). Learn how to make good bounce passes. Learn when not to pass and avoid
passing into a crowd. See also: Pairs Passing Drill, 3 Man Passing Drill.

5. Court awareness. Always know where the ball is, don't turn your back on the ball. "Survey"
the court. Look for the open teammate with your peripheral vision. Look to the "weak side" of
the floor for an easy "back-door" pass and lay-up. Learn to "cut" and find an open area on the
floor, where your teammate can pass to you for an easy shot.

6. Except for the point guard, go hard for the offensive rebound. Many easy baskets are scored
on second and third chances, if you can get the rebound (see Rebounding Tips). The point
guard, 1, should stay back out on top to prevent the other team's fast break (if they get the
rebound). If 1 drives to the basket for a shot, 2 (or 3) should stay back. Also, get in the good
habit of following your own shot after you shoot. Many times, if your shot is too short or too
hard, it will come off the rim right back toward you. Expect this when you shoot, and go get it!
You may get a second chance to make that basket. Three of the five players should always go
hard for the offensive rebound, one is half-rebounding and half-preventive mode, and one is
always back to prevent the opponent's fast break.

7. Get the ball down the floor quickly, fast break whenever possible and beat the defense down
the court. But play under control at all times. Don't try to go faster than you are able!--you'll lose
the ball or make a bad pass. It's difficult even for high school kids to learn how to play with
quickness and speed, while still staying under control. Remember: "You must be quick...but
never hurry."

8. Avoid too much dribbling as this just allows the defense time to reset. Quick passing and
cutting is the secret. But never give up your dribble without being able to pass or shoot the ball.
John Wooden, a retired famous coach from UCLA, told his players, "You should always end
your dribble with either a pass or a shot." Don't stop your dribble until you can do either. Learn
how to jump stop at the end of your speed dribble (see Learning the Jump Stop).

18
9. Post players (4 and 5) must learn two basic post-up moves, the drop-step, and the jump
hook. Ask your coach to teach you these moves. After learning these basic moves, you can
develop other variations of these moves.

10. Move without the ball. Don't stand still. Set picks, make cuts through the paint, or "back-
door". Be ready to rebound. (See "When you don't have the ball...", “Cutting and Faking”).

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

19
 Cutting and Faking
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

There are 10 players on the floor. Only one player has the ball. That means that 90% of time,
you won't have the ball, and that only 10% of the time you may actually have the ball (a little
less for post players, a little more for guards). So you have a limited number of opportunities to
score from an individual move when you are the ball-handler. Good scorers find ways to get
open for an easy pass from a teammate, and an easy shot off the pass reception. Good
scorers never just stand around and watch. They are always trying to find ways to get open by
coming off screens, or faking and cutting to open areas of the floor (within their shooting
range). The keys are timing, cutting to open areas, setting good screens, and maintaining good
spacing. In regard to cutting, there is a saying "get open, or get out!", which means that if you
are not open, or don't receive the ball within a couple seconds, move out and maintain motion
and spacing. Passing is easier if offensive players maintain a spacing of 12 to 15 feet apart.
Don't get bunched up.

Faking
Faking is an important skill that is often overlooked and not taught. Good faking is an important
key in just about every offensive basketball skill, whether it is an on-ball perimeter or post
move, or throwing a pass, or cutting. A fake simply is a deception or decoy move to throw the
defender off balance, or get him leaning the wrong way just long enough so the offensive
player can gain a step or two on him, or so a passer can open up the passing lane.
A good passer can "look" the defender off his receiver by looking the opposite way that he
intends to pass... example: look left, pass right on a fast break.

Fakes can be a simple "look away", or can be as subtle as moving your eyes opposite the way
you want to pass, or cut. A fake can be a jab step to get the defender leaning, and then you
move quickly in the opposite direction. You can fake with a shrug of your shoulders, or a bob of
your head in the opposite direction that you plan to cut. You can use a "sleep fake", where you
pretend you are winded and tired, and you bend over with your hands on your knees, like you
are catching your breath... the defender relaxes too, and suddenly you make your hard, quick
cut. You can use a verbal fake... yell the ball-handler's name loudly and wave your arms to get
the defender (who is help-side defense sagging toward the paint) to come out on you. That
may open up the lane for a clean cut by a teammate. In this case you don't actually get the ball,
but you made the lane available for your teammate to cut through. Have a team agreement... if
you yell "ball!" you really want the ball, if you yell a name, it's a decoy. To be a good faker, you
need a little acting ability!

Cutting
There are a number of different types of cuts that can be made, in addition to making the
correct moves in running a specific play or set motion offense, and in addition to setting and
cutting around screens (see Setting Screens).
Here are some tips in making a good cut:
1. A key in making an effective cut is timing. Try to "time" your cut, so you arrive at the correct
time to receive the pass.

2. Make a good fake and cut hard. Often I see kids make a quick fake, and then a somewhat
slow cut. Do just the opposite... make a slow, sleepy fake followed by a quick cut move.

3. This is another important tip: kids often try to avoid contact with the defender and try to run
away from him. In trying to get open, go right up to the defender and make contact with him,
then quickly "bounce off" in the direction of your cut. He won't be able to react fast enough to
your quick first step.

20
In addition to the cut moves described below, don't forget this move: slip behind the defender
(who may be in "deny" and over-playing the passing lane) and move below him toward the
baseline. The defender should always see the ball. Try to slip out of his field of vision, so that
he loses you briefly... then you can get open.

Types of Cuts

Front cut
The front cut is a cut made with the defender
behind you, on your back. This is the typical "give
and go" cut (see Diagram A, FC).

Back cuts
A back cut is when you cut behind the defender.
Make a fake toward the ball, then cut quickly
behind the defender. Back cuts can be a "ball-
side" back-cut (see Diagram A, BBC), or a "weak-
side" back-cut which means on the side opposite
the ball, or "back-door" (see Diagram A, WBC).

V-cut
A cut made in the shape of a "V". The first leg of
the "V" can be slow. The last leg of the "V" is
quick (Diagram B, VC). When making the V-cut,
plant the inside foot hard, and step off quickly with
your other foot in the direction of your final cut.

L-cut
A cut made in the shape of an "L", often along the
lane (or "lane cut"). Diagram B, LC. The cut can
be made up the lane, or down the lane (from the
wing position). Use footwork similar to the V-cut.

Curl-cut
A curl is a somewhat circular cut often made
around a teammate (Diagram B, CC).

Button-hook
A quick cut made with a quick stop, a pivot toward
the ball, sealing the defender on your back side,
and receiving the pass from your teammate
(Diagram B, BH).

Shallow cut
A perimeter cut used to exchange positions with
another perimeter player who dribbles into your
position, while you “shallow cut” to his/her
vacated position (Diagram C, SC).

Deep cut
A cut from the perimeter all the way to the basket
and out to the side (Diagram C, DC).

21
Flash Cut
A quick cut made often made by a post player up
to the high post (free-throw line) toward
the ball (Diagram D1, FC).

Jam-Down, V-Cut
First walk your defender down to the block area.
Then plant the inside foot and quickly make the V-
cut back out to receive the ball (Diagram D,
JDVC).

Jam-Down, Back Cut

(Diagram D, JDBC) First walk your defender
down to the block area. Then plant the inside foot
and quickly make the V-cut back out. But this
time the defender is ready and is in front you,
over-playing the pass. So now plant the outside
foot, and go back-door with a quick back-cut. So
that the ball-handler knows which way you are
going, use a hand signal. For example, if you are
going back-door, hold your inside (receiving) hand
up high.

See also:
When you don't have the ball
Setting Screens

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

22
 Ball Handling
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Learning to become a good ball-handler, and developing a feel for the ball for vitally important
in becoming an excellent all-around player.

Hold The Ball Correctly

The most difficult skills, including shooting, passing, catching, dribbling, and rebounding,
involve holding the ball. Work on these skills every day.

Here is how to practice holding the ball:

1. Make both hands into claws. Growl like a lion and move the claws forward like you are going
to rip something apart.
2. Make sure your fingers are far apart.
3. Put the ball between the claws and hold the ball securely. Your only contact with the ball
should be your finger ends, not the pads. The palm and other parts of the hand do not touch
the ball. Overdoing the hold this way is most beneficial.
4. Hold the ball as much as possible at home while watching TV or listening to the radio or
music. It is said that the great Pete Maravich slept with his basketball and held it during his
sleep!

Do ball handling drills at the start of nearly every practice and throughout the entire season.
Players can really improve their ball handling skills by the end of the season. Very importantly,
these drills can also be done at home, in the off-season, without the rest of the team. We have
one of our better ball handlers lead the drill, and face the team. All the other players line up in
rows facing the leader, and spread out so they don't get into each other's way. Everyone has a
ball.

These are the drills: Do each one about 30 to 60 seconds and then move to the next one.
With all of these drills, try to keep your eyes forward, without looking at the ball.

Finger Grabs
Hold the ball with the fingertips, squeezing it while rotating it back and forth from hand to hand.
The ball should not touch the palms of the hands.

Pound the ball

Pound or slap the ball hard from hand to hand.

Circles
Move the ball in a circular motion around one leg, then the other leg. Then circle around the
back. And then circle around the head. Then combine them and move the ball in circles around
your head, then down your body, down around your knees, and then around your ankles. Then
come back up again. Be sure to use your fingertips, not the palms.

Figure Eights
Spread your legs out wide with the ball in front of you. Move the ball around through your legs
in a figure-of-eight motion. Keep your eyes forward and don't let the ball hit the floor. After 30
seconds, reverse the direction.

Tipping
Tip the ball back and forth from one hand to the next, starting with your hands straight up over
your head. Then gradually move the ball down, while continuing to tip it back and forth. Go
down to your chest, then your waist, knees, and ankles, and then back up again.

23
Drops
Put the ball between your feet and grab it with both hands. Start with the left hand behind your
left leg and your right hand in front of your right leg. Drop the ball and let it bounce once.
Quickly, move your left hand in front of your left leg and your right hand behind your right leg,
and catch the ball as it bounces up. Drop it again and switch your hands back to the original
position (left behind, right in front) and catch it. Repeat this motion continuously. For a more
difficult variation, try catching the ball before it actually hits the floor!

Overhead Toss, Catch Behind Back

Toss the ball straight up. Then while the ball is in the air, pivot around and catch the ball with
both hands behind your back.

See also: basic dribbling drills.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

24
 Dribbling
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Dribbling is one of the most fundamental skills that must be learned. Not only is it important to
learn how to dribble well, but it is important to know when, and when not, to dribble. One player
who over-dribbles can kill a team's offensive motion and momentum. To become a good
dribbler and ball handler, you must practice dribbling as often as you can, using both hands.
You may dribble:
1. To advance the ball up the court.
2. To drive to the hoop.
3. To get open for a shot.
4. To open up a passing lane, to have a better chance of completing a pass.
5. To get out of a trap.
6. To kill the clock at the end of a game.

How to Dribble
Use your fingertips, not the palms of your hands.. Basketball is played on the tips of your
fingers and the balls of your feet. Use your forearm and wrist to bounce the ball. Don't look at
the ball... keep your head up and eyes forward. You must learn to use either hand. So when
doing drills, always work both hands.

Control Dribble
When a defender is close guarding you, you should use the "control dribble". Keep in a
somewhat crouched, bent over position. Keep your body between the ball and the defender.
Keep the ball low to the floor, and close to your body. Keep your other arm straight out in front
of you, as a guard against the defender. You can't push off, or grab the defender, but you can
keep a "stiff-arm" to keep the defender from reaching around you. Do not stop, or give up, your
dribble until you can either pass or shoot. Once you stop your dribble, you are "dead in the
water" (a boat with no engine)... and the sharks (the double team) will close in on you soon.

Speed Dribble
To move the ball quickly down the floor use the "speed dribble". Push the ball forward, ahead
of you several feet. Bounce the ball at least waist high. As always, keep your head up, and
visualize the whole court, so you can find the open teammate. Move as fast as you can, but
never faster than you can control the ball. You must always be in control. As Coach Wooden
has said, "You must be quick, but never hurry." Often a jump stop at the end of the speed
dribble will allow you to maintain control and avoid a traveling call (see Learning the Jump
Stop).

Crossover Dribble
Simply, the crossover dribble has you switch dribbling from one hand to the other, by bouncing
the ball in front of you across to the other side. Then the other hand picks up the ball and you
are now dribbling with the opposite hand. You can use this dribble to quickly change your
direction on the court. For example, you could be on the point, dribbling with your right hand to
the right wing, then suddenly crossover the dribble to the left and drive up the lane.

In and Out Dribble

The "in and out" dribble is a good fake move to help you get around a defender and take it to
the hoop. With this move, you make one bounce in front of you as if you were going to
crossover, but instead of picking the ball up with your other hand, you just roll your dribbling
hand over the top of the ball, and bring it sharply back and go hard around the defender. For
example, if you are dribbling right-handed, make one dribble to the left in front of you and "dip"
and put your weight on your left foot. To the defender, this looks like you will crossover and go
left. Instead, roll your right hand over the top of the ball and bring it back quickly to the right,
push off the left foot, and go hard around the right side of your opponent.

25
Hesitation Dribble ("Rocker Move")
This is another fake move to help you get around the defender in the open court. You speed
dribble up to the defender, then suddenly come to a stop by putting your inside foot forward
and "rocking" backward onto your outside foot. Then as the defender closes, you blow around
his side, resuming the speed dribble, straight to the hoop. For example, you are speed dribbling
with your right hand. As you approach the defender, you stop suddenly by putting your left foot
forward, and then rocking back on the right foot. This hesitation throws the defender's timing
off. Then push hard off the right foot, and speed dribble around his right side. You can also use
this move and combine it with a crossover dribble and go hard left.

Behind the Back Dribble, Through the Legs Dribble

You used to be considered a "hot dog" if you dribbled behind your back, or through your legs.
But not any more! These moves are very useful when used correctly, in the right situations. A
good use for these dribbles is in the open court, such as a guard bringing the ball down the
floor against pressure from a defender. As you are dribbling right with your right hand, the
defender gets position and over-plays you to the right. Quickly, you do a behind the back, or
between the legs dribble to crossover to the other hand, and change your direction to the left,
leaving your defender in the dust! Why not just do an easier crossover dribble? -- because the
defender is right in front of you and could steal the crossover. By going behind the back, or
through the legs, you can better protect the ball by keeping your body between the ball and the
defender.
To do the behind the back dribble, dribble the ball once behind you and pick up the dribble with
the opposite hand. For example, you are dribbling with the right hand. Get your body ahead of
the ball on your right side, then crossover bounce it once behind you over to the left hand. The
between the legs move is similar, except with one bounce through the legs to the other hand.
To see animated demonstrations of dribble moves, visit Steph's moving dribbling drills.

See also:
Basic Dribbling Drills
Dribble Tag
Be sure to visit Steph's Ball Handling Drills

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

26
 The Lost Art of Passing
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Remember the line, "Where have you gone Joe DiMaggio?" For this topic, it's "Where have
you gone Magic Johnson?" Magic was a great, unselfish TEAM player who may have been the
greatest passer of all time (although John Stockton is pretty good too). Television focuses on
watching the pros doing their one-on-one moves and slam dunks. Kids see this too. Team
skills and delivering the perfectly timed and accurate pass aren't as flashy. Besides, who wants
to do passing drills... everyone finds them boring, both players and coaches. I am at fault too...
this passing article is the last one I have written in the "Player Development" section of this
web-site.

On the other hand, excellent passing is the essence of outstanding team play, and it is really
fun to watch a perfectly timed and delivered pass for an easy lay-up (or dunk). Poor passing
and turnovers will kill your offense quicker than anything. A bad pass results in a turnover, no
shot taken and an opportunity to score is lost. Players must become better passers and we
coaches must continue to find ways to teach them to become better passers.

Passing seems very easy when you have two players facing each other practicing chest
passes or bounce passes. But put a defender on each one of them, and it becomes really
difficult. So, I think that once you get beyond the early formative stages in a player's
development, you must do passing drills with defenders involved to simulate game situations.

A good pass is one that is caught by the receiver. Successful passing involves two parts,
making the pass and receiving the pass. The receiver should have “soft” (relaxed) hands,
catch the ball with both hands and look the ball into his/her hands. The receiver should, in
most cases, be moving toward the pass... "meet the pass". Most of the time, the receiver
should not be stationary. The receiver must learn to get open by making V-cuts and back-cuts,
and setting screens for other teammates and then sealing the defender and "rolling" off those
screens (see Cutting and Faking, Setting Screens). A receiver should always know where the
ball is.

A big part of passing is making correct decisions with the ball. If a defender is in the passing
lane, you don't force the pass. You should not pass into the defense, or "into a crowd" where
your receiver is surrounded by defenders... sounds obvious but I see it all the time. Pass away
from the defense. Do not pass into a situation where your receiver is not in a good position to
receive the ball. An example of this would be passing up the floor against a press where your
receiver has his/her back turned away from the hoop and there is a defender coming up on the
blind side.

This next point is very important. A good passer knows how to open the passing lanes by
making a fake in one direction, and then passing the opposite direction. Making a ball fake,
head bob, pass fake, or just looking the opposite direction ("looking the defender off") will often
open the desired passing lane. Do not look right at your receiver or “telegraph” your passes.
Use your peripheral vision and keep your eyes forward and know where your teammates are at
all times. Bad passes can result from dribbling with your head down, and then at the end of the
dribble, making a quick pass... often to a defender who slips into the passing lane.
A good passer knows how to deliver the ball with "touch"... that is, with just the right velocity
and angle to make it an easy catch for the receiver. A pass can be in the perfect location, but if
it is too hard, it is uncatchable by your teammate and you lose the ball. If your pass is too soft
and easy, the defense can intercept it.

You must learn to "anticipate"... that is, pass the ball to where your teammate will soon be, not
where he/she is right now. You must lead the receiver, and not pass behind him/her. Good

27
passing involves timing and communication between the passer and receiver. That's why it
really is not an easy skill to master because it involves two players working together.

Both the passer and the receivers must learn to read the defense. Learn to “drive and dish”
where you make a penetrating dribble move, but then at the last moment when you have drawn
the defense to you, you either make the bounce pass to a post player under the hoop, or you
kick it out to the wing or corner for a three-pointer.

Just like shooting, you must be under control when you make a pass. You should be balanced
with both feet on the floor. When speed-dribbling down the floor on a fast-break, keep your
eyes forward and stay under control so you can deliver the pass to the open teammate at the
precise, correct moment. I see the following subtle passing error made occasionally on the fast
break. The player speed-dribbling the ball up the floor, when making the final pass on the
break, will sometimes at the end of the dribble bring the ball back on the hip to get more
velocity on the pass. A hustling defender comes up from behind and pokes the ball loose from
the passer… it usually goes out-of-bounds, but you have lost a chance to score a lay-up.
When making this pass, keep the ball in front of you.

Don't get into the habit of jumping when you pass. If you jump when you pass, you have no
other option but to pass, and if the defense closes the passing lane while you are airborne,
you're in trouble.

Let's take a few specific instances:

Point Guard to Wing pass.
The wing player should first make a V-cut and the passer should time the pass for when the
receiver breaks back out of the V-cut. If the defender is back off the wing player, pass the ball
right into his/her numbers, or on your teammate's side toward the hoop, so that he/she is
immediately is position to release the shot. If the pass is made to the outside, the receiver
must first pivot and square up before he/she can shoot. Now, if the defender is up closer,
make the pass to the outside of your teammate. If the defender is in the passing lane, your
teammate should make a back-cut to get open... if not, he/she has no shot and you should look
to pass elsewhere, or make a move yourself. Another point... the pass to the backcut can be a
pass straight to your cutting teammate, or often a nice bounce pass leading the receiver will do
the job here.

Perimeter Passing.
Contrary to what is often taught, the chest pass is not real good here. To make a chest pass,
you must have a clear passing lane directly in front of you. If the defender is in front of you, a
pass that comes from your chest area is easily deflected. The bounce pass is usually too slow
on the perimeter and can easily be intercepted. Instead, use either the lateral pass or the two-
handed overhead pass.
In making the lateral pass, you fake opposite and then cross your opposite foot (the foot which
is away from the direction of the pass) in front of you and step in the direction of the pass. You
deliver the pass with some "zip" on it so it cannot be intercepted. For example, if you want to
pass to the right, you make a fake to the left and then cross your left foot over in front of you
while pivoting on your right foot and make the pass to the right. This is almost like a chest pass
except the pass is not released from the center chest area, but more from your side.

The two-handed overhead pass is often used as an outlet pass off a rebound, or for a "skip"
pass (a cross-court pass over a zone defense). It can also be used to quickly move the ball
around the perimeter. Your target is your teammate's head... a little higher than the chest. In
making this pass, do not bring the ball back behind your head… keep it straight up (or slightly
in front) and over your head.

28
Passing into the Post
Timing is very important here. The pass should be made as the post player is coming into
his/her post position. A bounce pass is often effective and easy to catch, but is slower than the
two-handed overhead pass. Once the ball is on the wing, the pass to the low post should be
made quickly before the defense is set. The passer should be able to clear the passing lane by
making a good fake, and should also learn how to make the "step-around" pass (fake an
overhead pass, and with the non-pivot foot make a long stride around the defender to improve
the passing angle. One error I see in making the step-around pass is when the player is
making the actual step-around, he/she will bring the ball around the back or hip, as if to protect
it. This slows the timing of the pass and gives the defense just enough time to react and
possibly intercept the pass.

When the low post is fronted, a lob pass over the top can be attempted, but only if your post
player has a clear advantage... this pass is often unsuccessful.

Passing Drills
See the menu of standard passing drills on this web-site. In addition, I would incorporate
passing drills where defense is played against the pass. Passing is easy and boring with no
defenders involved. It becomes a very difficult skill once defenders are in place.

You can design your own simple drills. One would be to practice the pass from point to wing
and back, using one or two defenders. Teach the V-cut and back-cut. Teach the point guard
how to make a nice leading bounce pass to the back-cutter.

Another drill practices the wing to low post pass using two defenders. Teach the passer how to
fake and open the passing lane and how to make the "step-around" bounce pass (see above).
He/she must also recognize the correct target. If the defender is playing on the baseline side,
make the pass to your teammate's hip on the lane side. If the defender is playing on the lane
side, put the pass on your teammate's baseline hip. You can also front the low post and
practice the lob pass "over the top".

Another drill is to put your offense in a half-court set against a man-to-man defense, and have
them pass against this defense... no dribbling allowed, unless it is a one or two bounce dribble
to attack the hoop, or a drive and dish. After five possessions, switch offense and defense.
Make sure your receivers are making good V-cuts or back-cuts and they come to the ball when
receiving. Here also is an opportunity to stress the importance of setting good screens. All
passes are caught with two hands with the receiver in triple threat position.

Also practice passing against various zones, again with no dribbling... get them to move the
ball quickly in order to over-shift the zone. Use the two-handed overhead pass and skip
passes. Get them to recognize the gaps in the zone. Use the bounce pass into the post, and
make good inside passes. Not only do these drills help your passing, but also help your team
to learn how to break zone defenses down... and it's a lot more fun than just doing simple
partner passing drills.

Another drill in transition would be to simply run your press-breaker against a press defense,
and allow no dribbling.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

29
 The Basic Shots -- the Lay-up
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net
The lay-up is the easiest shot and the first shot you should learn. It's not as easy as it looks at
first, as a lot of kids have difficulty getting the correct footwork, and shooting off the correct foot.
Then you must also learn to use either hand, and eventually do the reverse lay-up.
Footwork
When dribbling toward the basket, move slightly to one side of the hoop to create the proper
angle. If you're on the right side, dribble right-handed, and plant your left (inside) foot and jump
off that foot, and finally shoot with your right hand. As you raise your right hand, your right
knee should also elevate. Pretend there is a string attached to your right hand and your right
knee. Reverse this form if shooting from the left side. As you approach the hoop, take a half
step with your outside foot, then take a full stride with your inside foot pushing off the court.
When jumping your outside knee should be bent. Go directly toward the basket, with your
head up and eyes focused on the backboard. Go up strong and straight to the hoop. Don't shy
away if there is a defender, just go strong to the hoop. You may get fouled and get a three
point chance.

Aim
Always use the backboard ("use the glass") when shooting
lay-ups from either side. Aim for the top corner of the box
on the backboard. Focus in on this area; don't watch the
ball. Keep your head up.
The Push Release
Younger players who are not yet strong enough for the
underhand release should use the push release. Release
the ball with the back of your hands facing you. Extend your
shooting arm, as you push the ball to the hoop off your
fingertips. You should go up with two hands, then release
the ball with your outside hand. A very young player may
need to shoot the ball with two hands.
Underhand Release
As you get stronger, you should develop the underhand shot.
This release results in a softer shot, and more control when
you are moving at high speed. Release the ball with your
palm up and arm extended. Let the ball roll off your palm and
then your fingertips, and lay the ball softly off the backboard.
Use two hands going up, but then release the ball with your
outside hand at the top of your jump. Be strong and
concentrate... "finish"!

Here is a simple drill or technique to help teach the footwork.

Have the players get into a line near the right side of the basket (to shoot the right-handed lay-
up). Each player takes a turn. You can use more than one basket if you have enough
assistants to watch each player's technique. This drill works on correct footwork. Have the
player (with a ball) face the right side of the backboard with both feet together. Then have her
take one step forward with the inside (left) foot, plant that foot and jump off of it and shoot the
right-handed lay-up. When jumping, the right thigh comes up with the knee bent. Have each
player work on this technique. Then try it on the run (without dribbling), and then with dribbling.
Do the left side also... on this side you step forward and plant the right (inside) foot, and raise
the left thigh and leg.
See also: 3 Line Lay-up Drill, Full Court Dribbling (and Lay-up) Drillsll Court Dribbling Drillsll
Court Dribbling Drillsll Court Dribbling Drillsll Court Dribbling Drills
30
31
 The Set Shot, Shooting Form
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The set shot, the lay-up and the hook shot, were about the only shots before the jump shot
came along. The set shot is still used for free throws and perimeter shots, or shots when the
shooter is wide open. However, the shooting technique used with the set shot is the same
basic technique employed by the jump shot.

Start with shots only one foot from the basket, to develop correct technique. Move farther away
as you get better, but do not sacrifice correct technique. Practice shooting from locations where
you will likely shoot from in a game.

Stance
Have your feet about shoulder width apart. If you shoot right-handed, your right foot should be
slightly forward, and your weight should be on the balls of your feet (not the heels). Your
shoulders and body should be square to the hoop, although some great shooters are more
comfortable with the side that the ball is on turned a little toward the hoop (find out which is
most comfortable for you). Your knees should be bent a little as your thigh muscles will provide
power for your shot. Don't move sideways when shooting. Stay balanced.

Holding the ball

Use both hands to hold the ball, but only your shooting hand will actually propel the ball
forward. Don't shoot two-handed. Your shooting hand is the "platform" and should be
underneath the ball with your wrist cocked back. Your other hand helps support or balance the
ball, but does not enter into the actual shooting of the ball. Your non-shooting hand should
actually come off the ball just before you release the ball, so that you are shooting with one
hand, just your shooting hand. Use your fingertips, not palms, to hold and release the ball.

Here is a method to learn what the correct "platform" is. Extend your
shooting arm straight forward with your palm facing up and let the ball sit
comfortably your hand (fingers comfortably apart). Now in one motion,
bend the elbow while rotating the forearm, wrist and hand outward and
upward, and under the ball so that the ball is now resting on your hand
above your right shoulder with the wrist cocked back. The shoulder is the
"hinge", the elbow points toward the hoop and an "L" is formed by the
forearm and the arm (looking from the shooting arm side). Your elbow
should be in and pointing at the basket.
Set Point
The set point is where you position the ball just prior to releasing the ball. If you are right-
handed, have the ball to the right of your face, a little toward the right shoulder. Don't line the
ball up in the center of your face, as this may result in your shooting elbow flying away from
your body, and could actually cause your wrist to turn sideways (supinate) when you release
the ball, imparting a side-spin. Also, it is best that the ball is as high as your forehead, or even
higher (if you are strong enough or close to the basket), in order to keep your shot from being
blocked. Younger players who have less strength will have a lower set point, perhaps even
below the shoulder, in order to get more power. As the youngster matures, his set point should
move higher.

32
Upward Force
Most of the power in your shot should come from the upward force of your jump (in the jump
shot), or the upward force from your thighs moving upward (in the free throw). You should not
try to power up longer shots with your arm, wrist or hand muscles. Let the big muscles in the
legs do the work. Release your shot on the upward force of the jump, not on the way down.

Aiming the ball

Pick out a spot to aim at... either the back of the rim, or just over the front of the rim, or the
backboard (if you are shooting a bank shot). Concentrate on this spot, and don't look at the
ball, or the flight of the ball.

Releasing (shooting) the ball

Use the shoulder as a "hinge". Your shooting arm extends forward toward the hoop (keep the
elbow in), and then you release the ball with a snap of the wrist, with the ball rolling off your
fingertips. This will impart a backspin, or "rotation" on the ball, that all good shooters have.
This backspin is what makes the ball land softly on the rim, and often creates a favorable
"shooter's" bounce, resulting in a score, even though the shot was not perfect. Shoot the ball
high with an arch on the flight of the ball; you don't want to shoot a flat, line drive, type of shot.
An arched shot has a better chance of going in, since the target (the hoop) is actually bigger
and wider for a ball coming in from above, than from a line drive. Don't "push" the ball with the
heel of your palm; let it come off your fingertips.

The release should be repeatable, and pretty much the same with every shot. Don't sling the
ball up for more power on long shots... use the power from the up-force of your jump, or lower
your set point a little or more power. Don't pull the ball back over and behind your head before
releasing it, as this will result in a flat, line-drive type shot. On shorter shots, release the ball
more at the top of the jump and use a higher set point (arms extended up over your head).

Follow Through
This is important in getting the proper rotation (back spin) on the ball.
Your fingers should be pointing toward the hoop, and your wrist bent
forward, in a "goose neck" fashion. Another analogy is if you were
"reaching into the cookie jar" high on the shelf. Hold this release after
your shot until the ball hits the rim. You will notice that with a proper
follow-through, the palm of your hand will be facing downward toward
the floor. If it is turned sideways with the back of the hand facing
outward (as if you were going to shake hands with someone), then you
are incorrectly twisting your wrist during the release.

Get Tom Nordland's excellent shooting SWISH video to learn how to

shoot.
Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

33
 The Jump Shot
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The jump shot is the most common shot used today. It revolutionized the game back in the late
50's and 60's. Most games used to be very low scoring until the arrival of the jump shot. With
the jump shot you don't have to be stationary and open (like with a set shot). You can score on
the move, and in traffic, by jumping and extending your shot over the defender.

Be sure that you don't start shooting a jump shot until you are physically strong enough. If you
start too young, you will sacrifice good technique

Gripping the Ball, Footwork

Receive the ball in the "triple threat" position, where you are ready to either shoot, pass, or
drive. Young kids have difficulty shooting the jump shot because they are not strong enough
yet. They will often use a two handed method. But you must develop the correct technique to
be effective. First start with shots only one foot from the basket. Gradually extend your range
out. If you get too far out, your technique will fall apart and you will develop bad habits. If your
shot is suffering, try to fix it by going back to the basic one foot shot near the basic, using
proper release, backspin ("rotation") etc.

Gripping the ball and the shooting motion are the same as in the set shot. The shooting hand
acts as a "platform" and is under the ball. The other hand is used to balance the ball and
should be on the side of the ball. Receive the ball with your knees bent and feet shoulder width
apart. Use your legs to provide the power for your shot. Be sure that you are squared up to the
basket, with your shoulders lined up to the hoop. It is important that you are in balance before
releasing the shot. . Spring off the floor with both feet and do not drift sideways. Go straight up,
or slightly forward for longer shots, and shoot the ball just before you reach the height of your
jump, especially on outside shots, where you need the extra power of the upward force from
the jump. On short shots in the paint, shoot from the top of your jump. When going up for the
shot, the shooting arm forms an "L" with the elbow pointing toward the hoop, and the forearm
vertical, with the ball up over your head.

Release
Focus in on your shooting spot, either the back of the rim, just over the front, or a section of the
backboard. Concentrate on this area; don't watch the flight of the ball. When shooting, the
shoulder acts as a "hinge" as you extend your arm upward. Keep the elbow in and release the
ball with a snap or the wrist, letting it roll off your fingertips. Then extend your fingers and wrist
in a "gooseneck" fashion, or like you were "reaching into the cookie jar" high in the cupboard
(see set shot).

See also:
Set Shot
Close-Out Shooting Drill
Pairs Shooting Drill
Power Drill

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

34
 The Hook Shot

The hook shot came into being over half a century ago with George Mikan and the Minneapolis
Lakers. This shot is used mainly by post players close to the basket, near the blocks or in the
paint. The post player receives the ball inside with his/her back to the basket. The original
“classic” shot is started by pivoting sideways on the non-shooting foot (the left foot with a right-
handed shot) with the foot remaining on the floor. The body is turned sideways to the hoop
with the off-shoulder pointing toward the hoop. Keep your body between the ball and the
defender. The shooting arm is extended away from the hoop and the defender on about a 45-
degree angle. This is a one-handed shot. The shooter must turn his neck and head to look at
the target. Like any good shot, the ball is released from the fingertips with a snap of the wrist.
The off-arm can be held up to ward off the defender, but you cannot push or “hook” the
defender with that arm.

Like most things, the hook shot has evolved over the years. Kareem Abdul Jabbar of the Los
Angeles Lakers turned it into the unstoppable “sky hook” in the ‘80’s. The 7-footer would catch
the ball, and pivot on the non-shooting foot, but instead of keeping the foot on the floor, would
jump off the floor while extending the shooting arm high. About the only way defenses could
stop this would be to deny Kareem the ball, double-team so that he couldn’t get into the motion
of the shot, foul him, or just hope that he would miss one occasionally.

Jump hook
The modern-day jump hook merges the techniques of the old classic hook shot with the jump
shot. The ball is received usually with the back to the basket. The shooter pivots and the body
is turned sideways (perpendicular) to the basket with the shoulders in a line toward the hoop.
The shooter jumps up off both feet much like a jump shot. Instead of extending the shooting
arm outward and away from the hoop (as in the classic hook shot), the shooting arm extends
vertically and high with the ball above the shoulder. The head is turned so that the shooter can
see the target. The ball is released from the fingertips with a snap of the wrist, much like a
jump shot.

Learn to shoot the jump hook with either hand.

The jump hook is an important weapon that any great post player ought to include in his
arsenal. A good low post player can keep the defender guessing by mixing up the jump hook
with the baseline drop-step move, the up-and-under move and the turn and shoot move.

Copyright 2004, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

35
 Outside (Perimeter) One-On-One Moves
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

These are some basic moves the outside player should learn.
Know how to jump stop off the speed dribble, and how to receive the pass with a jump stop
(see Learning the Jump Stop).

When you receive the ball, be ready to shoot, pass, or drive.

Receive the ball within your shooting range... if you are too far out, the defender can back off of
you, since you are not a threat to score from that position.

Triple threat position

1. Catch the ball and get squared up to the basket so you can see the basket, the defender and
any open teammates.
2. Have your hands positioned on the ball in the shooting position, so you are ready to shoot.
3. Keep your weight back on your pivot foot (often the left foot for a right-handed player).

Learn to read the defense... use a short jab step, or drive step, with your non-pivot foot. Jab
the foot forward quickly, hold for 1 second and judge the defender's reaction. See if she drops
back, or stays up. If she stays up, see which side is vulnerable to your drive.

A few tips on the jab step...

1. Read the defender... whichever foot the defender has forward is his vulnerable side and
that's the side you make your drive to the hoop. Now, we don't really want players looking at
their feet... we like them to see the whole floor. So to read the defender, read his arm
position... the arm that is up high is almost always the same side as his forward foot. So drive
at the defender's higher arm... this way you can keep your head up and see the floor.

2. Do not rush the jab step (give it a count of one).

3. The jab step should not be too long where the player then has his weight forward on the jab
foot.

Which foot becomes the pivot foot and which is used for the jab step?
The answer often lies in how you receive the pass. There are two techniques in receiving the
perimeter pass, depending on the amount of space the receiver has created between himself
and his defender. Depending on how this pass is received will determine which foot is your
pivot foot and which foot you jab step with.

1. Situation #1. Plenty of space between receiver and the defender.

Catch the ball in a position to shoot, squared up to the hoop. As you meet the pass, you are
turning your body to face the hoop. You want to receive this pass with your shooting hand, and
as the pass arrives, you "jump behind it", catch it and land with both feet squared up to the
hoop. In this situation, use your inside foot now as your pivot foot, and jab step with the outside
foot.

2. Situation #2. Tightly guarded with the defender up close on the receiver.
The receiver should move toward the ball and catch it with both hands extended, and land on
the inside foot (closest to the basket and defender) and establish that foot as the pivot foot.
This way, you can protect the ball with the body. Now here's where many average players go
wrong... many will immediately start to dribble here, instead of making the aggressive front
pivot and face the defender. After making the front pivot (while protecting the ball), now you
make the jab step with the opposite foot (the inside foot), and if the defender is up close on
you, you can often take it to the hoop around him.

36
Three basic outside moves:
1. Drive step, jump shot.
In triple threat position, make a drive step (jab step) and read the defense. If the defender
drops off, bring your jab step foot back, toes even with your other foot, and pop the jump shot.

2. Drive step, straight drive.

In triple threat position, make a drive step (jab step) and read the defense. If the defender does
not drop back, read her arms-feet (see above tips). If her left foot is forward, take a long quick
dribble to the right by extending your jab step forward. Go in a quick straight line off her left
shoulder to the hoop. The most common mistake players make is going too wide around the
defender to avoid contact. This just gives the defender time to react. Go right off the defender's
shoulder and don't be afraid to make a little contact.

3. Drive step, cross-over drive.

In triple threat position, make a drive step (jab step) and read the defense. If the defender does
not drop back, read her arms-feet (see above tips). If her right foot is forward, swing the ball
low and cross to the left. Quickly cross your right foot over to the left (do not first return your jab
step back). Drive in a straight line, hard off her right shoulder.

Drive and dish...

When you drive to the hoop, read the defense. Take the lay-up, or easy short jumper, if you are
open. But a good, helping defense will pick you up as you drive. As another defender comes up
to defend you, find the open teammate that she left behind, and dish the ball to her for an easy
assist. Remember, a penetrating guard who is willing to make the extra pass to an open
teammate under the basket is one of the most difficult situations for any defense to stop.

Perimeter moves when a team-mate has the ball... reading the defense.
Learn to read the defense, situations for perimeter players:

1. You are one pass away from your team-mate and the defense is denying the pass to you:
Make a fake outside, and then cut hard backdoor. The low post on that side should learn to
read this situation also and clear out to the opposite side, to make spacing for the backdoor cut.
See Diagram B.

2. You are one pass away and the defender is sagging off you: make a V-cut inside and come
back out for the perimeter pass. See Diagram C.

3. You are one pass away, and the defender is playing good defense and you can't get free:
Set a screen either for the ballhandler or the low post.

See "Cutting and Faking".

37
Here are additional things to work on, to become the complete outside, perimeter player.
Work on your outside shooting, especially "catch and shoot" drills.

Work on your dribbling and ball-handling for 15-20 minutes each day. Challenge yourself with
even the more difficult drills... don't just do the easy ones. You want to make some mistakes,
otherwise the drill is too easy. Twenty minutes every day using both right and left hands, and
you will definitely be a better ball-hander and dribbler in just a few months.
See: Ball-handling, Dribbling, Basic Dribbling Drills, Sideline Dribbling Drills, and Full-Court
Dribbling Drills.

Learn how to set screens, pick 'n roll correctly and how to backcut. Look at this page to learn
fundamental cuts and moves for perimeter players as they apply to all motion offenses: Motion
Offense Drills

Also, learn the basic principles of good man-to-man defense, on-ball defense, deny and
helpside defense. If you learn these concepts, you will have no problem learning to play various
zone defenses.

This is a lot of stuff but are all "musts" for any complete player.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

38
 Inside (Post) Moves
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

These are some basic moves the inside player should learn.

Get Position
Before you can make a move on the low post, you have to be able to get the ball first. You want
to post-up, or receive the ball, along the free throw lane, between the center hash marks. You
do not want to post up in the lane, or you may get the three-second call. You may have to fight
hard to get into position to receive a safe pass. Get strong, feet wide apart, butt out, back
straight. Seal the defender off. If she is over-playing you from one side, keep that arm and
elbow firm to ward her off, while extending the opposite arm and hand to make a good target
for the passer. When the pass comes, move toward it, to meet it. After receiving the ball, keep
it up at forehead level with elbows out, to protect it. Do not actually throw an elbow, just keep
them out to ward off the defender.

When receiving the pass, it is advantageous to meet the ball with a jump stop. When you jump
stop, you have the option of either foot becoming your pivot foot, so you can make a move
either way, to the lane or to the baseline. With a one-two foot landing, you have already
established your pivot foot and your options are more limited (see Footwork Fundamentals).

Two things to try if you can't get open:

1. Move away off the low post a few steps, then quickly come right back.
2. If the defender stays in front of you, move her up to the high post at the elbow. Then give the
passer a hand signal, and quickly cut back-door for the lob pass to the hoop.

Low post moves

1. Drop step to baseline.
After receiving the ball, feel where the defender is. If she is on the lane, or high side, give a
fake toward the lane. Then extend your inside (baseline) foot backward, pivot on it quickly to
the baseline and to the hoop. Keep your body between the defender and the ball, and extend
your arms forward toward the hoop. This way, she can only block your shot by going over your
back ...usually a foul.

2. Drop step to lane (jump hook).

After receiving the ball, feel where the defender is. If she is on your baseline side, fake to the
baseline, and drop your lane-side foot backward. Pivot quickly on that foot, and jump hook and
shoot with the hand opposite the defender.

3. Turn and face defender and jab step.

After receiving the ball, feel where the defender is. If she is directly behind you, that is, not
toward either the lane or the baseline, but right behind you, do this. Pivot and face the
defender, while protecting the ball. Give a quick jab step fake, and see what she her reaction is.
If she drops back, just shoot up the baby jumper, often off the glass. This is a good high-
percentage shot.
If she does not back off the jab step, quickly drive around her. Go right off her shoulder... don't
be afraid of a little contact, because usually she will not be planted after your jab step, and
she'll get called for the foul (and you may make the basket as well).

4. Up and under move

After pivoting and facing the defender, fake a shot to get her to leave her feet. Once she has
straightened up, or jumped, you can beat her. Quickly duck under her on a straight line to the
hoop. Again, don't be afraid to bounce off her shoulder, as this is the straightest path, and
quickest way to the hoop. If a foul is called, it will be on her, since she was not obviously
planted when she jumped after your shot fake.

39
5. Flash to the elbow or free throw line
Cut up to the free throw line (get out of the lane to avoid a 3-second call). Receive the ball,
pivot and face the defender. You can now either fake a shot, and drive around the defender to
the hoop, or jab step and fake the drive, and shoot the easy shot from the free throw line area.
This move is especially useful if the player guarding you is much taller, and not as quick. You
go high post to get him away from the basket. Once he is away from the hoop, you use your
quickness and drive around him.

6. Back door lob

If the defender is in front of you, take him up to the free throw line. While he is still fronting you,
seal him off, give the guard with the ball a signal, and cut back door to the hoop, receiving the
lob pass from your teammate.

These moves are not easy at first. They require a lot of practice... first to perfect the moves
themselves... and then to learn by experience which move to use in which situation. For
example, if you beat the defender once or twice with the baseline drop step, then she will be
looking for that move, and you can easily get the turn around jab step baby jumper, because
she will back off. Just the opposite, if you have already made a couple baby jumpers, you can
drop step either to the baseline or lane, or do the up and under move, since she will be looking
for your jumper. The bottom line... perfect the moves by practicing, and vary your moves in the
game.

Another real bonus is that frequently these moves will get the defender into foul trouble when
she tries to stop you. If she already is in foul trouble, she won't challenge you, and you can
easily take it to the hoop. This is also very important... since you will get fouled a lot, become a
good free throw shooter... make that defender pay for fouling you!

7. Learn to read the defense.

See the low post information on the Basic Concepts of Motion Offense page.

8. Drills: Low Post Offensive Drills, Low Post Power Drill, 3-Man Rebounding Power Drill
Also read the post moves on Basic Concepts of Motion Offense.

Playing the High Post.

I added this after a coach emailed me and informed me that his post player was pretty good
down on the low block, but didn't have a clue what to do up at the elbow or free throw line area
-- the "high post" area.

When the high-post player has the ball, he/she is in excellent position to make a pass to the
opposite side (reverse the ball) or to a back-door cutter. Also, he/she can find a teammate
spotted up for a three-pointer on the wing or in the corner. So being a good passer and finding
the open teammate is important here.

The high post player should look to score also. At the foul line and elbows, have him/her pivot
and face the hoop, looking to take the open shot, or looking for the pass to a baseline cutter. If
his defender is up close in his face, have him fake the shot and use his quickness to explode
around him and take it to the hoop. So you see that even your big man must have the ability to
shoot the shot from the free-throw line, or fake and drive, just like a perimeter player.

An excellent high post move to learn is the "hop step". Let's say you are at the free throw line
area and you want to dribble it inside to score. The problem is that when you dribble up the
lane, you will frequently have the ball swiped away by the collapsing defense. Instead, make
the "hop-step" power move, which is a one-bounce with one step move followed by a two-

40
footed jump stop into the lane. Make your fake and then start the dribble on your side with a
one-bounce power dribble while you are making a relatively short first step. After making the
short first step and power-dribble, make a long, powerful jump into the paint and land with a
two-footed jump stop, and then go right up with the short jumper in the lane. It takes some
practice, but this is an excellent move to have. A common error is to make the first step too
long... you cannot make a strong power jump forward from this position. Keep the first step
short and on-balance.

The elbow shooting drill would be an excellent drill here: see 2-Man Shooting Drills.
Also the #3 drill on that same page would be good too... have the passer, after making the pass
to him, rush up and close out tightly on him, and then he power drives around him to the hoop.

A post player is so much more effective and versatile if he/she can shoot the shot from the free-
throw line consistently. Several years ago, we had a young lady who was only 5'7" and played
the post. She was very quick and a smart player. In our Regional game, she was defended by
a girl 6'3". The first few times, she tried to post up down low and got her shot blocked each
time. Being the great competitor that she was, she didn't get discouraged, but instead of
posting up on the low block, decided to take her defender up high to the elbow area. She
popped in a couple quick shots from the high post area, and then when the tall girl came out on
her, Liz used her quickness to beat her to the hoop for the lay-up. Now the tall girl didn't know
whether to play up tight or back off. Liz had the best game of her career, scored 23 points
against the giant, and we won by 7. Just goes to show you how having the versatility of posting
up high, being a good high post shooter, and taking your defender away from the hoop can
really pay off.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

41
 Becoming a Good Free Throw Shooter
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

First, understand how important free-throw shooting is. At least 3-4 games per year in a 20
game schedule will be determined by free-throw shooting. All close games, the ones that really
count.. the close tournament games and conference championship games can be won or lost
on the free throw line.

Team Goals in free throw shooting.

Middle school teams should strive for 60% from the line, and high school teams should look to
70% as a goal. You won't shoot as well in a game as in practice, so strive for 75% (high school)
in practice. Understand that this is a team skill... become a good free throw shooting team.
Encourage and work with your teammates on free throws. Take a positive, aggressive attitude
in shooting free throws... take the attitude that the opponent made a big mistake in fouling you,
and you're gonna' make 'em pay for it! This is much better than worrying about whether or not
you will make it.

How to become good free throw shooters... fundamentals, attitude and practice.
In shooting free throws, develop a ritual where you do it the same exact way every time.
Position yourself on the line the same way every time. Bounce the ball the same number of
times every time, and take a deep breath before shooting every time. This creates muscle and
mind memory, and allows you to be successful more often. Success creates confidence, and
confidence creates better, more relaxed shooting.

Fundamentals:
1. Line up with your right toes just to the left of center so that your right arm and ball are lined
up with the basket. Place the left foot back just a little. Shoulders should be square to the
basket.
2. Put your weight forward on your toes, but keep your back straight... don't lean forward.
Keeping your back straight will keep you from stepping over the line. Bend a little at the knees.
Your legs will provide the power.
3. Focus on the basket... don't look at the ball
4. Shoot with your right hand (right-handed players), and just use the left hand to help balance
the ball. Release the ball from your fingertips to get good backspin (rotation) on the ball.
5. Take the deep breath, and shoot. Use your legs for power and come up on your toes as you
release the ball. If your back is straight, you won't cross the line or lunge forward. If you need
more power, it's OK to jump a little on your release.
6. Follow-through...
Keep looking at the basket and hold your shooting hand in the "gooseneck", follow-through
position until the ball goes through the net.

Attitude:
Make 'em pay attitude.
Think and say to yourself "net" before each shot... to focus on the ball going through the net.
Be confident... this comes from success, and hours of practice! Don't let a missed free throw
ruin your confidence. If you miss one, just quickly analyze the miss and correct it.
For example, if your shot was long, next one use less leg power. Too short, use more leg
power. Off line, reposition yourself on the line. You won't make them all, so expect to miss a
few, and don't let it bother you when it happens. The most important free throw is the next one,
not the last one!

Practice:
Shoot free throws every practice, with the team, or on your own. There is nothing wrong with
coming to practice 10 minutes early, or staying 10 minutes late, to shoot extra free throws.

42
Each two hour team practice should allow 10 minutes for free throws. Shoot free throws in the
off-season, in the summer. College players may shoot 2000-5000 free throws each summer!
High school players should be able to shoot 1000 free throws each summer. Shoot 25 shots
every day for 5 days of each week. In eight weeks, you will have shot 1000 free throws... but be
sure your technique is correct, using the fundamentals above, and that the line is 15 feet from
the backboard. For your own fun, keep track each day of how many you made, and keep your
totals. Keep track of each week's stats, and see if you are getting better by the end of the 1000
shots. If you are not improving, there could be a flaw in your fundamentals, and you need to
ask for help.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

43
 Setting Screens (Picks)
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

A screen or "pick" occurs when an offensive player attempts to block, or "screen", a defensive
player away from the man he is guarding, thereby freeing up that offensive player for an open
shot or pass.
Setting good screens (or "picks") is a very important fundamental part of the game. It is often
assumed that players will know how to do this, but like any other important fundamental, it must
be taught correctly. Screens are most helpful in freeing up a teammate against a man-to-man
defense, and in out-of-bounds plays. Setting good picks are basic to most offensive plays. The
"pick and roll" is still one of the simplest plays, but when done correctly, one of the most difficult
to defend. The Utah Jazz's John Stockton and Karl Malone are masters of the pick and roll.

Important elements in executing an effective screen.

1. The screener must make contact with (but not foul, hold or push) the defender that he is
trying to block. If you do not make contact, and get up tight, the defender will simply slide
around you.

2. Be strong. Get your feet wide and plant your feet solidly. Do not move your feet once you
have established this position or you will get called for a "moving screen" (a foul). You must be
stationary and cannot move with the defender, trying to push him away. If a defender bumps
into you and you are not stationary, you will probably be called for the foul.

3. Keep your arms tucked into your chest, not only to physically protect yourself, but also so the
ref can see that you are not pushing with your hands, or grabbing at the defender, or holding
him with your arm.

4. The angle, or direction, of the pick and the timing of the pick are probably the most
important, and most overlooked factors in setting a screen. You must have the correct angle, or
position, when you set the pick. You must anticipate the direction that your offensive teammate
wants to go, and then make contact with his defender in a position so that you are directly in
the way of the defender, and he cannot get around you. If you don't get the right angle, he will
simply slide around you. Perhaps this is best demonstrated in the diagram.
In Diagram A, the screener does not make contact, and the defender slips behind. In Diagram
B, the pick is too high ( a common mistake), and the defender slides behind the pick and stays
with the defender. In Diagram C, the pick is too low, and the defender can fight through the
screen. Diagram D shows a good pick, followed by screener "rolling" to the hoop.

5. After the teammate cuts around the screen, the screener "seals" off the other defender and
"rolls" (cuts) toward the hoop. If the defense switches men on the screen, usually the "roller"
will be open for the pass.

44
6. The timing of the offensive player receiving the pick. The player receiving the pick must be
patient and wait for the screen from his teammate to arrive. Often, I will see a player make his
cut just before the pick is "set", and the defender easily gets around it (because it never had a
chance to be set). You must wait for the pick to be set, and then cut hard around it.

7. The offensive player receiving the screen must cut hard, and close to the teammate setting
the screen. You must "rub off" your teammate's screen... that is, brush against him as you go
by. If you don't brush close to the screen, the defender will slip through the screen.

8. Remember, there are two options on the pick and roll play... pass either to the cutter, or if the
defense switches, pass to the "roller".

Types of Screens
See diagram E. Screens can be on-ball when set for the ball-handler, or off-ball.
1. Front screen
The screener is facing the defender that he is setting the screen on, often used in the
open court.
2. Back screen
The screener sets the screen on the defender's "blind" side, or back side. Usually the
screener is facing away from the basket.
3. Down screen
The screener sets the screen usually down low for a player near the block, and is
usually facing the basket with his back to the ball. When completing the "roll" move, he
pivots facing the ball.

Diagram E.

On-ball, front screen:

#3 sets pick for #1, the ball-handler.

Back-screen:
#4 sets back-screen for #2, who goes
back-door to the hoop.

Down-screen:
#3 sets down-screen for #5, who cuts
outside for the pass from #1.

See also: Pick Drills

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

45
 Transition Offense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

"Transition" refers to the process of changing from defense to offense (transition offense), or
offense to defense (transition defense). Your transition offense can be a slow, walk-it-up-floor
transition, an aggressive fast break transition, or something in between. Each coach has to
decide which is best for his team and his personnel. Do you really want an up-tempo fast
game, especially if you have a strong half-court game with good post men, or if your guards are
not particularly quick, have trouble keeping the ball under control, or are inexperienced?

On the other hand, if your team is quick, with good, experienced ball handlers, an aggressive
up-tempo style has advantages.
1. The fast break can produce easy scores.
2. Pushing the ball up the floor quickly puts pressure on the opponent, and they will be
constantly worrying about getting back on defense. This thinking may cause them to be less
aggressive going for their offensive rebounds, and may keep their point guard from penetrating
(thinking he has to stay back to prevent the fast break).
3. An aggressive team attitude on offense will often carry over to your defense and rebounding.
4. An up-tempo game will favor the team that is well-conditioned. A poorly conditioned team will
"run out of gas" by the fourth quarter.
5. The fast-break will often break the opponent's press defense.
6. A team that plays up-tempo will usually use more of its bench players, with frequent
substitutions. This often creates good team harmony with many players getting playing time. An
up-tempo game will favor the team with a "deep bench", with many good substitute players.
7. The players and fans enjoy a well-played up-tempo game.

Transition Offensive Concepts

The most important rule to inculcate in your players' minds is to always keep under control. You
don't want your fast-breaking style to result in turnovers and missed opportunities to score.
They have to learn to recognize when to push the break, and when to slow down and stay
under control. They must learn not to force bad passes. Some teams like to push the break
every opportunity they can (after a steal, defensive rebound, an opponent's score, etc). Some
teams only push it up after a steal or a score, or only certain times of the game.

Although this is very basic, young players learning the game must be taught how to transition
from defense to offense. Kids must be taught that when an inside, tall player gets a defensive
rebound, he/she should immediately look to pass to a guard, a good ball-handler, to get the ball
up the court, even if you are playing a slow-down game. Teach your ball-handlers that on every
defensive rebound, they must move into a position quickly where the rebounder can pass to
them. Coaches often assume kids know this, but like every other fundamental in the game, it
must be taught. Rebounders should be taught to take care of the ball after a defensive rebound
and make a clean, simple pass to a guard. So often, I see kids work hard for the rebound, only
to lose it with a careless outlet pass. Impress your kids that the opponent is often "lurking
around" to steal those outlet passes.

Also, some coaches like to assign the same person (usually a post player with good passing
skills) to be the inbounds passer each time a basket is made, or the ball is out-of-bounds. The
post players should be taught to get down the floor and allow spacing and room for the guards
to bring the ball up.

46
Running the primary fast break
There are different ways of running the transition offense, but most methods use the idea of
filling three lanes coming up the floor, a "trailer", and a "prevent" person (diagram A). The
guards, or small forward should run the three lanes. One lane is straight up the middle of the
floor, and the other lanes are along each sideline. Some coaches feel that it doesn't matter
which player is in which lane, but just fill each lane position as quickly as possible and "go!".
Other coaches teach that the outlet pass always goes to the point guard (the team's best ball
handler) in the center, and the outside lanes, trailer and prevent position are assigned to
individual players, so each one knows his role. If the break doesn't develop, then just bring it up
slowly and avoid the turnover that can happen by getting the ball into the wrong person's
hands.

Preferably, the ball will be in the center lane, although the break can be run from the wing and
can be run with only two lanes filled (as after a quick mid-court steal). The center person should
dribble the ball all the way to the free throw lane, and should not make any unnecessary
passes prior to that point. The two outside lanes should cut at 45 degrees to the hoop for a
pass from the point, and the lay-up. If the point guard pops the free throw jumper, the wings
should crash the boards for the rebound. If neither happens, the wings should cross under the
basket and fill the opposite corner or wing, and the point guard should move to the right side of
the free throw circle. Next the "trailer" should cut through the left side of the lane, expecting the
pass. The "prevent" player should come up the floor slowly, making sure no opponents are
behind him. He prevents the opponent from taking it to the hoop should they steal or intercept
the ball. If nothing develops from the break, the team then flows into its usual half-court
offensive set.

Go to next page…

47
 Starting the break
Coaches differ on how to start the break off a defensive
rebound. Some prefer the outlet pass to go to a guard out
on the wing (free throw line extended). This guard can
either pass to the other guard who is filling the center lane,
or dribble quickly and fill the center lane himself.

Other coaches teach getting the outlet pass directly to the

point guard in the center of the floor. If you can get this
pass through, this is certainly the fastest and easiest way
to get the break going, and avoids a dangerous pass to the
wing, and a centering pass. It also gets the ball into the
hands of your best ball-handler. The point guard should
come to the pass, pivot and start the speed dribble up the
floor, while the other guard and small forward fill the
outside lanes.

A successful fast break depends on:

1. Getting the defensive rebound.
2. A good, quick outlet pass.
3. Filling the lanes.
4. Maintaining control. "Be quick, but never hurry."
5. Recognition. Don't force the break or pass if it is not
There are several drills that will help your transition offense.
there.
See Transition Offense Drills, 4 on 4 Transition, Pitch 'n Fire, Rebound-Outlet-Break Drill

When the primary fast break is not possible, consider using the secondary break (see
“Secondary Break")

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

48
 How to practice in the off season...
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Some players practice all summer and never get any better, while others improve dramatically.
Why? It's has to do with practicing correctly, or what you really need to practice to improve. All
players need to work on (1)ball handling skills, (2)shooting, (3)work under the backboard,
(4)offensive moves, (5)free-throw shooting, (6)fingertip tipping and jumping drills.

Practice at home, four or five days a week. Just playing in a summer league won't do a lot to
help your fundamentals.

Ball-Handling
Spend 10 minutes doing our standard ball-handling drills, and dribbling drills. See the Ball
Handling, Dribbling Drills, and Sideline Dribbling Drills handouts. These include pinches,
fingertips, slams, circles, drops, crazy eights, etc.

Under the Backboard (Mikan Drill)

Do this drill under the basket before your shooting practice. Become familiar with how the ball
comes off the backboard, and at different angles. Start by standing right under the basket. Step
on the left foot and do a baby hook lay-up on the right side, using the backboard. Catch the
rebound and step on the right foot and do the baby hook lay-up on the left side using your left
hand. No dribbling is allowed. Repeat this continuously alternating right and left sides for a
couple minutes. This will help you with your lay-ups, both right and left-handed, and give you a
better feel for the backboard.
Spot Shooting
See the diagram showing the more common
places to shoot on the court. Spend time
taking a certain number of shots from each of
these spots. Always follow and rebound any
missed shots with a lay-up. Start with the
shorter shots, working on good one-handed
technique with your shoulders square, your
elbow in, proper wrist cock and fingertip
release and with a nice follow through,
getting back-spin (rotation). Extend your
range out to the 3-point range. See the Jump
Shot and 2-Man Shooting Drills handouts.

Offensive Moves
If you are an outside player, work on the outside moves. Inside, post-up players work on the
inside, post-up moves. All around players, do them all!

Outside, Perimeter Players

Refer to your Outside Moves handout.
Do each of these moves five times:
First, from the right side of the court: make sure your left foot is the pivot foot, and you jab step
with your right foot.
1. Jab step- drive – lay-up.
2. Jab step - crossover – lay-up.
3. Jab step - pull back - jump shot.
4. Jab step - drive - jump shot.
5. Jab step - crossover - jump shot.
Then, repeat all five moves from the left side of the court. Make sure your right foot is the pivot
foot, and you jab step with your left foot. Shoot all lay-ups from this side, left-handed.

49
NOTE: The pivot foot designated in the above drills are for purposes of doing the drills only. In
a game setting, which foot becomes the pivot foot often depends on how you receive the pass
from your teammate. See "Which foot becomes the pivot foot" on the Outside Moves page.

Inside, Post-Up Players

Refer to your Inside Post-up Moves handout.
Do each of these moves five times:
1. Drop step to baseline, right side.
2. Drop step to lane, jump hook, right side.
3. Pivot, face defender, jab step, baby jumper, right side
4. Pivot, face defender, fake shot, up and under move, right side.
5. Drop step to baseline, left side.
6. Drop step to lane, jump hook, left side.
7. Pivot, face defender, jab step, baby jumper, left side
8. Pivot, face defender, fake shot, up and under move, left side.
9. Elbow shooting drill (see 2-Man Shooting Drills).

Free Throw Shooting

See the Free Throw Shooting handout for fundamentals, attitude, and a practice routine.
Shoot 25 free throws. Keep a record of your shooting percentage.

Tipping Drill
Stand under the basket on the right side and throw the ball up on the backboard. Jump as high
as you can, and tip the ball with your right hand fingertips 10 times. Try to tip the last one in the
basket. Repeat this on the left side, using your left hand. This will help improve your fingertip
control and play under the basket, as well as improving your leaping ability.

Conditioning
You must be in excellent physical condition to play the game well. Shooting skills,
concentration, and basic fundamentals deteriorate when you are tired. In the off season, don't
forget conditioning. Run a couple miles 3 or 4 days a week. Do some wind sprints, or 100 yard
dashes. Jumping rope is also good for developing quick feet, as well as for conditioning. Be
ready when the first day of practice arrives! Also look here for more Conditioning info.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

50
 Defensive Tips
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

There are two basic types of defense: "man-to-man" defense, and zone defense.

I believe all good players must learn how to play good man-to-man defense. Yet there are
many times that a good zone defense can really shut down a team. It often depends on what
the other team's strengths and weaknesses are. So you must learn both.

Man-to-Man
With this defense, each player is assigned to guarding a particular player on the other team.
Each player must try her best to stop her opponent. Although it sounds individual, man-to-man
is really a team defense. Every one must do his part. If 1 or 2 girls don't play good defense, the
defense will fail. Although you are assigned to guard one player, you must learn to "help-out"
your teammates, and learn to "slide through" and "switch" the player you are guarding with a
teammate, if you or she gets picked. We used to call this a "switching" man-to-man defense.

You must learn what "help-side" means. Simply, when the ball is on the opposite side of the
floor from you (and the person you are guarding), you can drop off your man a little and "sag"
toward the middle to help cut off passing lanes. Once the ball comes around to your side, you
get back up tight on your man.

When I was younger, I was taught to deny the baseline, as baseline penetration often allows an
easy basket or an easy dish to another player for a lay-up. Now coaches are advised to force
the offensive player to the baseline. How do you reconcile the differences in teaching? What I
believe is that you force the offensive player to the baseline, but once he is there, you trap him,
and prevent any further penetration along the baseline. If you allow the offensive player to go
uncontested along the baseline, it's usually 2 points.

"Move your feet!" You'll hear coaches yell this all the time...because it is one of the most
important aspects of playing good defense. You must have the desire and the quickness to
move your feet in order to stay with your man, to get into proper position to take a charge, to
move quickly to the boards to box out for a rebound, etc. You must not just "reach-in" and take
a swipe at the ball as the player dribbles by you (usually a foul)...you must move your feet,
hustle and stay with her, and prevent her from getting to the basket by getting yourself into
proper position. We'll work on this.

Zone Defense
There are a variety of zone defenses (2-1-2, 2-3, 3-2, 1-2-2 defenses, etc). In a zone defense,
you defend a particular "zone", or area on the court. You don't stay with a particular person (like
in the man-to-man). Any time the ball comes into your area, you guard that person with the ball
(doesn't matter who it is, go get her!). The defense has to learn to "shift", or move, with the ball
(more in practice).

Man-to-Man Defense Tips

1. Most of the time, you should keep between your man and basket (but sometimes players 4
and 5, under the basket, may need to "front" a strong post-up player).

2. Guards get into a low position with your weight evenly balanced, and on the balls of your
feet, nearer your toes. Don't be flat-footed. Keep your weight off your heels. The key to good
defense is you must move your feet and stay between the player and the hoop. Do not reach in
a take a quick swipe with your hand. You will either get a foul, or she will go right around you.

51
3. Guards out front play back off your man a couple steps, especially if she is very quick, so
she can't quickly get around you. This space will give you time to react to her. If your opponent
is a good 3-point shooter, then you must play her tighter. If you know she is not a good outside
shooter, play back a couple steps and keep her outside.

4. This brings us to the next point...know your opponent! Know her strengths and weaknesses.
If she is a good shooter, stay close on her. If she can't dribble very well, stay up close and
pressure her. If she is quick and a good dribbler then stay back a couple steps. If she is right-
handed and always goes to her right, over-guard her right side and force her to go to her
weaker side.

5. Watch her eyes when she's passing...often she'll tell you right where she's going to throw it!

6. Watch her belly-button if she's quick and hard to stay with. She can fake you with her head,
eyes, arms, shoulders, legs, and feet, but her belly-button will always go only in the direction
that she is going. (unless she's a belly-dancer, or something!)

7. When they shoot, everybody "box-out" your man, rebound (see Rebounding Tips), get
the loose ball, and let's get the fast-break going, if we can.

8. Hustle! Hustle! Hustle! You gotta love playing tough, hard defense. Your good defense will
win many games for you, especially those games when your offense is "off". It's not so bad if
your shots aren't falling, if the other team can't score either. Your defense will keep you in the
game until you finally get "hot" on offense. Who said, "Good offense wins games, but good
defense wins championships"? Believe it. Much of good defense is inspiration and perspiration.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

52
 Basic Defense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Good offense wins games... great defense wins championships. Believe it! When your offense
is struggling, good defense can keep you in the game until your shots start falling. How are you
going to catch up the second half if you are down 12 at the half? ... by playing great defense.
Simply scoring more baskets won't do it if you allow the other team to score also. You must
keep the opponent from scoring by playing good defense and rebounding, to allow your offense
a chance to get back into the game. Believe me now?

Everyone on the team must play good defense, because one weak link will cause the entire
defense to fail, and a good offense will eventually find out who the weak defensive player is.
Playing good defense involves hustle, inspiration and perspiration (sweat!). You gotta want to
play good defense. Defensive skills are fairly easy to learn, unlike some offensive skills, and
everyone can learn to become a good defender. If you are a poor, non-aggressive defender,
you will hurt your team.

These are the important elements in playing good "D"

Stance and Focus
Your weight should be on the balls of your feet (not your heels), and have your feet about
shoulder width apart. Keep your knees bent and your back straight. Keep your head up, eyes
forward, arms out with your palms up and elbows bent a little. Watch your opponent's belly-
button. Your opponent can fake you with her eyes, head bob, shoulders, a jab step, but her
belly button is only going the way she is.

Slides
When guarding your opponent, slide your feet sideways, using quick, short steps, and don't get
your feet crossed. Don't hop. If you get beat in the open floor, don't just yell for help... turn and
sprint after your opponent. Once you get in front of her again, get back into your defensive
stance.

Close-out on the ball receiver

Defenders must learn to "close-out" on the player with the ball. Once the offensive player
receives the pass, the defender should rush toward the ball-handler in a low stance. The last
several steps should be quick, choppy steps to stop your momentum (so the defender doesn't
dribble around you). Your baseline line foot should be back in order to force the ball-handler
toward the baseline. As you approach the ball-handler, snap your shoulders and head back to
help slow yourself down.

On the Ball
Over-guard toward the offensive player's strong side. If she is right-handed, she will probably
want to go to her right, so over-guard that side and make her go left.

If your opponent is on the right wing, drop your left foot back a little toward the baseline and
overplay her a little toward her right side, as this will give you time to react to a move to her
right. You can run her to the baseline. Once at the baseline, trap her there, and do not allow
any further penetration along the baseline.

Keep the palm of your lead hand facing up. Try to get at the ball from below, not by slapping
down it. Slapping down will usually result in a foul. Your other hand should be in the passing
lane. Slide with your opponent, and try to get her to stop her dribble, and once she does, close
in on her with good pressure. But don't reach in and foul her... or you'll change a good
defensive stop into free throws for the opponent.

53
 Denial
Clog the passing lane and prevent the player you are guarding from getting the ball, that is,
"deny" her the ball. When guarding an offensive player who is one pass removed from the ball,
you should be in denial. If you keep your player from getting the ball, you keep her from
scoring, as she can't score without the ball. Play the passing lane and stay between the player
you're guarding and the ball. Place your foot and hand nearest the ball slightly forward, and
turn the palm of your hand toward the ball, so that you can reject any incoming passes. Be in a
position to see both your player and the ball. If the ball-handler picks up her dribble, you have a
"dead situation" and everyone should in close on their player, in "full-denial".

In "full-denial", the defensive players should be "on

the line". To explain this concept, imagine a line, or
a string) extending from the ball to the person you
are guarding. In full-denial, you should position
yourself so that you are on this line, body toward
your man, but with head and eyes turned toward
the ball, and your ball-side hand up in the passing
lane.

If your man is a long distance, or two passes away

from the ball-handler, you can play a little "up the
line", that is a little ways from the imaginary line
towards the hoop.

The distance, or spacing, up the line depends upon the speed and quickness of the defender
and the distance his man is from the ball. On a long pass, he should still be able to move
toward the line and intercept the pass. He should not initially be "on the line", as his man could
make a back-cut and get open. Playing a little "up the line" prevents the back-cut, and still
allows for the interception.

Help and Recover. Diagrams E and F below teach how to give help and recover on the
perimeter. Rather than play a “full-denial”, defenders one pass away play a little up the line
and step or two toward the ball in order to help stop dribble penetration. Here #1 tries to
dribble-penetrate. The #2 defender gives help and #1 is prevented from penetrating, and has
to dish back out to #2 (Diagram F). The #2 defender then has to rotate quickly out to on-ball
defense on #2, and the #1 and #4 defenders are now in deny, a little up the line and a step or
two toward the ball, while the #3 defender moves into help-side (Diagram F).

54
Help-side
When your opponent is two or more passes from the ball, you should be in "help-side" position.
This will allow you to be in position to help your teammates against the ball penetrating the
paint. This involves dropping off your man some (but without losing sight of her), and sagging
toward the ball-side. In the diagrams below, I have painted an imaginary red "help-side line"
which goes through the middle of the lane. Many coaches teach that if the ball is above the
free-throw line, the help-side defender should have one foot in the lane (Diagram A). If the ball
is below the free-throw line, one foot should be touching or staggering the help-side line. Stay
between the ball and your man. Be ready to help defend against another player driving or
cutting to the hoop, and "help" your teammate who may have gotten beat. Once the ball
comes back to within one pass from your player, you get back into denial with her. If the ball is
skip-passed to your player, you quickly get back up on her (close-out), and play "on-ball". See
diagrams below.

Remember, good defense is "team defense". Man to man defense is a team defense just as
much as zone defenses. Here is a good quote: "The best man defense looks like a zone and
the best zone defense looks like a man.

Defending the Low Post

There are three ways the defender can position him/herself in defending the low post player.
1. Playing behind the offensive post player.
Here the defender plays directly behind the offensive player. This may be advantageous if your
post defender is much taller than the offensive player, and has a good chance of altering or
blocking the post player's shot. But do not let the offensive player back you down under the
basket. Use your legs (use a strong stance with knees bent) and your lower body strength to
keep the offensive player out... but do not put your hands on the post player's back as you may
get called for a pushing foul.

2. Fronting the low post player.

Here the defender moves directly in front of the offensive post player and denies him/her the
ball. The wing defender should put pressure on the ball on the wing in order to make the pass
to the low post, or the lob pass, more difficult. Fronting may backfire if the offensive player is
taller and can easily seal for inside position and get the high lob pass. Another disadvantage is
the defender is out of position for the rebound, and the post player may be able to score just by
sealing for inside position and receiving the inside pass, or by getting the rebound and put-
back.

55
3. Three-quarter front the low post player.
This is probably the best method. Instead of directly fronting the low post player, the defender
"straddles" him/her with one foot in front and one in back, standing sideways to the offensive
player with one hand up in the passing lane. If the ball is below the free-throw line extended (in
the corner-wing area), he/she should play on the baseline side of the post player, making
contact with the post player's inside (baseline) shoulder, and with his/her arm and hand out in
the passing lane. If the ball is passed out on top (above the free-throw line extended), the
defender should slide chest to chest with the post player and move to the post player's high-
side (or lane-side) shoulder, again with a hand up at all times in the passing lane.

Trapping (setting the double-team)

In trapping, one defender should first stop the dribbler, often along the sideline or baseline, or
in one of the "trapping zones" (see below). Trapping zones are those areas where the
offensive player definitely does not want to get caught losing his dribble. It's like getting caught
in a corner.

Once the ball is stopped, the second defender sprints over and double-teams the ball carrier.
They cut off the ball-handler's view, and get into his passing lane. Their knees are adjacent to
each other to prevent the ball-handler from "splitting" the trap. The position of their hands
should be at the same height as the ball. If the offensive player holds the ball high to "throw
over the top", the hands should be high. If the ball is low, the hands should be low to prevent
the bounce pass. Do not reach in! This only transforms a good situation into a bad one (now
the player goes to the free throw line). Instead, the trapping players should deny the player
from getting the pass off and get the 5-second call, or force her to make a bad pass, which is
intercepted by one of your teammates.

The yellow zones catch the player in

the corner.

The red zones are excellent trapping

zones, since the offensive player
cannot retreat across the 10 second
line.

The blue zones are good trapping

zones because the offense has to
worry about the 10-second count.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

56
 Rebounding
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Rebounding is one of the most important aspects of winning basketball games. Offensive
rebounding gives your team extra chances, and free throw opportunities, and frustrates the
defense. Defensive rebounding is a key part of good defense in general, limiting the offense to
just one shot. A good thought is "one shot and their out". Defensive rebounding combined with
a quick outlet pass can be an effective offensive weapon, getting the transition game and fast
break going, for an easy lay-up at the other end. All good rebounders are very aggressive on
the boards and believe that every rebound is theirs. You gotta want it! You gotta be an animal
on the glass! Coaches love good rebounders and will reward them with more playing time. You
may not be the best shooter or ball handler, but if you are a strong rebounder and defender,
you will get to play. Good rebounders are important “role players”.

Defensive Rebounding
The most important aspect of rebounding is getting inside position and "boxing out". The player
who gets the inside position usually gets the rebound, and the opponent may "reach over" and
commit a foul. These "over the back" fouls can be very costly late in a game when teams are in
the bonus free throw situation.

On defense, your coach will expect you to get inside position since should already be between
your man and the basket. Another key is always knowing where the ball is, so as soon as you
see the shot being taken you go get the inside position, and box out.

There are three key ingredients in defensive rebounding.

(1). Box Out
(2). Attack the ball
(3). The outlet pass

"Box Out!"
All players must learn this skill, as much as any other skill in the game. Even the perimeter
players (guards) must box out their person, not only to get rebound themselves, but also to
prevent the offensive guard from sneaking inside and stealing the rebound.

When you box out, you must first make contact with the player you are guarding. Locate your
man, get in front of him, turn facing the basket, bend over, get wide with your feet and arms
out, and put your backside into the offensive player, sealing him away from the hoop. I tell my
players that the reason that God gave us a butt is to box-out! Be aggressive, and don't let the
offensive player push you under the basket. If you get too far under the basket, as a taller
opponent with long arms, can simply outreach you for the ball. Keep him away from the hoop.
Keep your eye on the ball flight, and go get it! ... which brings us to the next point.

Attack The Ball!

After you have sealed the opponent, or boxed him out, then you must go aggressively after the
ball. Attack the ball, jumping high with both arms extended, grab it strongly with both hands,
and "rip it down". Don't let a little contact bother you. You gotta be tough inside...tougher than
your opponent. Once you have the ball, protect it by pivoting away from the opponents, keep
elbows out, but you must not throw an elbow... a sure foul, often flagrant.

The Outlet Pass

Once you have the ball, think "fast break". Get a quick accurate outlet pass to a teammate to
get the transition game going. If you hold onto the ball too long, the opponents may tie you up,
and depending on the possession arrow, all your hard work is for nothing. So immediately pivot
away from the defenders toward the sideline and find a teammate to pass to. If you are on the
right side of the court, pivot on your right foot, and just the opposite for the left side. Wheel

57
around on your pivot foot and make a strong, sharp two-handed overhead outlet pass to your
teammate on the wing. Only dribble if you have to, if you are in trouble and need to create
some spacing to get the pass off. Pass as soon as you can safely hit your teammate. But don't
make a bad forced pass, and lose possession. Those kind of turnovers can kill you.

Team Rebounding Concept

With each shot, try to establish a triangle of players boxing out around the basket. Have one
player of each side of the hoop and one in front, so that you have a triangle of players boxing
out around the hoop. Don't get too far under the basket, where a taller player can simply reach
over your head for the rebound...box them away from the basket.

Offensive Rebounding
Offensive rebounding should be a very important part of your team offense in general. Nothing
frustrates the opponent more, than for them playing good aggressive defense, and you get the
one, two, or three offensive rebounds for more shots at the hoop, until you finally score. The
keys are you've got to be aggressive and want that offensive rebound, and you must be quick
on your feet and try to get inside position on the defender. This is a good way to pick up extra
easy baskets. Some people call 'em "trash" baskets... I call 'em hard-working, smart,
demoralizing baskets... "back breakers"

Technique:
The defender should already be between you and the hoop. He is trying to keep you outside.
Make a fake one way, and quickly move your feet and slip around him on the other side. Once
you are inside, box him out. Always know where the ball is and just assume that every shot will
be missed. If the shot is coming from the corner, remember that most misses will go long on
the opposite side, so be ready if you are on the weak side.

Once you get the ball, be strong and power it right back up to the hoop, usually off the glass.
There is a good chance you will get fouled, and a good chance for an "old fashioned" three
pointer... a put back with a free throw. Expect contact, be strong, and try to finish the shot.
Keep working the entire game, as this will be very important in a game when you are trying to
come from behind, or in close pressure packed games. You can actually wear the opponent
down by the end of the game. Many championship games are decided by this tough inside
play... not the outside jumpers. It's not always pretty under the hoop, but all good coaches
know how important this aspect of the game really is. You will hear TV commentators talk
about "points in the paint" as a key in many games. Most of them are retired, very successful
coaches, and they know by experience how important.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

58
 How to make the team... Tryouts!
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

I'm the coach and you are a player trying to make my team. So how do you impress me with
your skills, and what is it that I am looking for in try-outs?

The things I look for are solid fundamentals... don't be flashy. I like kids who play tough
defense, hustle after loose balls, play aggressively (but not dirty). I love kids who box out and
rebound. I like kids who are good passers, and avoid turnovers. I like team players. Don't try to
impress me by dribbling between your legs.

Be the first one arriving for practice and the last one to leave. Show me work ethic... be willing
to hustle hard during drills, etc. Show respect for the coaches and the other players. Ask the
coaches to help you with your weaknesses. We all like to practice the things we are already
good at. You get better by working on your weaknesses.

Are you a tall inside player? If so, impress me with rebounding, defense, and some post up
moves. Example: a drop-step baseline move (see Inside Post Moves)

If you are a guard, show me you can handle the ball and keep under control. If you can shoot
the "3", fire some up during shoot-arounds. I like a perimeter player who can shoot the outside
shot, but can also drive to the hoop, can see the whole floor and pass, and can handle the ball
well. Show me your outside moves (see Outside Moves).

Work on your skills at home, or at the nearby playground in the summer (off-season). Work on
the correct things, not just the things you are already good at (see Practicing in the Off-
Season).
Be physically "in-shape" (conditioning) when you arrive at try-outs.

During tryouts, don't be intimidated by better players, or players who made the team last year.
There will always be a few players at try-outs who are better players and you know will make
the team. But you can be an important part of the team to as a "role player" .

Remember that hard work, hustle and a good attitude will impress the coach, even if your
shooting is off that week.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

59
 Things to think about...
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

On Team Concepts:
There is no "I" in "team".

If you feel you are the best, or one of the best players on the team, then you must feel
extra responsibility for making the team and each other team member better.

A championship team, is more than a collection of five good individual players. It

requires at least eight or nine teammates, who work hard together, who respect, help
and encourage each other, who have a common goal, mindset and spirit, and yet who
all realize their individual roles and importance to the team.

It's not who starts the game; it's who can finish it.

On Defense:
Good offense wins games; great defense and hustle wins championships.

Good defense comes from 50% good technique, and 50% inspiration and perspiration.

The best way to get back into the game when you're down 10 points or more, is to play
great defense and rebound. Keep the other team from scoring so you can catch up.

On Personal Character and Attitude:

Reputation is what you are perceived to be; character is what you are (John Wooden).

The true athlete must have character, not be a character (John Wooden).

In life you make choices, and your choices make you (John Wooden).

You don't have to win a trophy to be a winner (me).

In basketball, there is no such thing as a perfect game. Don't get upset if you make a
mistake or miss a shot, keep playing hard and things will work out. Remember, a man
can fail many times, but he isn't a failure until he gives up. Always think "next play"
(Coach K, Duke).

On Goals:
The journey is more important than the finish line. It's the fun, work, and experiences
(good and bad) along the way that ultimately will be the most valuable to your personal
growth. If you have prepared, worked your hardest, played fair, and given it your best
effort along the way, then no matter what happens, you can be proud and satisfied at
the end.

If you fail to prepare, you prepare to fail (John Wooden).

To be great is hard, but it's the "hard" (the difficulty) that makes it great...otherwise
anyone could do it (Tom Hanks in the movie, "A League Of Their Own").

On Speed and Quickness:

60
You must be quick, but never hurry (John Wooden).

Other Important "Little Things":

Usually it is unwise to blindly "save" a ball going out-of-bounds under your opponents'
basket. Let it go out and reset your defense.

If you are caught trapped in a corner...bounce the ball off the opponent's foot so it goes
out-of-bounds. Or call "time-out" if it is a crucial time in the game and a crucial
possession. But don't waste all of your coach's time-outs unnecessarily.

When you have a 6 (or more) point lead with only a minute to go in the game, protect
the ball and burn the clock. You don't need to score any more points (unless it's an
easy lay-up). Remember, "the clock is your enemy" now (Al McGuire). Slow down, run
the clock, careful passing, and be prepared to have to make free-throws.

There are "good fouls" (like stopping an obvious score during an important part of the
game. Make her go shoot the free throw). There are really, stupid "bad fouls" (like
fouling someone with only 2 seconds left in the period with the bonus in effect).

Eliminate stupid fouls so you can use your five fouls for important stuff, like boxing-out,
rebounding, posting-up, stopping a crucial shot, etc.

A little tip on staying out of foul trouble: your number of fouls should be less than or
equal to the quarter number that you are in. #Fouls <= Quarter #

So, don't get your 2nd foul in the 1st quarter, or your 3rd foul in the 2nd quarter, or your 4th foul
in the 3rd quarter, because you will most likely get your 5th foul before the game is over.

If a teammate steals the ball and is driving down the court for a fast-break lay-up,
hustle down after her. Chances are, you will either get a pass from her, or get the
rebound and an easy put-back basket. Always assume your teammate is going to miss
the lay-up, so you get down there and get the rebound. It's an easy way to pick up
some extra points!

To become champions, you must play four good quarters each game. It sounds
obvious, but only the good teams do it! Focus on short blocks of time...break each
quarter into four minute segments and focus on winning each segment...so you don't
let up the entire game.

There are critical times in a game where key plays make the difference...to become
champions, you must learn to recognize these times ("crunch time")...and pick up your
intensity on the boards and on defense, and avoid costly turn-overs.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

61
 Attitude, the "Right Stuff"
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

An important aspect is developing a proper attitude about the game. To become winners, we
must recognize how important our teammates are. "United we stand, divided we fall!" We must
stick together. We must work together on offense with good passing, looking for an open
teammate. But don't be afraid to shoot! If you are open, take the shot. Part of being a good
teammate is scoring and taking good shots! If you miss a shot, forget it...you'll probably make
the next one.

Remember: there is no such thing as a perfect game! Michael Jordan has never played a
perfect game...he has always missed some shots. So don't get down on yourself if you mess
up, just keep playing hard and things will work out. None of us is perfect...even the coaches!
The refs aren't perfect either... so expect a bad call or two and don't let it get to you. Basketball
is not a perfect game.

Being a good teammate is playing hard on defense. Go hard for loose balls and rebounds.
Learn how to "box-out". Learn to set good picks (screens) on offense, so you can free up a
teammate for an easy shot. Being a good teammate means coming to the game rested and
playing as hard as you can. It means encouraging your teammates on and off the court.
Together you can win! For you to become champions, you must develop a team "chemistry", or
spirit...a respect and trust in each other, that you must begin to form now and develop over the
years as you get into high-school. Many very talented teams never reach their full potential
because they lack this chemistry, or team spirit. Many less talented teams have accomplished
unthinkable goals by their hard work, desire, and team spirit.

Proper attitude means respect for your teammates and your opponents. Your opponents are
trying their best just like you. Never try to "show up" or "trash-talk" your opponents, and don't
over-celebrate a basket with too many "high-fives". When you over-celebrate, you make it
seem like the basket was a big deal, and something you didn't really expect to make. Instead,
be cool, like it's no big deal, you do it all the time.

Never play "dirty"...it's just not worth it! You only lower yourself by doing it. Play hard, with
enthusiasm, and play to win, but play with class. Make your parents and teachers proud. Don't
argue with the referees...they're human and don't always make the right call, but hey, that's
life...its not always fair. You just have to make the best of the situation and go on. People will
remember you for how you act on the court. When we win, never gloat or rub it in your
opponent's face.

When you're on the court, play as hard as you can to win, but when the game is over, it's over!
Forget it, it's only basketball! If you do lose a game, remember that you can often learn more in
losing. You don't have to win a trophy to be a winner!

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

62
 When you don't have the ball...
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

What do you do when you are on offense but you don't have the ball?
Think about it! Most of the time you will not have possession of the ball. Half of the time you will
be on defense. Of the remaining half when your team has the ball, 80% of that time you
personally will not have the ball, as one of your teammates will have it. So what do you do
when you don't have the ball? Do you simply stand still and wait for someone to pass to you?
That's not what wins games. There are things to do when you don't have the ball.

1. Try to get open for an easy pass and shot. Keep moving, not aimlessly, but with a purpose.
Be savvy and try to cut into an open spot on the floor, especially if the defense is in a zone. If
the defense is in man-to-man, set screens for other teammates (and not just the person with
the ball). Setting picks will free up teammates for easy shots (see Setting Screens and Cutting
and Faking).

2. The low posts (4 and 5), should constantly be trying to get into a post-up position, to get the
ball from the guards. 4 and 5 can pick for each other to get free.

3. Maintain spacing on the floor...don't get bunched up...that's when the defense steals the ball,
or bad passes and turnovers occur.

4. Never take your eye off the ball. Be smart. Look for a chance to time a cut through the paint,
or "back-door", for a quick pass from a teammate, and a lay-up.

5. Be alert and position yourself for a rebound (see the Rebounding Tips). Assume your
teammate will miss the shot, and get into position for a rebound. You'll get extra shots and
points this way.

6. Be ready to jump in after loose balls.

7. Be aware of the other team trying to slip a guard down floor for an easy lay-up, or "cherry-
picking". Be ready to get back and cover her.

8. Be alert to help a teammate if she looses her dribble or is in trouble.

9. When the shot goes up, each player must know instantly what his assignment is and move
quickly into that assignment: whether to go aggressively for the offensive rebound, or to get
back into a defensive prevent position.

Remember, often it is not the person initially with the ball who scores. Instead a good pass to
you cutting, or coming off a screen, is where the score comes. So work hard on offense when
you don't actually have the ball...never loaf!

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

63
 The Exceptional Player
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

These are some of the things that make a player a standout above the rest. The exceptional
player:
1. Always plays great defense, even when her offense is "off".

2. Always hustles, boxes-out and rebounds.

3. Sees the whole floor and is an excellent passer, able to find the open teammate.

4. Is a good ball-handler, avoids costly turnovers.

5. Can shoot from outside.

6. Can drive, "take it to the hoop".

You can't rely on just an outside shot, or just your ability to drive. You've got to be able to do
both. If you can't score from outside, the defense will "sag" and not allow you to drive. If you
can't drive, they will guard you close outside, and not allow your outside shot. You got to be
able to do both so that the defense cannot key on either aspect of your game.

7. Looks for her shot all the time. Doesn't stop shooting just because she missed one or two
shots early in the game. If a great player starts off "cold", she will usually get it going by
hustling, playing good defense, getting a steal or two...then she loosens up and the shots start
falling.

8. Can make clutch free-throws.

9. Stays out of foul-trouble.

10. Has "mental toughness"... is able to sense the critical times in a game and elevate her
game and her teammates a notch (especially with defense, hustle and rebounding). Is able to
make the "big plays" in crunch time. Is able to do the "little things" needed to win...like making
the pass to an open teammate, setting a perfect screen, making a steal, etc. Keeps
focused...does not let a bad call upset her. Is able to forget mistakes and keep playing hard.
Understands the game situation, the clock.

11. Inspires and leads her teammates by her example, her hard work ethic and hustle in
practice and during games. She works harder than anyone else. You can't ask your teammates
to practice and play harder if you're not there yourself. Exceptional players are not born...they
become exceptional by hard work and dedication.

12. Understands the concept of "team" and "family". It takes more than skill to have a
championship team. You must have team "chemistry", respect for each other, a common goal,
and help and encourage each other. The exceptional player is "coachable".

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

64
 The Role Player
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

We can't all be super-stars, or even starters. We don't all have great shooting skills or ball-
handling skills. But we can still be important "spokes in the wheel". We can still be very
important to the success of our team. We are important "role players".

Coaches love good role players, because they know better than anyone that there will be times
in a game, or during the season, that they will have to get good play, some good minutes from
their bench personnel. Usually, you cannot be a championship team with just five good players.
You need important players who can come off the bench and play quality minutes.

What makes a great role player?

A role player could be a starter who has a special skill... such as being a great defensive
player, or a great rebounder, or a point guard who can handle the ball and pass.

A role player is often the player who comes off the bench. She understands and accepts her
role on the team. While on the bench, she keeps her head in the game, and observes what's
going on, where the weaknesses are in the defense, which opposing players are "killing us",
what's happening on the boards, etc. She is "ready to go" when the coach calls.

A good role player will come off the bench and really hustle on defense, go for loose balls, get
the important rebounds. She can be aggressive, since she usually is less concerned about
fouling out. She will not hurt her team with turnovers, or weak defense. By doing these things,
she will give her team a lift. Many times I have seen the momentum of a game change because
of the renewed "spirit" and energy that a role player brings into the game.

She is able to play quality minutes when a starter needs a rest, or is in foul trouble.

My former AAU coaching associate used to advise the role players to "make a difference"... not
just go into the game and run aimlessly up and down the floor, but play hard, hustle and "make
a difference"... good advice.

The role player understands that "it's not who starts the game, but who can finish it!"
The role player hustles in practice and works hard. She is not a complainer (about playing
time). Rather, she has a positive attitude, encourages her teammates, and understands her
importance to the team, and the importance of her contributions. She realizes that "her time will
come". This really takes a special person, because most of us want to be starters... it takes
great maturity to be a good role player.

Here is a poem, a tribute to the “Role Player”.

THE CHAMPION'S CHAMPION by Dr. Bill Welker

He's the one loved by his peers,

Though on the bench -- he always cheers,
He keeps the first man on his toes,
And never quits - why, no one knows.

He puts the champion where he's at,

By making him work to earn his plaque,
His name's not found in big headlines,
But he's always there come practice time.

I often wonder -- were the champion second team,

Would he keep on trying or lose his gleam,

65
Would he give his all if there was no fame,
And not give up for the good of the game.

There are no questions in this man's mind,

The Champion's Champion -- in life -- will do just fine.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

66
 Playing the Point guard Position
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Learning to play the point guard, or #1, position is probably the most difficult article to write
since many factors are involved in playing this position. Some of these factors include how the
coach wants his/her point guard to operate, the style of play, the abilities and talents of the
teammates surrounding the point guard, and the skills, temperament, experience and
leadership qualities of the point guard him/herself. I'll try to discuss several qualities involved.

Communication
The point guard is often thought of an extension of the coach on the floor, or the "quarterback",
or floor general. So the point guard must have a close working relationship with the coaches
and be very "coachable". He/she should have frequent discussions with the coach to know
exactly what the coach expects of him/her, and what team strategies to use at a given time.
The point guard must know his role on the team, whether he is expected to be a John Stockton
type assist man, or a scorer like Allen Iverson. And this of course will depend not only on his
own skills as a scorer, but also upon the talent of his teammates around him. If the team has
some excellent scorers, he/she will want to be a good assist person and get the ball to those
players. If no-one else on the team is a strong scoring threat, then the point guard may need to
step up into that role.

You must also be able to communicate with your teammates both on and off the court. Learn
to read the cuts your wing players make, whether they V-cut or back-cut. You might work out
some hand signals so you know whether he/she is going back-door or not. At times, you may
see the your team bunched up, with poor spacing, and you need to know how to back the ball
out, direct them and get them to move and correct their spacing.

Court Balance, Passing, Half-Court Offense

Your first thought should not be scoring, but being an excellent passer and getting the ball to
your teammates for easy shots. Many think that dribbling and ball-handling are the most
important attributes for a good point guard, but I believe it is being an excellent passer and
being able to find the open man, and when to pass and not pass. Take care of the ball, and
don't throw it into a crowd. Avoid those costly turnovers. Learn to open the passing lanes by
"looking" the defender away. Avoid passing in the direction you are looking, or "telegraphing"
your passes. Look one way and pass opposite, using your peripheral vision. You should keep
your head up and eyes forward toward the hoop at all times, and you should be able (using
your peripheral vision) to see all four teammates at once. You want to try to get the ball to
your "hot shooters" or to your teammate who may have a mismatch with his/her defender. Also
know which teammates are currently on the floor and who your best scorers are, and get them
the ball.

Keep your passing accurate and as simple as possible. Don't attempt some "fancy" pass when
a simple chest or bounce pass will do the job. Keep your passes crisp with some zip, but not
so hard that your teammates cannot catch the ball.

Distribute the ball from side to side using both sides of the court. There will be a natural
tendency for a right-handed player to favor the right side of the court, but you must use the
entire floor to overshift the defense and involve all your teammates.

Pass the ball into the high post (especially if you have a skilled high post player). A lot of good
things can happen when the ball gets into the high post. Passing into the low post is usually
easier from the wing position, but you can occasionally catch the defense sleeping. To be a
consistent winning team, you must be able to get the ball inside for those low post shots and

67
lay-ups. You want to get to the free-throw line and get the opponent in foul trouble. Don't just
rely on firing up three-pointers all night.

Avoid pointless dribbling on the perimeter... keep the ball moving. Catch the ball in triple threat
position and don't prematurely give up your dribble.

Look for your own shot too or otherwise the defense will not have to play you seriously. Look
for the outside shot, but also be able to beat your defender with a drive into the paint. When
you penetrate, you cause problems for the defense if you can hit the little pull-up jumper just
inside the arc in the paint, or if you can dish the ball to an open low post player (whose man
has come up to defend you). Now here's where communication comes in again. Usually the
point guard has primary responsibility for being back on defense and preventing the opponent's
fast break, and will not attack the offensive boards for the rebound. When you dribble
penetrate, you must have an understanding with either the #2 or #3 player that he/she will stay
back out on top to prevent the fast break.

A little tip against zone defenses... realize that zone defense is most effective for the first 15
seconds. If you make a few quick passes, reverse the ball, and get the zone to move, it will
often move out of position. Then when you see the openings, attack the gaps with either a
good pass, or dribble penetration.

Control the Tempo

A good point guard knows how to control the pace or tempo of the game, and how his coach
wants the tempo. You must know whether your team is better as a fast-breaking team, or
better as a slow-down team. And this can change depending on which teammates are on the
floor. If you have your big, slower guys in there, and if they are in a little foul trouble, you might
want to walk the ball up the floor and slow it down for a few possessions. If you've got your
speedy guards in there, pick up the pace. If your team looks tired after a couple fast trips up
and down the court, slow it down a little for a couple possessions. You can rest on offense, but
never on defense. Momentum is a big factor too. If your team is really "on a roll", keep the
tempo fast. If the opponent makes a few unanswered baskets and has the momentum, slow it
down and walk it up the floor and make sure you get a good shot opportunity.

When bringing the ball up the floor, keep your eyes focused ahead and maybe you can
occasionally catch the opponent's transition defense loafing and hit a teammate with a long
pass and lay-up... but don't force it.

When pushing the fast break, if you realize the opponent has gotten back successfully in the
paint, stop the fast-break and dribble it back out on top and start your half-court offense.

Know the Game Situation

Since you are the "coach on the floor", know the game, score and clock situation at all times.
Read this page, the last several paragraphs, about strategies on how to end a quarter/half, and
end of the game strategies... click here.

Dealing with Full-Court Pressure

When faced with a full-court press, you must be aggressive with your cut and "want" the
inbounds pass. You are the team's best ball-handler and passer and their best chance for
successfully getting the ball up the floor. Remember, it is not easy for the defense to steal the
ball from you as long as you stay calm, stay out of the corners (where they can trap you), pass
rather than trying to dribble through the double-team, and keep the ball in the middle of the
floor or reverse it to the weak side. In a full-court press, the defenders are mostly positioned on
the ball-side of the floor, so a quick reversal to the opposite side will usually beat it.

68
Leadership, Attitude
I like a point guard who is confident and a little "feisty" -- who is able to grab his/her teammates
and say, "C'mon, let's go!". You are the leader on the floor and the team will follow your
example. Most often your offense starts with you, and you are the first line of defense when
the opponent comes up the floor. If you meet their point guard in an aggressive manner on
defense, your teammates with pick up on that and play hard too.

As a team leader, you must be willing to work harder than anyone else in practice so as to
"lead by example". You must try to get along well with all your teammates and be a "peace-
maker". Don't allow players to belittle each other (often done in a joking, but still hurtful, way).
Be a leader in promoting team spirit and unity. Make the younger teammates and those
teammates who get less playing time feel important too, that they are contributing also.

Skills Necessary to be a Good Point Guard

1. Passing and faking skills as outlined above. You must be an excellent passer. Practice
your "no-look" passes as much as your shooting.

2. Dribbling. You must be a good ball-handler, but you don't have to be the most awesome
dribbler in the world. Magic Johnson was not the most awesome dribbler, but he could handle
the ball very well, was very intelligent and an excellent passer, and one of the greatest players
and greatest point guards ever to play the game. You can be a very good point guard if you
play under control, play smart, are able to dribble with either hand (with head and eyes
forward), have a good crossover dribble, and an around-the-back dribble.
See Dribbling, Dribbling Drills

3. Learn to beat your man off the dribble, take it into the paint and shoot the short jumper or
dish off. See Perimeter Moves.

4. Outside shooting. It is another bonus if you can hit the outside shot too.
See the Set Shot, Shooting Drills

5 Conditioning. You may have to play most of the game so be in excellent physical, aerobic
condition by the very first practice session.

There's a lot to learn, but to me, the point guard position is by far the most fun and challenging
position to learn to play.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

69
 Pre-game Preparation
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

I am referring to the immediate pre-game time... not the week of practice before the game. This
is an important time for the players and coaches to get comfortable with the situation at hand,
and focus on the job to be done. Every coach has his/her own way to get his team ready. Here
is what we do with our team.

Allow enough time to arrive at the gym. Rushing around at the last minute creates a
disorganized, frantic mood entering the game. You want players and coaches to be relaxed,
calm and "in control" starting the game. Allow at least 30 - 45 minutes before the game (players
dressed). Players need time to stretch, perform warm-up drills, and practice free shooting and
free throws. You need time for a quick team meeting before the game. You may want time to
meet the opposing coach, refs.

Here are some things to do before the game. Have this organized in advance so there is no
last minute confusion. You could designate some of this to your assistant, or manager.

1. If it is an AAU competition, have all your player's ID cards and birth certificates ready ahead
of time in an envelope.

2. Have your official score book roster entered in advance. We keep photocopies of our roster
in a folder to hand to the scorer's table. Or you can have an assistant or statistician fill out the
roster.

3. If you use a clipboard in time-outs, have it ready, with pen and cloth to wipe it. Don't waste
half of your first time-out looking for the clipboard or pen!

4. Make sure your medical kit is available.

5. Recruit statisticians, or assign who's keeping which stats, and have the stats forms ready.

6. Know in advance or any special rules... such as running clock, number of time-outs, etc.

7. If you are in a strange gym, walk your players around the floor, even before they are
dressed. Show them where the out-of-bounds lines are, the 10 second line, etc. Sometimes
these lines are not obvious if the gym is used for volleyball and other sports, where multiple
lines are painted on the floor. Show them where the bench and scorer's table will be for
checking in the game. In one of our events this year, the scorer's table was at the far end of the
gym... not between the two squads. Show them the location of the scoreboard/clock.

8. Review with your assistant coach the starting lineup, substitution patterns, and any special
strategies for this game.

70
Players on the floor
As soon as the players get out on the floor, we have them start stretching and doing warm-ups.
We like the 3-line lay-up drill as a warm-up because it not only gets the players moving and
shooting lay-ups, but also because this is an excellent passing drill. We stress that the kids
keep good spacing, zip their passes, and convert the lay-ups. We do this from the right and left
sides. Then we have players free-shoot, taking shots they are most likely to get in the game.
Finally, team free throws, everyone around the lane.

Team meeting, huddle

1. This meeting is used to focus the players on the job at hand, and review what our game plan
is, and what things make us successful. I don't think you gain anything by trying to point out the
importance of this game... you are likely to make them more nervous. They already know the
significance of the game. Instead of trying to get them "fired-up", you need to calmly reassure
them that everything will be OK, and that we are here to have fun... and that we will focus on
doing the good things that have made us successful in the past.

2. My assistant calls out the starting line-up and positions. We don't make a big deal out of who
is starting. My kids all take turns starting games, as I think this creates better team chemistry
(although I certainly will have three of my best out there). Often, the first few minutes of the
game is a "feeling out" time anyway, when teams are not yet in the groove. I like to bring in a
couple of good players off the bench 3 or 4 minutes into the game. My players know that "it's
not who starts, but who can finish the game". I have my assistant do most of the substituting
(following our pre-designed substitution pattern), so I can concentrate on the game. I will vary
the substitution pattern depending on the game situation, foul situation, and crucial times in the
game.

3. Go over the team defense, and defensive assignments, how we are going to play certain
players, and help each other, etc. Are we going full court press, or not. We want three attitudes
on defense: contest every shot, protect (deny) the paint area, and "one-shot only" mentality.
The opponent only gets one contested shot, and they're OUT! ... they get no offensive
rebounds, no second and third shots.

4. Go over your team offense, what set you are using, and briefly review what other sets or
plays you might go to during the game. I remind my players to keep correct spacing, move
without the ball, set screens, and make passes crisp... no soft, easily-intercepted, passes. I
also stress the importance of offensive rebounding (except the point guard) and talk about
attacking the offensive boards, to get those easy second and third shots. We discuss whether
we are going to push the fast break, or slow down into a half court tempo. We remind the
players to keep under control, avoid the turnovers.

5. I tell the kids that if we do these things that have made us successful in the past, we will be
OK. To help counteract tenseness and pressure, I often say something like "Let's go out and
have some fun."

6. Then hands together in the huddle, we yell "Play Hard!" and are ready to go (I hope).

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

71
 Coaching ... game strategy
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

First of all, realize that most games are won and lost by your players executing the
fundamentals and plays that you have taught them in practice. But courtside coaching can
greatly influence the outcome of a game, especially a close game. If you get blown out by 30
points, let's face it... the other team was probably a lot better than you.

Game plan
First, prepare for the game through scouting, or reviewing game films of your upcoming
opponent. Find out who their best offensive players are, what their style of play is, what they
like to do, and what their weaknesses are. Then you can develop a game plan that hopefully
will favor your strengths and attack their weaknesses, and deny their strengths. Discuss in your
practices and in your pre-game meeting your strategy for playing this team. Discuss the
defensive assignments so each player knows his role exactly, and who he will be responsible
for guarding.

If you have never played this team before and have no prior information (often the case with
AAU teams), try to learn early who their best players are and what style of game, what tempo,
they like. Once you know this, you can make quick adjustments in a time-out, or at the end of
the first quarter.

Game Tempo
Try to set the game tempo to the style that best suits your team. If you are a running, pressing
team, and your opponent is a slow-down team, push the ball up the floor on offense, press on
defense, and create havoc! If you are better in a half-court slower paced game (less team
quickness and only average ball handlers), then bring the ball up the court more deliberately,
and get back on defense to prevent the fast break. If your opponent is a great fast-breaking
team, prepare your team to stop the break by having one, or maybe even two, guards back,
and have your big guys jam the rebounder with hands up so he can't get off the quick outlet
pass.

Type of defense
What does your team do best? -- man-to-man, or zone? Are they quick, good defenders (go
man-to-man), or do you have a couple slow defenders (maybe go zone)? Most teams may try
both at various times of the game. Only you can decide what is best for your team. Here are a
few things that I look at. If the opponent has good outside shooters, use man-to-man to keep
pressure on their shooters.

If their strength is inside post play, you can play man-to-man and double team the post with
your weak-side guard. In this situation, whenever the ball goes into the low post, have your low
post defender deny him the drop step to the baseline, and have your weak-side guard slide
down quickly to prevent the move to the lane. Or you can go into a 2-1-2, or 2-3 zone to "pack
the paint" with your defense. This leaves the outside more vulnerable. During the course of a
game, if I realize that the opponent is getting most of their baskets inside, I may switch to a 2-1-
2 zone to jam the paint and see if they can shoot from outside. If they can't hit the outside shot
consistently, this may be the best way to stop them.

If they are playing with a point guard and two wing players ("3-out, 2-in"), we may try a 1-2-2
trapping zone.

Some coaches play only man-to-man and refuse to use zones. Others use only zones. As a
coach, I believe I should use every possible tool or trick that I can to win a game. I personally
favor man-to-man, but will not hesitate to go zone if I feel it will give us an advantage, or a
better chance of winning. One exception, teach kids in the lower levels to play good man-to-

72
man, before getting into zones. So in practice, we will work on man-to-man defense, but also
have the 2-1-2 and 1-2-2 in our arsenal, and periodically review our zone coverage patterns.

So when do you switch from man-to-man to zone, or vice versa? There are different ways of
doing this. Some coaches will change defenses frequently, in order to confuse the enemy... as
long as his own team doesn't get confused too! I personally like riding success until the
opponent shows me that they can beat it. If we are doing a great job with our current defense, I
will stay with it until it begins to fail.

You might also change from man-to-man to a zone if one or two of your better players are in
foul trouble, and you are trying to protect them from additional foul exposure.

When to press, or stop pressing

Again, the decision to press depends on whether your team has quickness, stamina, and
bench support, and whether the faster pace favors your team. Some teams will press the entire
game because it favors their quickness, and they have a deep bench. Some will press at the
start of the game to get off to a quick start. Some will press the last few minutes before the end
of a period, realizing they can rest at the break. Some teams will press after each made basket.
Some teams only press when they are behind late in the game, but it's usually too late by then.
My personal plan often is to start the game pressing. Once the opponent starts breaking down
the press, or gets a couple lay-ups, I'll drop it. I'll put it back on later as a "surprise" tactic, or if I
sense a critical time in the game where a couple quick steals and lay-ups could make a big
difference. If I have a 10 point lead with a just couple minutes left in the game, I would drop the
press, slow the game down, get back on defense and make the opponent work hard in the half-
court for their shots, working the clock down.

Using time-outs
Coaches should use their time-outs wisely. In close games, if possible, I try to save two or
three time-outs for the last few minutes of the game, when you may need to stop the clock, set
up a play, discuss your team's strategy, etc. Sometimes it doesn't work this way. You get
behind early, and must use your time-outs to hopefully break the opponent's momentum, and
reset your own strategy. If you are trying to slow the game down, you might also use some
time-outs early. If you are getting beat early, there is no point in saving your time-outs for the
end of the game, when you are down 20! Sometimes I will look over at the opposing coach and
notice that he is going to call time-out, and this may save one for me. Sometimes I see a coach
call a time-out 30 seconds before the end of a quarter and wonder to myself, "Why?" Why
waste a time-out then, when you can use the time at the end of the period as your time-out?
Remember, that at the end of each quarter, you have a free time-out.

Keep it simple in your time-out huddle. The kids will often only remember one thing you tell
them in a time-out... usually the last thing. So use your time-out to make one important team
point... don't waste a time-out to instruct just one player... you can substitute for him and
explain things to him on the bench quickly, and then send him back in. An example of an
important "team" pointer might be stressing getting back quickly on defense and keeping one or
two guards back if the opponent is fast breaking. Another example might be to change your
defense, or your offensive plan, and another might be to simply prod the kids into increasing
their defensive and rebounding intensity and overall hustle. But keep it simple.

Substitutions
If you are coaching youth basketball, where everyone is supposed to get to play, or if you have
a team with a deep bench and can do a lot of substituting, then I would advise relying on your
assistant coach to help with the substituting. If you only play six or seven players, you can
handle it. In the former situation, I have found that it's really hard to keep track of everyone's
playing time, and still try to coach the game, set the strategy, etc. Before the game, I will
discuss with my assistant who the starters will be for that game. We will then also talk about

73
which substitutions to bring in for certain players and at what intervals... that is, our "substitution
pattern". Once the game starts, I have my assistant make most of the substitutions based on
that pattern. He can see when certain players are getting tired and need a break. If we have a
"hot" player on offense, we will ride that horse for awhile and not substitute until things "cool
off". I will over-ride the assistant at any time, if I see a certain situation where I feel we need to
have a certain player or two on the floor at that time.

I also like to be aware of our players' fouls. I have a formula that I try to teach my players in
regard to staying out of foul trouble: "your number of fouls should be less than the number of
the quarter you are playing in." So you never get your 2nd foul in the first quarter, or your 3rd
foul in the second quarter, or your 4th foul in the 3rd quarter. If any of these situations occurs
with any of my key players, I may sit him down for awhile. If we are down 10, I may need to
keep him in there, and have to take my chances with the fouls, and maybe try to protect him,
using a zone on defense. On the other hand, I have seen coaches essentially foul-out their own
players with four fouls, sitting them down for a quarter or more because of four fouls...
essentially the coach has fouled his own player out with only four fouls, and taken him
physically and mentally out of the game. You might be better off letting him play carefully, than
not at all!

Another point on substitutions... if you have eight or nine fairly good players, it will probably be
to your advantage over the course of the season to play all these kids, with lots of substituting.
If you are willing to perhaps accept a couple losses early in the season, you may be a much
stronger team late in the season if you develop that eight or nine-man rotation into a good
team, with lots of bench support. This also creates more team harmony and team spirit.

Yelling at the players

Sometimes I see coaches screaming at kids. I don't think this helps the player, and is usually
born out of frustration on the coach's part. It doesn't mean the coach is a mean person, and
often the coach feels bad about it after the game. Personally, I think coaches should be vocal in
encouraging their players, and yelling plays, strategy, etc. I think it is counter-productive to yell
negative stuff at kids in front of their parents, friends and the fans. I think it is OK to get on them
in practice, in the privacy of your gym. But games are for the players and should be fun for
them, and they shouldn't have to dread the coach yelling at them.

End of quarter strategy

If you have the lead, and there is only 20 seconds left in the quarter, you may want to hold the
ball for the last shot, so that you may increase your lead, and at worse, maintain your present
lead without allowing the opponent a last second chance. In high school or under, I would want
the shot to go up with about 5 or 6 seconds left. This allows time for an offensive rebound and
a second shot, but not much time for the opponent to get the ball down the floor off the
rebound. Also, it takes some of the pressure off the shooter with 6 seconds left, as he knows
there is a chance for a rebound and put back. If he waits until the buzzer, there is more
pressure on him to make the shot.

Late game strategy

If you are ahead...
With just a 6 to 12 point lead with only a couple minutes left in the game, I try to "shorten" the
game by holding for a good shot, preferably a lay-up, and keep the clock running. As the late Al
McGuire used to say, "you don't need any more points... the clock is now your enemy!" This
may be a good time for a time-out and explain to the kids, "nothing but lay-ups". Even better,
make the call from the bench so that the clock doesn't stop for a time-out. Chances are, the
opposing coach will use one of his time-outs anyway to instruct his players to foul and press...
so you can probably save your time-out.

74
In "running the clock", I would always take the lay-up because it is a higher percentage thing
than just trying to hold the ball, and you can put the nail in the coffin with one last score. You
must still work your offense, but looking only for the lay-up. If you try to just "stall" without
looking for the lay-up, the chances are greater that you may turn the ball over, or that you will
get fouled, and a lay-up is easier than two pressure packed free throws. If you have a two
possession lead (4 points) with less than 30 seconds, hold the ball.

On defense, get back and play good half court defense. Avoid stupid fouls that stop the clock
and allow the opponent to score when the clock is actually stopped (free throws). Contest (but
don't foul) the three-pointer, and prevent the fast break and easy lay-up.

If you are behind...

Have your players push the ball up the court on offense, and full court press on defense. Use
your time-outs to stop the clock and remind your players that the key to winning is tough
defense and rebounding... you must prevent the opponent from scoring to allow your offense a
chance to catch up. Think in terms of the number of possessions you are down. If you score,
you might call a time-out immediately before they can in-bounds the ball. This not only stops
the clock, but also allows you to get your full-court press set, where you can try to deny and
steal the ball.

If you are inside a minute and are down two or three possessions, try to get the quick steal, but
if you don't get it, then immediately foul to stop the clock. Too often, teams will let 20 seconds
run off the clock before someone finally fouls, wasting too much precious time. Remember that
a lot of things can happen in just 20 seconds. After being down by two, our high school varsity
scored 4 points in just 7 seconds to win it's regional final game this year!

If you are down 4 points, you don't have to go to the three-pointer, since it's two possessions
anyway. Take it to the hoop and get to the free-throw line and stop the clock. Then after
scoring, or making the two free throws, put maximum, deny pressure on the in-bounds pass,
going for the steal, or quick foul. Even if you are down 3 with only 20 seconds to go, it might be
a higher percentage move to go for the quick two-pointer and then pressure the inbounds pass
than putting the whole game on the shoulders of your three-pointer shooter, who probably has
tired legs. If you take the "3" and miss, and the opponent gets the rebound, you are usually
history, because you will have to foul, and they only have to convert one free throw to "ice" the
game.

If the game is tied and you have the ball...

Hold for the last shot and try to get that shot with 4 or 5 seconds left, so you have time for an
offensive rebound and a second shot. But warn your players to be careful not to get the "over-
the-back" foul on the rebound. Again, it takes some of the pressure off the shooter if he doesn't
wait until the buzzer. Try to get the ball inside for the high percentage shot... you may either get
the shot, or get fouled and win it on the free-throw line. If you have an outstanding outside
shooter, you can go "inside-out", passing the ball into the low-post, sucking the defense inside,
and then kicking the pass out to your perimeter hotshot for the game-winner. If you need to, call
a time-out to instruct your players on this strategy... but realize that when you call time-out, you
risk having your in-bounds pass stolen. Even better... work on this game situation in practice
and be able to call it from the bench without using a time-out (unless you need to stop the
clock).

If the game is tied and you are on defense...

Make sure your players all know their defensive assignments. Be sure to get "help-side"
defense on their star players. Contest the shot with hands up, but do not foul, unless it looks
like an easy lay-up... then you must make them win it on the free-throw line, which is not
always easy late in the game with the pressure on and fatigue a factor. Some coaches will

75
have their defense try to "take the charge" on dribble-penetration. My experience is that unless
it is a really obvious charge, you won't get the call from the ref when the game is on the line.

If you get the quick steal in transition, attack the basket immediately without calling a time-out
to set up a play. Chances are, in transition, you will get a good shot, or get fouled. If you get the
defensive rebound with 5-6 seconds left, get a quick time out to stop the clock and set up your
last play.

Another "gutsy" strategy is: assuming they have a poor free-throw shooter, you may
immediately foul him, if it is a "one and one" situation. If he misses the first free throw, you can
gain possession and now you have the advantage. I would not attempt this if the opponent is in
the double bonus, or if there is less than 10 seconds left... you may not have time to score after
the free throws, should he make them.

There is a lot of basketball strategy that can be used in the final two minutes! I'm sure I have
omitted some things and other coaches could add even more pointers. Watch TV and see the
great college coaches work the clock late in the game. You can learn a lot from the TV
commentators as well.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

76
 Planning Practices
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

I have been asked by coaches to show a sample practice plan, so there's one included below.
Now this is just an example. I will vary the drills and skills, and the team skills from practice to
practice. Certain skills should be practiced every practice, such as the ball-handling and
dribbling drills, and shooting drills. Depending on your schedule, the amount of practice time
you have and what your specific team needs are, you vary your drills. A rough rule of thumb
for high school teams is to spend about half the time on individual fundamentals and half the
time on team skills. If you are working with younger kids, you might slant this more toward
fundamental skills.

You must plan each practice. John Wooden has said he and his assistants often would spend
more time planning a practice than the actual practice itself lasted. Keep a loose-leaf notebook
of each of your practices that you can refer back to. After each drill or after practice, you can
scribble additional notes on your practice plan from that day.. things that you have learned, or
things that you feel need special emphasis. Don't just come to the gym each day without a
plan and think you can just "wing it". You have to plan for success and plan your practices just
like a teacher creates a lesson plan for his/her English or math class. Your practice should be
like a classroom and you are the teacher.

Several additional notes:

Stretching is important at the start of practice in order to avoid injuries. I always disliked using
precious "gym time" on stretching exercises. So I have asked my players to come 10-15
minutes early and do their stretching on the sidelines, so we are ready to go once practice
starts. This might not be practical, and you may need to do 10 minutes of stretching at the
beginning. While the team is stretching, you can discuss your plans for the day, or explain
what things need to be worked on, use the time to praise good things that have happened,
reflect on your "quote of the day" (see below), etc.

Move quickly from one drill to another and don't spend half of your practice time on one drill.
The kids will get bored and won't learn much after the first 5-10 minutes into the drill. If they
mess up, they will get another chance to run that drill tomorrow.

Budget your time for each drill. If you are introducing a new drill, play, offense, defense, etc,
you will have to allow more time the first time. If you are reviewing something, like a set of
plays or your out-of-bounds plays (that they should already know), move quickly through
these... you are reinforcing their memory (a brief repetitive exercise that can be done each
day). It is probably best when introducing a new drill to put it at the start of practice when
player interest and concentration are highest.

Follow an up tempo exhausting drill with 5 minutes of something less aerobic. Make them work
hard, but don't be unreasonable.

Do your free-throw shooting after an aerobic, running drill when the players are tired, in order to
simulate the leg and body fatigue that occurs in the real game setting.

Have every player do dribbling and ball-handling drills. I have been asked, "Why have my post
players waste their time doing guard-type dribbling drills?" Doing these drills will make your
post players better athletes in general, will help their overall coordination, and will improve their
"hands". Also, how do you know a certain player will be a post player all his/her life (especially
younger players).

If you have a good assistant, you can plan some time for individual skills with perimeter players
on one end of the floor, and your post players on the other end.

77
Do not show favoritism to certain players in practice. Make them all work equally hard. Try to
instill in your star players that they must lead by example, and be willing to work harder than
anyone else on the team to be a great player. Don't ignore your "role players" (a better term
than "subs", or "bench players")... make them feel they are contributing and encourage them.

Early in the season, I would run a lot of conditioning drills. I believe your players and team will
improve much more by doing conditioning drills than a lot of push-ups and running without the
ball. If you are going to make your players run, make them do it with a ball... like full-court
speed dribbling, using the right hand one direction and the left hand coming back. Rather than
running a "gut buster", or a "suicide" (which is a terrible name), do a fast-paced aerobic drill like
speed dribbling. The kids will get just as tired, will hate it just as much, but their dribbling and
conditioning will both improve.

Getting into tournament play, or a crucial game, you might spend most of your time on team
skills preparing for the big game, working on any special situations necessary to play the
upcoming opponent. For example, you might want to refine your press break, or your full-court
press, or how you will defend a certain star player, or how you will attack their zone defense,
etc

"Open" or "closed" practices... whether to allow parents, spectators in the gym during practice
is up to you and your philosophy. But make sure you have rules established from the start of
the season. If you allow parents in the gym, make sure they understand that it is a classroom
and they must keep quiet and not "coach" the kids from the stands. In the event that this
becomes a problem, you reserve the right to close your practices at any time.

Now go to the next page to see a sample practice plan.

===================================================================

78
Sample Practice Plan

Northern Lakers Practice -- January 7, 2001

Quote of the day: "It's not the size of the dog in the fight, it's the size of the fight in the dog." --
former US President and Supreme Allied Commander Dwight D. Eisenhower

12:45-1:00 Stretching
1:00 Dribbling skills, sideline moves
In and out, in and out cross-over, cross-over, behind back, stutter, stutter-cross
1:10 Passing drills (step around, 3 on 2 press break passing)
1:20 Man Defense
Man Concepts: on-ball, deny (on the line, up the line), help-side, Shell drill
1:25 Pick drills (pick-seal and roll, down-screen, back-screen)

1:35 General 3-2 Motion offense

Set-up
1-Up (1-3-1)
2-up (1-4 with 2-up seal, and 2-up double)
4 down
3Cross (overload)
3Corner (2-3 set).
NEW: Wing-post motion (down-screen curl, back-screen backdoor cut)
1:50 5 on 5 - Motion offense, m2m defense, transition.
2:00 1-2-2 trapping zone defense ("Chaser")
Setup
Trap wings
Trap corners
2:10 Shooting drills
Form Shooting
Elbow shooting
Partner drills
Perimeter players -- catch and shoot
Post players -- low post power moves
2:25 Review and run the Secondary break
2:30 Free throws
2:35 Review and run out-of-bounds plays
"4-Down"
"3"
"Stack"
“Side Box"
2:45 Press break
2:55 Team huddle, handouts (OB plays, Motion options)
3:00 Dismiss

Also see Coach Ken Sartini’s (aka “Coach Sar”) practice planning form (separate file).

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

79
 Coaching Young Players
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

I have gotten lots of questions from coaches and parents about coaching youth basketball, and
advice for coaching youngsters, let's say 1st through 6th grades... elementary school children.
You are probably a parent coach, a teacher-coach, a former player, or just someone who likes
kids and wants to help coach and work with a bunch of kids. You may be organizing a
recreational league or a church league, or are developing a program at your elementary school.

Some of the kids may have played some, and some have never played before. Some are there
because they already love the game, and some are there because of their friends. Some were
urged by their parents to give it a try.

Their parents will likely have varying perspectives. A few will think you should win every game
at whatever cost, and will be yelling advice from the sidelines. Some will be thankful and happy
that their child is on your team. Some will be a little fearful that you may yell at their child, or
that their child may not be a good player and will embarrass him/herself.

So what advice do I give you?

First, make it fun for the kids. Do not yell negative things at them as this embarrasses them in
front of their friends, and is actually counter-productive creating more stress and more
mistakes. It makes you look like a bully, and you may completely turn the player away from
ever wanting to play again. You can yell, but it should always be positive comments. If a player
messes up, don't embarrass him/her in front of his/her friends. For example, if someone is
having trouble with a certain skill or drill, rather than pointing the finger at him, blow the whistle
and say, "Some of you are having trouble doing... blah, blah, blah... let me show you how to do
this." So maintain a positive attitude, even if you are losing by 30 points.

Teach good sportsmanship by your example... no yelling at the refs, no demeaning the other
team, other players, etc. Teach them to play hard, but do not allow "dirty" play or trash talking.
Teach them to respect their opponents and the officials. Wins and losses are not important at
this age. Teach them that you don't have to win a trophy to be a winner.

Also, let the kids know that it is OK to make mistakes, that you expect them to make mistakes.
Basketball is not a perfect game. All players make mistakes, even Michael Jordan. Coaches
make mistakes, and we all know that the refs make mistakes! You just have to keep playing
hard and learn from those errors. "A good garden may have a few weeds."
If you have an actual team (not a large clinic-type group), teach them about teamwork and their
responsibilities to the team... coming to practice, encouraging each other, helping each other,
etc.

At the first practice, provide a handout for the players and their parents. This handout could
contain some of the following items:
1. Your phone number, or how they can contact and communicate with you.

2. Your game and practice schedules.

3. Your goals for the team.

4. A roster of all the players (if you know it).

5. Let them know about any costs.

6. Your policy regarding playing time.

80
I have actually seen parents in the stands timing each player's playing time with a stopwatch! I
believe that you should let all the kids play at this age... winning is not the prime consideration
at this age. Having said that, I also think that it is unfair to the kids that come to all the practices
for a player who frequently misses practices to get as much playing time in games. Explain
your policy on excused and unexcused absences.

7. You could mention how parents could help (some like to be involved), such as keeping stats,
working the scoreboard, driving to games, providing treats, helping with uniforms, post-game
pizza parties, and maybe even assisting in practice.

8. You could briefly discuss the common problem these days of unacceptable parent behavior
at games... yelling advice to their own child, yelling at the refs and other team's players, and
"coaching" from the stands.

When dealing with parents, be honest and open and show them that you really care about
helping their child... get them on your side. Make yourself available to talk with them after a
game. Be diplomatic about any "coaching" advice they have to offer. Rather than getting into
an argument with them, just politely thank them for their interest... you obviously don't need to
follow their advice, but you also don't have to be snotty about it either! Do not simply choose to
ignore parents. You may be able to get away with this if you are coaching at the college level,
but it is still churlish, inconsiderate behavior. When coaching youth basketball, even at the high
school level, parents can help make or break you... believe it!

If you have a son/daughter on the team... be fair. Do not give your own child more playing time
than the others. Treat your child like any other player on the team... do not over-criticize and
expect more from him/her. And don't provide him/her any special treatment either. When you
are at the court, he/she is like any other player on the team. Away from the court, he/she is
your special child and needs your love and support, not criticism... save any criticism or advice
for when you are actually in the gym... kids don't even want to hear about it in the car on the
way home. My daughter sure didn't!
_________________________________________________________________

Coaching a young team.

First, you probably have limited practice time at this age. So don't try to accomplish too much,
and keep things simple. Practices for younger children should probably be no longer that 60 to
90 minutes because of their short attention span. So what are you going to teach them? What
are your priorities? Others may disagree with me, but here are some of my thoughts.

Teach the fundamentals. At every practice, do ten minutes of ball-handling and dribbling drills.
Do simple passing drills. Teach footwork (pivoting, triple threat position, doing lay-ups, how to
shuffle and slide on defense, etc). Correct shooting form will be difficult to teach at very young
ages, since it will just be an effort to get the ball up to the hoop! But start working on correct
form when the kids are strong enough... maybe 6th-7th grade. Teach man to man defense and
how to box out and rebound.

Team Offense. With a limited number of practices, find out who can dribble and handle the
ball... they are your point guards and wings. Put them in a simple "3-out, 2-in" set (a point
guard, left and right wings, and two post players), or bring one of the posts up to the free throw
line... hence a 1-3-1 set. Teach them the numbering quickly... 1 is the point, 2 is the right wing
and 4 the right post, and 3 the left wing and 5 the left post (the even numbers are on the right
side and the odd numbers on the left). The only reason to put them into a set is to try to
maintain some spacing on the floor... so all five don't end up in the right corner! But tell them
that they must not stand still in their position, but cut and move. Don't teach any plays except
maybe a simple out-of-bounds play. They will not execute plays at this age anyway. Let them
just "play".

81
I have a "first shot mentality" with kids this age... in other words, the player with the first open
shot within his/her shooting range, should take the shot. This has several advantages. If they
do too much passing at this age, they will eventually throw the ball away or commit a turnover,
and you don't get a shot. So shoot early, and crash the offensive boards for second and third
chances. It's a little like ice hockey at this age... the team with the most "shots on goal" usually
wins. "First shot mentality" also takes the pressure off the kids (some kids are afraid to shoot,
afraid to miss). If you teach the kids that you expect them to shoot when they are open, and
that you don't expect them to make all their shots (even Michael Jordan only makes half of 'em)
they will play more relaxed and better. Let them know that you don't expect them to make every
shot... but that you do expect them to shoot when they are open, and everybody rebounds
(maybe one guard back). Teach them that part of being a good "team" player is taking good
shots.

So nothing fancy on offense... just a simple set, spacing, cutting, an early shot and crash the
boards for more shots. If they are quick, fast break for easy lay-ups too.

Team Defense. I believe all young kids should first learn to play man-to-man defense before
learning zones. With the really young kids, just teach on-ball defense. With 6th graders, start
teaching "on-ball", "deny" and "help-side" concepts (read “Basic Defense”). Now having said
this, you could probably win most of your games by using a 2-1-2 (or 2-3) zone defense
because at this age most baskets will be made inside the paint. If you pack the paint with your
defense, you will shut them down... there is little outside scoring at this age. Our town's
recreational league does not permit zone defenses at the younger ages. Double-teaming is not
allowed, except in the paint. The kids will become better defensive players if they learn to move
their feet and learn to play good man defense. Even playing man-to-man you can clog the
paint. Just tell the kids that the paint is the "blood and guts" area that they must defend... that's
where most scores will occur. So whenever there is an offensive player in the paint, a warning
bell should ring in their heads that this player is a threat to score if he/she gets the ball... so
deny this pass. When an offensive player dribble penetrates, other defenders should collapse
on him/her and "help". Also, when a player dribbles around the right corner (they always do),
don't let him/her penetrate along the baseline... stop it there and trap.

Full-court press. First, full court pressing probably should not be permitted with younger kids.
But if you are permitted to full court press, use former Oregon State legend Ralph Miller's
“pressure defense”. I have used this with middle school kids and it works great, and is very
easy to understand and teach. You will get steals and turnovers in the back-court that you can
quickly convert into easy lay-ups. It is simply a full-court man-to-man defense, so it flows easily
into your half-court man-to-man defense. Simply, you pressure the ball handler, and the other
players try to deny a pass to their man. Oftentimes the young inexperienced guards will throw
the ball away, or make some other turnover, but just applying a little gentle pressure. Don't let
them dribble the ball uncontested up the floor... apply a little harassment. Don't teach a lot of
trapping and gambling... just everyone plays good man-to-man pressure. Now, this is
important... if they see the ball advancing quickly up the court (a good dribbler, or a good pass),
then everybody sprints back as fast as they can to the paint (the old "blood and guts" area) and
tries to stop them from getting the lay-up. Then, after stopping the lay-up, everyone can fan out
and pick up his/her man. So when you are beat on the press, you must sprint back. Tell them
that if they don't sprint back, you will assume that they are tired and will sit them down for a
rest! By playing full-court defense, they will tire easier and actually want rest, and this is good
for getting all your players in the game.

Substituting. Try to figure out who your best players are. When you substitute, always have two
good players out there... someone who can dribble and get the ball down the floor, and
someone who can rebound and play tough defense "in the paint". I often have my assistant
make most of the substitutions. You are too busy trying to "coach" the game to keep track of

82
everyone's playing time... your assistant can be a big help here. Discuss with your assistant
before the game who your starters will be, and your general substitution pattern (who plays
what positions, etc), and then let him do it... you can always over-ride him in a given game
situation. With young players, let everyone on the team have a chance to start at least one
game during the season. I tell the kids, "its not who starts... it's who can finish the game". My
players don't seem to care who starts because they know that they are all going to get to play.
Believe it or not, I have even had some say, "Coach, let Jessica start this game, because I
started the last one"... kids can be so neat!

__________________________________________________________________

Here are some articles that may help

(but don't try to do too much too soon!):

Dribbling, ball handling:

Ball-Handling
Dribbling
Basic Dribbling Drills
Fundamentals
Sideline Dribbling Drills
Dribble Tag

Passing:
Pairs Passing Drills
Triangle Passing Drill

Defense:
Basic Defense
Pressure Defense
Transition Defense
Defense 1 on 1 Drill
Shell Drill
Z-Drill
Defensive Tips
Rebounding

Offense:
3-2 Motion Offense (keep this very simple!)
1-3-1 Motion #1
1-3-1 Motion #2
1-3-1 Motion #3
Offensive Tips
The Lay-up
3 Line Lay-up Drill
The Set Shot
2-Man Shooting Drills
Setting Screens
Screen, Pick Drills

Out-of-bounds play:
Spread play

Coaching:
Pre-game
Game Coaching

83
Good luck! Have fun and don't forget the pizza!

__________________________________________________________________

Running a youth clinic

You and some other coaches/parents are organizing a general instructional clinic(s) for
elementary aged children... no actual set teams. What drills/skills are you going to teach? How
can we make it fun?

Again, with youngsters, do about 90 minutes. You can have both girls and boys doing this
clinic. In the clinic setting, you should teach individual player skills... save team concepts,
offensive sets, plays, zones, etc for their team coaches. You need to teach them correct
fundamentals and still make it fun for them.

Spend about 10-15 minutes on stationary ball-handling and dribbling drills. Get them all in one
big circle, spread out, with the instructor in the center of the circle. Each player has a ball. The
instructor goes through the ball-handling drills and dribbling drills and the players follow his
example, doing the same drill the instructor is doing. Since I am getting older and am not as
skilled as I was years ago, I have one of our excellent high school players do the ball-handling
and dribbling demonstrations... they are heroes to the kids! Have a couple coaches walk
around the circle helping kids who are having difficulty.

Then, spend five minutes on sideline dribbling drills.

A quick trip to the drinking fountain... then 5 minutes of full-court dribbling drills.
Play a couple quick games of dribble tag.

Do 5-10 minutes of two-man passing drills... the chest pass, bounce pass and overhead pass.
Demonstrate correct technique... step into the pass, hands on both sides of the ball, snap the
pass finishing with the thumbs pointing down.

Work on lay-ups, demonstrating correct footwork. Split them into two groups (equal talent) with
a group on each basket. Each group makes two lines (shooters and re-bounders) along the
sidelines. Start with right-handed lay-ups. When you say "go" each group starts doing lay-ups,
with the shooters going to the end of the rebounding line and the re-bounders going to the end
of the shooting line. Every time a lay-up is made, that group yells the count (the number they
have made). First team to 10 wins... the losers have to do five push-ups and the winners get to
count for them. You can have similar competitions shooting short shots in the paint area.

Here's a variation the kids love... they are all on the same team. Have a shooting line starting in
the center of the free throw line area, and a rebounding line near the basket. The rebounder will
pass it to the first person in the shooting line, who steps in to about the hash marks (depends
on the age) and shoots. The kids yell out their number of baskets each time one is made. You
give them a time limit and a goal of how many shots they must make in that time period (adjust
this based on their skill level and so every player gets to shoot at least twice). If you have a big
group, you may want to run this on each end of the floor. Make it challenging for them. If they
fail to make the goal in the allotted time, they all have to do five push-ups. Now here's the part
they love... if they succeed in "beating the clock", then the coaches all have to do five push-
ups! They love counting for you when you are doing your push-ups.

Use your imagination... you can create other little games for them.

Spend the last 15-20 minutes scrimmaging... man-to-man defense, no full-court pressing.
Divide the talent equally and don't have the same kids on the same team each week... mix

84
them up. When you have both girls and boys, I have found that it is best to split them up and
have the girls scrimmage on one end (use the side baskets) and the boys on the other. When
playing together, some boys will never pass to the girls and the girls get upset and frustrated.
So if you have enough players, let the girls have their own game.

At the end of practice, get them all in the huddle and tell them how well they are doing, and
advise them to do dribbling and ball-handling every day at home for ten minutes. Then
everybody puts there hands together and yells your school mascot name-- like "Rayders!!!"

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

85
 Running a Youth Basketball Clinic
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

You have been asked by a youth group, church group, or school to run a basketball clinic for
your area youth. Or you are a high school coach wanting to build his/her program by starting
"from the ground up" with your younger players. For this discussion, let's assume the kids have
had some basic level instruction and are in the 12-17 year old age range. For even younger
kids, click here (go to the bottom of the page).

Hopefully you will be able to break it down into various age groups and will have several
sessions with each group (maybe a week long clinic). Your focus should be teaching the basic
fundamentals, while making it fun for them. Below I have listed the fundamental skills you
should teach, and some drills for each fundamental. Vary these drills from day to day, to
maintain player interest and for more fun.

You will need space, a large enough gym (full-court) for the players to spread out, and
hopefully several side baskets. You must have enough basketballs so that each player will
have a ball (ball-handling and dribbling drills). Make sure younger players and girls use the
28.5 size ball. Have practice jerseys for scrimmaging. Enlist the help of some assistants. If
you can get them, some of your local varsity players (both boys and girls) can be very helpful in
demonstrating and helping with the various drills… e.g. dribbling and ball-handling drills). And
the younger players oftentimes look up to the varsity players as their heroes… so get good role
models.

Ball-Handling and Dribbling

You should do the ball handling and dribbling drills for 20 minutes at the start of each session.
Articles:
Ball-Handling Drills
Dribbling Basics
Dribbling Drills
Sideline Dribbling Drills
Dribbling Moves Drills
Full-Court Dribbling Drills

Passing
Articles:
Two Man Passing Drills
Three Man Passing Drills, including the full-court weave.
Triangle Passing Drill

Teach correct footwork

Articles:
Jump stop
Pivoting
Defensive slides and footwork
Triple threat position

Correct lay-up form and footwork

Articles:
Lay-ups
86
3-Line Lay-up Drill

Teach correct shooting form

Articles:
Set Shot, shooting form
2 Man (partner) Shooting Drills

Teach fundamentals of man to man defense

Articles:
Teach the concepts of close-out, on-ball, deny and help-side defense. No zones for now.
Basic Defense
Shell Drill
1 on 1 Drill

Depending on how much time you have, teach these additional fundamentals

Setting screens, pick-seal and roll

Articles:
Setting Screens
Pick Drills
Motion Offense Drills

Cutting and Faking

Articles:
Cutting and Faking
Motion Offense Drills

Rebounding Techniques... box-out, grab the rebound, chin it, and outlet pass.
Articles:
Rebounding Tips
Circle Drill
2 Man Drill

Post player moves

Articles:
Post Moves
Low Post Drills
Low Post Power Drill

Perimeter player moves

Articles:
Outside Moves
2 Man (Partner) Shooting Drills

And if you have even more time, here are some good, fun transition drills
4 on 4 Transition
11-Man Drill
Pitch and Fire Drill
Piston Drill

87
Let them scrimmage some at the end of each session, just for fun! Give positive, constructive
instruction as they play. When you notice they are tired, have them stop and make a few
suggestions, and then resume play.

OK, there's a lot of stuff to look at. But don't try to do too much at once. Ideally, you will have
several sessions for each group, and you can work these various things into your plan. I think
the kids will enjoy it more if you vary the drills. But some drills (the basic ball-handling and
dribbling drills should be done each time at the start of the practice).

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

88
 Conditioning
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

"Don't play sports to get into shape. Get into shape to play sports." - unknown

Endurance, strengthening, stretching and flexibility all are important parts of playing any
aerobic type sport such as basketball. Close games are won late in the game often by the
team with the best physical conditioning. When you are tired, your shots come up short, you
miss your free-throws, your defense, hustle and rebounding suffer... and these are the things
that win games. If you are a quick, full-court pressing and fast-breaking team, you must be in
top physical condition and you can win against more talented teams by pushing them to their
point of fatigue.

Ideally, the conditioning process should begin before the season starts, as each serious-
minded player should come to the first practice already having begun his/her conditioning at
home a couple weeks before practices begin. A home program can involve stretching
exercises, home strengthening exercises, running distances and sprints and jumping rope
(good for foot speed, coordination and endurance).

Once practices start, use a program of stretching, followed by running drills that stress aerobic
conditioning. Finish with strengthening exercises or weight room work-out (two or three days a
week). Players are stronger these days and this translates into confident, athletic teams that
can rely on their strong rebounding, defense, and hustle to win many games.

I recommend this book at Amazon.com to you -- just click on the

link to take a look.

Complete Conditioning for Basketball

Here are links to some other excellent pages on weight training:

Basketball Coaching - In Search of Excellence -- Weight Training Program
Sports Conditioning
Coach Ray Lokar's Conditioning
Bigger Faster Stronger Program

Many teams run sprints ("gut busters", or whatever you like to call them). However, I believe
that it is better to run specific conditioning drills using a ball, rather than just running sprints. If
you are going to make your players run, have then do it with a ball... speed dribbling, dribbling
moves, full court defense 1-on-1, etc. There are a number of great drills that combine
conditioning and specific skills. When you do these drills, your players will get tired quickly.
When they are tired, let them catch their breath by having them shoot free-throws or work on
shooting form to simulate the fatigue that occurs in a game situation. But be sure to start your
practice with stretching exercises first, to enhance flexibility and avoid injuries.

89
Below is a list of drills that are all excellent for aerobic conditioning as well as developing a
specific skill. If you use the 3-man weave, the "piston" and "pitch 'n fire" drills, 4-on-4 transition,
and the full-court dribbling drills, your players will definitely get an aerobic workout, and if you
run some of these drills every practice, your conditioning will be much better. You can vary the
drills from practice to practice. Make sure all drills are run with intensity and speed, no
"dogging it". If you feel the team is loafing, stop the drill and as "punishment" (or motivation)
have them each take a ball and speed dribble back and forth full-court several times (down with
left hand, back with right hand). But don't go overboard... follow a high intensity aerobic drill
with free-throw shooting or some other less aerobic drill, or even a "time-out", which simulates
the rest in a game situation, to discuss or demonstrate some concepts of your offense,
defense, etc.

Also, when using competitive drills (where the losing team has to run a few sprints), instead of
just running sprints, always have them take a ball with them and speed dribble back and forth,
so they are working on dribbling as well as conditioning and their "punishment" (motivation).

Conditioning Drills
Defensive:
1 on 1Drill (do the full-court drill)
Z-Drill
Piston Drill

Dribbling: (do the full-court speed-dribbling exercise mentioned above)

Sideline Dribbling Drills
Full-Court Dribbling (and Lay-up) Drills
Dribbling Moves Drill

Passing:
Pairs Passing Drills (do the full-court drills)
3-Man Passing Drills (Full-Court Weave)

Transition Offense/Defense:
Pitch 'n Fire Drill
Transition Offense Drills
4 on 4 Transition
11-Man Drill
Hustle Drill

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

90
 What to Eat Before a Game or Practice
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

First, the athlete should maintain a healthy diet every day, not just on game day, for overall
well-being.

Now on game day...

I have always believed in a diet high in carbohydrates (avoid fats, grease) about 1-2 hours
before game-time or practice (you need time to digest it). Players should eat enough to feel
their hunger is satisfied, but not overeat or stuff themselves. If it is a larger meal (lunch or
dinner), eat at least 2 to 3 hours before the game; if it is a snack (you already had lunch or
dinner earlier), eat the snack 1 hour before the game.

Suggested foods:
Some kind of pasta is a good lunch or dinner choice.

Others:
Cereals and grains
Vegetables
Crackers, peanut butter cracker or peanut butter sandwich
Pancakes
French toast
Bagels
Orange juice
Apples
Bananas
Grapes
Lean Meats

Avoid dairy products high in fat. Low fat yogurt would be fine.

Adequate fluid intake is important before and during the game to avoid dehydration... but again,
too much is not good medicine. In addition to water, sport drinks or fruit juices are good
choices.

If your practices or games are late afternoon, right after school, make sure you eat breakfast
and lunch that day. Some fruit like bananas or oranges one hour before the practice or game
would be a good booster.

Check these pages for even more details:

The Federal Consumer Information Page -- Winning Nutrition for Athletes
(http://www.pueblo.gsa.gov/cic_text/health/win-win/athletenutrition.html)

www.goaskalice.columbia.edu/1438.html

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

91
 About Food Supplements...
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

I have been asked about the use of food supplements, Creatine and Androstenedione.
For those who don't know me, I am a physician specialized in Internal Medicine, and am a
Fellow of the American College of Physicians (I coach for fun!).

I have summarized this info from "The Medical Letter", an authoritative, unbiased panel of
prominent American physicians and pharmacists... Vol 40, Nov 6, 1998 issue.

Creatine
This is a natural amino acid derivative (not a steroid). It is made in the liver, kidneys and
pancreas, and is in food sources such as meat and fish.

Effects on Performance:
In one study, creatine led to an increase in body mass, mainly through water retention. A 28
day trial at 20 grams/day dose in 8 weight-lifters (a very small number for a study), showed
some increases in strength, weight and fat-free mass. A summary of 31 short term studies
(using the drug for one week) indicated that creatine may "modestly improve performance" in
short duration (less than 30 seconds) bursts, but not in sustained activity... and this was only in
a laboratory setting. No definite benefits were shown in actual field studies. Other studies
showed "no consistent advantage during aerobic exercise".

Adverse effects (side effects):

One person with a kidney problem who took creatine developed kidney failure. While most
patients taking creatine had no short term side effects, the long term effects are not known, and
some patients reported some side effects including skin rash, shortness of breath, vomiting,
diarrhea, nervousness, fatigue, headache, muscle soreness and weakness, convulsions and
heart irregularity. Whether these effects were directly related to the creatine or not is debatable.

Summary:
Creatine may mildly improve performance in brief aerobic activities in the laboratory. Whether
this translates into improvement in an actual athletic competition is unknown, and has never
been proven. No data is available yet on long term safety. The potency and purity of creatine
sold as a dietary supplement is unknown since it is not under FDA control, and many users
tend to exceed the recommended doses.

Personal Comment:
Creatine does not replace conditioning, weight training, practice, and hard work in achieving
athletic success. Any benefits are probably minimal, and could be achieved by weight training
and practicing more. Certainly when a young player sees Mark McGuire using it, it is a powerful
influence for him to try it also. Mark McGuire's success I believe relates mainly to his hard work,
great hand-eye coordination, training, etc. Who knows if creatine really helped him hit all those
homers. If, instead of using creatine, he put a plug of chewing tobacco in his mouth as he
walked up to the plate, would we all think that it was the tobacco that gave him his great
success? If you use it, do not exceed dosage, and drink plenty of fluids, and don't whine if you
develop side effects 10 years from now, because the long term effects are not known.

===================================================================
Androstenedione
This is an androgen (male hormone). It may cause an increase in the male hormone
testosterone. There are no proven data showing that it definitely increases muscle mass or
performance. If it did increase muscle mass, it would be in a way similar to taking androgenic

92
steroids and would probably carry all the same long-term side effects: prostate cancer, liver
tumors and liver failure, loss of male fertility, behavioral changes. Women who use testosterone
become more male-like with deeping voice, cessation of menstrual periods, scalp hair loss,
acne, facial hair growth. In adolescents, stunting of overall height can occur. Androstenedione
has been banned by the IOC, NCAA, NFL and many other athletic organizations. Again, its
long term effects are not definitely known.

Personal Comment: Don't use it!

Here is another article from the Mayo Clinic on the use of both creatine and androstendione.
Please read the entire article, and not just the parts that seem to justify your own belief.
http://www.mayohealth.org/mayo/9811/htm/muscle.htm

An additional personal note: It is my opinion that you will not get an unbiased answer from the
companies that manufacture and sell these supplements. They are making money on the
sales.

I hope this information helps you make the correct decision in regard to the use of these drugs.
James A. Gels MD, FACP (aka "Coach" Gels)

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

93
 Basketball Terminology
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Like any sport or discipline, basketball has its own language. A novice could listen to two
coaches talking to each other and not have any idea of what they are talking about! This is true
in almost any subject. Studying to become a doctor, you first have to know the names of all the
parts before you can cut 'em out! How do we come up with all these terms? It is an evolutionary
process over the years. An expert coach uses some new term at a basketball camp, and it
becomes part of the vernacular. A colorful TV commentator (Al McGuire and his "aircraft
carrier", Dick Vitale, etc) come up with very colorful expressions, and it becomes part of the
game, BABY!

This page will be like a basketball dictionary, trying to define our terms. Realize that sometimes
coaches don't completely agree on what something means, and sometimes we have more than
one term for the same thing... e.g. a "screen" and a "pick" (same thing to me).
This page can be a work in progress. If any one has a term to add to this list, or disagrees with
my definition, please email me.

First, lets look at the "half-court" diagram below to define areas of the floor.

The "paint" is the area inside the lane

lines from the baseline to the free-
throw line. If your offensive
player has a foot on, our inside these
lines for 3 seconds or longer, he will
be called for the 3-second violation.
There is no restriction on the time
defensive players can occupy the
paint.

"Free throw line", ("charity stripe") is

the line you must stand behind when
shooting a free-throw.

"Low post" area is the area near the "block" on either side of the lane (or "paint" area), to about
half way up the lane toward the free throw line.

"High post" is that area along the free throw line, and both "elbows".

The "point" is out front, and the "wings" on either side. The "short corner" is between the corner
and the basket, about 12 feet out.

"Ball-side" refers to the side of the floor where the ball is. "Weak-side" is the opposite side
away from the ball. Players cutting on the weak-side toward the hoop, are using the "back-
door".

"10 second line", or half-court line, is the line down the center of the floor. It divides the "full-
court" (entire playing area) into two "half-courts". Your "fore-court" is the half-court with your
basket, and the "back-court" is the half-court with the opponent's basket. Once a team gets
possession of the ball, it has 10 seconds to get the ball across the half-court line into its fore-
court. Once across this line (all three points - the ball and both feet), they may not pass or
dribble the ball back across this line, or step on the line (while having possession) or the "over
and back" violation occurs. The offense may retrieve the ball without penalty if deflected across
by a defensive player.

94
 Numbering players, offensive terminology.
Years ago, numbers were not used. You usually had two "guards" who played the "perimeter"
and brought the ball up the floor. The "center" usually played around the high-post area, and
the two "forwards", started in the short corner to corner areas, extending out to the wings.

Now, most coaches use a numbering system, as the old definitions often do not apply any
more, with players playing in multiple offensive formations. Using a numbering system, makes
it easier for coaches and players to understand plays, sets, and know their roles. Different
numbering systems exist and coaches have their own favorite ways of doing this. Here is the
numbering system that I use, which I feel is very easy for young players to learn. The diagram
below shows a "3-2 set".
The "point guard" is #1. The right "wing" is #2, and
the left wing is #3. The right low post is #4, and the
left low post is #5.

This is easy for young players plays to learn if you

tell them that the even numbers (2 and 4) are on
the right side, and the odd numbers (3 and 5) are
on the left.

In this set, you have three guards, or "perimeter

players", and two "post players", rather than the old
definition of two guards, two forwards and a center.

In a "1-3-1 set", you would bring one of the low posts up to the high-post area. In a "1-4 set",
you bring both post players up to the elbows ("stack offense"), or you can drop both wings
down to the corners ("low stack"). You could use a “4-out, 1-in offense” with four perimeter
players and one post player. The "open post offense" (5-out) is yet another.

"Pick and roll" -- a play where an offensive player sets a "screen" ("pick") on a team-mate's
defender, thereby freeing up the team-mate, after which the screener moves, or "rolls" off the
screen to the hoop, or an open area for the return pass (see Setting Screens).

"Give and go" -- a very basic play where after passing to a team-mate, the passer quickly cuts
toward the basket, and receives the return pass back from his team-mate for the lay-up (see
"Play 23").

"Reverse the ball" -- this means to quickly move the ball, by passing, to the opposite side of the
fore-court, either by a series of quick passes, or by means of a "skip pass" (a pass directly
across court, thereby "skipping" one or more offensive players in the succession around the
perimeter). You may want to reverse the ball quickly to "over-shift" a zone defense. By moving
some of your offensive players to one side of the floor (e.g. against a zone defense), you "over-
load" the zone.

"Post up" -- offensive move wherein a low post player positions himself, and "seals" his
defender off so that he can receive the pass down low on the block, where he can use a "post
move" for a score, or quickly pass the ball back outside to an open team-mate for a three-
pointer (going "inside-out").

There a terms referring to types of offensive cuts made by players, usually moving without the
ball. Rather than re-defining them here, please read the page on "Cutting and Faking".

There are terms that refer to various types of dribble moves (see "Dribbling").

95
To understand the terms "triple threat position", "jab-step" and perimeter one-on-one moves,
see “Outside, Perimeter Moves”.

"Out-of-bounds plays" are used in an attempt to get a quick scoring opportunity when you have
to in-bounds the ball (either under your basket, or along the sideline.) There are many of these
plays to choose from on the home page.

There are defensive terms.

"Man-to-man defense" -- each defensive player is assigned to guard a specific opposing player.
He may "switch" his player with another team-mate if he gets screened. Man-to-man defenders
must learn the meaning of "on-ball" (defending the player with the ball), "deny" (preventing your
man from getting the ball), and "help-side" (sagging off your man to help your team-mates
prevent inside "penetration" (see Basic Defense). The term "close-out", refers to the method in
which a defender quickly slides up to, and contains the ball-handler, or ball-receiver.

There are the terms, "on the line" and "up the line". These two terms refer to a defender's
position on the floor, relative to the ball-handler and his man. Use this illustration... stretch a
rope between the ball-hander and your man (let's say between the point guard and the wing).
"On the line" means your defensive position is such that you can see your man and the ball,
and your body is directly on that imaginary line usually with chest toward the player, and head
toward the ball with arm up in the passing lane, in a "full denial" situation. "Up the line" means
you are in a position backed off from this imaginary line, toward the basket, in a position where
you can see both ball and your man, prevent the "back-cut", and yet be able to force the ball-
handler to pass away from your man. The farther apart the ball-hander and the wing player are,
the more the defender can drop back "up the line", and still be in position to intercept or deflect
the pass.

A "trap" is set when two defenders double-team the ball-handler, trying to force a turn-over or a
jump-ball situation.

"front the low post" -- on defense, this has to do with how you defend the low post player. The
defender can stay between him and the basket, or get out in "front" of him between the low
post player and the passer, so as to "deny" him the poss.

"box-out" -- what every player should do when a shot goes up... try to block out, or "box-out",
the person he is guarding to keep him away from the basket and prevent him from getting
"inside position" for the rebound. See “Rebounding”.

"Zone defense" -- each defender, rather than guarding a specific opposing player, is assigned
to guard or cover a certain area of the floor, or zone. These man-to-man and zone definitions
are very general and broad, as "a good zone looks like a man-to-man, and a good man-to-man
looks like a zone", each incorporating certain aspects of each other, for an overall "team
defense". Many different zone sets are used, 2-3, 3-2, 1-3-1, 1-2-2, etc (see "Zone Defense").
By definition, the term "zone offense" refers to a team's offensive strategy used to defeat a
zone defense (see "Zone Offense").

There are various "gimmick" defenses that combine elements of zone defense and man-to-man
coverage (e.g. "box and 1", "triangle and 2", etc). See “Junk Defenses” and “Match-up Zone
Defense”.

"Transition" is the process of changing from defense to offense, or vice-versa. "Transition

offense" is the former, and "transition defense" is the latter. Transition offensive strategy may
involve a full-court "fast break", or a "secondary break" (see "Transition Offense") wherein the
offense attempts to quickly move the ball up the floor in hopes of getting the easy lay-up.
Transition defense may be simply getting back down the floor as quickly as possible on

96
defense, or may involve a "full-court press", which can be man-to-man, or a "zone press" (see
"Transition Defense"). Against a full-court press defense, the offense will often use a "press-
breaker", a play designed to counteract the full-court press.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

97
 Basketball History
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Dr. James Naismith invented the game in 1891 in Springfield, Massachusetts at Springfield
College. He was a Presbyterian minister (but never preached)… and a doctor (but never
practiced medicine)… and an educator and physical education teacher… and a basketball
coach. He was born in Almonte, Ontario of Scottish ancestry. Thus, this great American (and
now worldwide) sport was invented by a Canadian, with a Scottish accent! He was a thirty
year-old assistant physical education director when he invented the game. He only played in
two games! The first baskets were not peach baskets as the story often goes, but were
vegetable baskets nailed to the railing of an elevated circular running track, which just
happened to be about 9 or10 feet high.

He eventually became head of the physical education department at Kansas, and designed the
first golf course in Kansas. His favorite sport was fencing and he was very good at it. He
invented basketball for fun, as a simple physical education activity… not something to be
serious about! He said often, “Basketball is just a game to play. It doesn’t need a coach… you
don’t coach basketball, you just play it.” Nevertheless, he became basketball coach at Kansas
in 1900, and lost his first game 48-8 to Nebraska. He coached for eight years and his won-loss
record was barely .500. But he started a great Kansas tradition. For years, the Kansas
Jayhawks had one of the most winning programs in all of college basketball. Phog Allen
(Kansas, record: 590-219), Adolph Rupp (Kentucky), and Dean Smith (North Carolina) were all
Jayhawks.

Naismith never patented his game, and did not profit from it. Lawyers advised him to get a
patent, but he was always adamantly opposed to it. At one point his personal finances were so
bad that his house in Kansas was repossessed by the bank.

Dr. Naismith worked with the famous football coach, Amos Alonzo Stagg. He helped Stagg
design the first football helmet. Stagg later gave credit to basketball for the development of the
forward pass in football.

The first public game was in Armory Hill YMCA on March 11, 1892, with a crowd of 200 on
hand, as the students beat the teachers 5-1. Amos Alonzo Stagg scored the only point for the
teachers. The first women’s game was March 22, 1893 at Smith College in Northampton,
Massachusetts. The first college game was Feb. 9, 1895… Minnesota State School of
Agriculture beat Hamline 9-3. The first women’s college game was in April 1895 between
Stanford and California. The first men’s professional league began in 1898 and was known as
the National Basketball Association (but not the same NBA as today). The first national AAU
basketball tournament was in 1897. Wisconsin claims to be the first state with a high school
state tournament, which was won by Fond du Lac in 1905. High school basketball attracted
national attention 12 years later in 1917.

Basketball was first played in the Olympic Games in 1936, in Berlin, when the USA beat
Canada 19-8 for the gold medal. The game was played outdoors, in the mud and rain, on a
tennis court.

Some of the early rules:

1. The ball.
The original ball was a soccer ball. The official sized ball came in 1894, was an inflated rubber
ball, and sometimes was lopsided. So when you hear the game referred to as “roundball”,
remember that it wasn’t always so.

2. The basket.

98
Peach and vegetable baskets were used, but it was a nuisance to get out the stepladder every
time someone scored! In 1893, a carpenter designed a wire rim, with a chicken wire net. It
didn’t exactly SWISH! The term “cagers” relates back to the old chicken wire nets.
Backboards were designed so that fans, reaching over the railing, couldn’t deflect the shots.
3. Number of players.
Originally, 9 players were on each team… then 7, and now 5. Dr. Naismith once said that there
could up to 40 on each team, if the floor was big enough!

4. Fouls
On your second foul, you had to sit down on the bench, with no substitution (sort of like
hockey), until the other team scored a goal, and then you could come back in. On a flagrant
foul, you were disqualified for the rest of the game, with no substitution… so your team might
be playing with only 8 instead of 9 players. If your team committed three consecutive fouls, the
other team was awarded a goal.

5. Out-of-bounds.
The 5-second rule was original. If the ref couldn’t tell who hit it out last, the ref would just throw
the ball straight out into the court, and whoever got it, got it!

6. Game times.
Two 15-minute halves, running watch. Halftime was 5 minutes.

7. The winner is:

The team with the most goals… 1 point per goal. If there was a tie, the captains on each team
could agree to play until another goal was scored (so it was sudden death or victory).

8. Positions
Dr. Naismith suggested the 9 players be arranged on the floor as: a goalkeeper, 2 guards, 3
centers, 2 wings and a “home man” (basket hanger)… no 3-second rule in those days.

9. On roughness:
Dr. Naismith did not want it to be rough like rugby… “The time to stop roughness is before it
begins”. He found that after a team committed two consecutive fouls, they would really be
careful not to foul again, since the third foul would give the other team a goal… and not many
goals were scored in those days. The jump shot and the fast break had not yet been invented!
Dribbling and ball handling was not as good, with a lopsided ball.

10. The center jump

After each basket was made, a center-jump was held at mid-court… the other team didn’t
automatically get possession. Dr. Naismith was very opposed to the rule change later that
eliminated the center jump. He felt that eliminating the center jump penalized the team that just
scored. The other team could now take the ball and stall with it for a long time, if they had the
lead. The 10-second rule eventually came in to force teams to advance the ball up the court
and speed up the game. Many teams held the ball for very long periods of time, and the scores
were very low.
The game has come a long way. To quote Bob Broeg, “The roundball, not the snowball, is the
symbol of winter now, and winter has never been the same since 1891!”
Sources:

“Basketball: a new game”, James Naismith, Springfield College, Coaching Basketball by Jerry
Krause, Masters Press, 1994.
“The Basketball Man”, Bob Broeg, Coaching Basketball by Jerry Krause, Masters Press, 1994.
“Basketball History”, Jerry Healey, Coaching Basketball by Jerry Krause, Masters Press, 1994.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

99
 Teaching Man-to-Man Pressure Defense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Man-to-man pressure defense enables us to get pressure on the ball at all times ("on-ball"
defense), while still protecting the basket ("helpside defense"). I love watching a well-coached
team that plays great man-to-man pressure defense. Here's the way we teach it.

Force to the sideline and baseline.

We teach our on-ball defenders to force the ball toward the sideline and then down to the
baseline. Once at the baseline, we do not allow penetration along the baseline, but try to trap
there. Forcing the ball to one side immediately allows you to establish your helpside defense.
When the ball is at the top of the key or in the middle, the low defenders must play fairly
"straight up" and you must defend the entire court. But once the ball goes to the side, our
weakside defenders can move into a helpside position (see below) and deny the pass into the
post, and help prevent dribble-penetration. When the ball is in the corner, we only have to
defend one half of the court and can load all five defenders toward that side. With the long skip
pass to the other side, there is usually enough time (while the ball is in the air) for the defense
to quickly rotate back.

How do you force the ball to the side? The on-ball defender at the top of the key, or on the
wing, must close-out on the ball-handler with his sideline (outside) foot back and the middle
(inside) foot forward. Have the defender put a little more of his/her weight on the front foot, so
that if the ball-handler makes a quick dribble move toward the outside, the defender can push
back off that front foot more quickly.

Some coaches deny the point to wing pass, but it might make more sense to let the pass go to
the wing if we really want to force to the side. Once the ball is on the wing, we want to deny the
pass back out to the point, and force the ball even further into the corner. Now realize that
most often the pass to the low post comes from the wing. And once the ball gets into the low
post, most of the time bad things happen... they either score or we foul. So it is very important
to teach your post defenders to front the low post as the ball moves to the wing and corner
areas. We must deny that pass into the post. But what about the "over-the-top" lob pass?
First of all, this pass is a difficult pass to consistently complete... it is often thrown too high and
out-of-bounds. But when this pass is made, the opposite low post defender (in "helpside")
must immediately rotate over to double-team that pass, while the opposite wing defender (who
should already be inside the paint in helpside) rotates down to cover the opposite low block.

Baseline dribble-penetration.
We also want to deny dribble-penetration along the baseline. If the on-ball defender gets
beaten, the low post defender (who is fronting the low post) should immediately rotate to the
baseline to stop the ball. Meanwhile, the opposite low post defender must immediately rotate
to cover the vacated post player while the opposite wing defender rotates down toward the
basket. Once we have the ball stopped at the baseline, we will try to trap here and get the five-
second count, or get the ball-handler to make a bad desperation pass outside... something that
we can intercept.

Keeping pressure on the ball, on-ball defense.

We want defensive pressure on the ball at all times. This will cause offensive turnovers and
give their outside shooters difficulty getting the shot off. Assume the stance described above,
forcing toward the baseline, and focus on the belly-button. Don't get your feet crossed unless
you have to sprint back. Avoid “reaching-in” and taking a swipe at the ball, as this causes the
defender to lose his/her balance and defensive stance and the offensive player can now beat
him/her off the dribble. Reaching-in also leads to fouls. Keeping pressure on the outside
harasses the offensive player and makes it difficult for him/her to see the floor and his/her
teammates. An important part of denying that pass into the low post is keeping pressure on the

100
ball, so that it is really difficult to make that pass. But won't playing up tight on the ball-handler
allow him/her to beat the defender with a dribble move? Yes and no... read about "help and
recover" below. The principle of help and recover is very important in denying dribble-
penetration, once again pointing out that man-to-man defense is a "team defense", not just
individual man-on-man. Also, our helpside low defenders should be in position to stop dribble-
penetration, but at the risk of leaving an unguarded low post player... so we must teach our
outside defenders how to work together with help and recover to keep the ball outside

Defensive positioning off the ball - Deny, Helpside, Help and Recover
See Diagram A below. First, pretend there is an imaginary line up the middle of the court
called the "helpside line" (red line). And then also imagine a line drawn from the ball to each
offensive player (green lines). We like to have our defenders one pass away from the ball in
"deny", playing "on the line" (see Diagram A). This is especially true if we want to deny a pass
back out from the corner to the wing and from the wing to the point. Depending on your own
coaching philosophy and the opponent's strengths, you may or may not want to deny the pass
from the point to the wing.

Defenders whose man is two passes away are in "helpside", and are "up the line" sagging into
the lane (paint) area. This helpside positioning almost looks like a zone away from the ball and
puts our defenders in a better position to help prevent inside passing and dribble-penetration.
Helpside defenders should never lose sight of their man and should use their peripheral vision
to always see the ball and their man. Some coaches call this the "pistols position" pretending
that your index fingers are pistols, with one pistol pointing at the ball and the other pointing at
your man. Some use the term "ball-you-man" to emphasize this point. Once the ball gets
down in the corner, all helpside defenders should have one foot on the helpside line (Diagram
B). You can see in this diagram that our X5 defender is in a good position to slide over and
provide backside defense to the over-the-top lob pass to O4. And X4 is in a good position to
deny the pass to O4 and also deny dribble-penetration by O2 (Diagram C). Also notice how X5
and X3 rotate in this situation. Also notice in Diagram B, that whenever the ball is below the
free throw line, the helpside defenders should have one foot on the helpside line.

Now notice in Diagram D below how the defense shifts and rotates on the "skip pass" across
court to O3. Not shown in the diagram, if O4 flashes to the ballside elbow, X4 will move up and
try to keep a hand in front denying O4 that pass, while X2 (in helpside) can drop down a little
lower in the paint in the event of the over-the-top lob pass to O4.

Help and Recover.

Diagrams E and F below teach how to give help and recover on the perimeter. This is
necessary because when you play tight pressure defense on the ball, there are going to be
times when the on-ball defender gets beaten off the dribble. To help stop dribble-penetration,
the adjacent perimeter defender gives help, trying to deny the dribble move. Here is a tip... if
you are playing against a team with a very good penetrating guard, rather than playing a "full-
denial", defenders one pass away can play a little up the line and step or two toward the ball in

101
order to help stop the dribble penetration. On the other hand, if one of the help defenders is
guarding their star outside three-point shooter, you would probably rather keep that defender in
a deny position and not leave his man to give help. It helps to know your opponent.

In Diagram E, O3 tries to dribble-penetrate. The X1 defender gives help and O3 is prevented

from penetrating, and has to dish back out to O1 (Diagram F). The X1 defender then has to
rotate quickly out to on-ball defense on O1, and the X2, X3 and X4 defenders are now in deny,
while the X5 defender moves into help-side (Diagram F). Important teaching point... in
teaching help and recover, you must teach and drill your help defenders to move their feet
quickly to establish position to prevent the dribble move... they must not simply "reach-in" and
take a swipe at the ball.

Defending post players

We want to make every effort to keep the ball out of the low post, as most of the time when the
ball gets down there, the opponent either scores or we commit a foul. One way to motivate our
players is to explain that by keeping the ball out of the low post, they reduce their chances of
getting into foul trouble and sitting the bench. So I believe it is wise to front the low post, either
1/2 or 3/4 front (from the baseline side), or full front (if the post player is not very tall). Your
post defenders must work hard with good footwork to accomplish this. Some coaches prefer to
full-front the low post, while others are concerned about giving up rebounding position and the
lob pass over the top, and prefer to 1/2 or 3/4 front. As mentioned above, our helpside
defenders rotate quickly to defend the lob pass into the low post (Diagrams B and C above).
Equally important in denying the pass into the post, the on-ball defender must pressure the ball
and make it difficult to make the pass into the post.

We would also like to keep the ball out of the high post (elbow or free-throw line area). Here
we will 1/2 or 3/4 front the high post. The technique here is for the defender to keep his feet
between his man and the basket but have one arm and hand wrapped around in front of the
high post player in the passing lane. See below about defending inside, post screens.

Double-teaming a dominant low post player. See the two diagrams below. Against a star post
player, 1/2 or 3/4 front with your post defender from the baseline side. If he/she receives the
pass, have your opposite wing defender (who should already be in the paint in helpside) drop
down and double from the lane side to prevent the move to the lane. This is preferable to
double-teaming with the opposite post player, as that would leave the remaining offensive post
player unguarded. Using the opposite wing to double may make you susceptible to the
opposite wing kick-out and three-pointer, but this may be preferred if that wing player is not a
good shooter. If he/she hits a few, it's back to the drawing board!

102
Defending cutters
Another important aspect is to deny the pass to a cutter moving through the lane. Here the
defender must try to keep between his man and the ball, denying the pass. But if the cutter
establishes inside position (relative to the passer), one technique the defender can use is to
"bump the cutter" off his/her intended pathway by getting position and riding the cutter away
from the basket. Here the defender must use good footwork and establish position over the
cutter... you cannot simply push or hold the offensive player. Examples of cuts to defend
against are the "give and go" cut, a cut from the weakside wing (either with or without a
screen), flash cuts to either high or low post, back-cuts, etc.

One special circumstance... defending the curl cut. See the diagrams below. A good quick
guard will sometimes run down low and curl around a post player in order to lose his man. I
believe the best defense here is for the defender to "chase" the offensive player around the
screen as closely as possible. Sometimes I'll see the defender instead just drop back outside
thinking the cutter will be coming back out to his original spot or the perimeter. The right-hand
diagram below illustrates the error in this thinking. A good offensive player will read this and
pop out to the corner instead for the skip pass and open three-pointer.

Defending against screens

You must have a plan for defending against screens. Of utmost importance is communication
between defenders and calling out the screens before they are actually set.

Inside post screens should be switched, since you usually do not end up with a size-quickness
mis-match here (see below). On outside perimeter screens, you must decide whether you
want to switch these screens, try to fight over them, or slide through (under) them. Switching
on the outside could occasionally lead to size and quickness mis-match, especially if a post
player steps outside to set a screen for a guard. Here are some ways to deal with various
screens.

103
 On-ball screens.
See Diagram G. You can try to fight over these screens rather than switching, especially if
there is a "big-little" mismatch (such as when a post player steps outside and sets the on-ball
screen). Otherwise, you could simply switch the screen if no size or quickness advantage is
given up. We can fake a switch by having the X1 defender "show" over the top of the screen,
stopping dribble-penetration and forcing O3 farther outside. Forcing O3 outside allows X3 the
spacing to fight over the top of the screen. Then X1 must recover quickly back to his man.
This is just another example of "help and recover".
Several important points...
1. The three remaining defenders must be ready to give help if
O1 rolls off the pick inside and gets the pass over the top.

2. X1 and X3 must not allow O3 to split the trap with the dribble.

3. Use this method (or switch the screen) if the ball-handler is

within shooting range and is a good shooter. If the ball-handler is
well-outside the three-point arc, the on-ball defender could simply
slide through the screen (similar to Diagram I below).

4. A hand-off screen, or weave screen, is best switched.

Off-ball screens.
Oftentimes, if the defenders communicate well, the screened defender can simply slide through
this screen (Diagram I). It is also easy to switch these screens, as long as a mis-match does
not occur.

But if the offensive player coming around the screen is a very good shooter, then it is best to
fight over the top of the screen (or switch it). See Diagram H. It should not be difficult to fight
over the top as X3 has already dropped down in helpside. As the screener comes near, X3
simply steps out over the top of the screen and stays with O3. Or you can switch this screen,
as long as the screened defender works hard to drop back ("step under") and avoid getting
sealed outside by the screener. See Diagram J. Here X1 picks up O3 and X3 quickly slides
inside of and takes O1. X3 must be very careful not to get "sealed" outside, allowing O1 to roll
inside for the pass.

104
Inside Post Screens.
As stated above, it is best to switch inside screens. Here you are usually not giving up a size
or quickness advantage, and switching gives us the best chance to deny the pass into the low
post.

Here is a simple rule to use. The defender fronting the low post always takes the low cutter,
while the other defender always takes the high cutter.

In Diagram K1, the cutter cuts low. O5 cuts low and X4 switches and simply continues fronting
that low post (now occupied by O5). X5 would take O4 now, who may move to the high post or
the opposite side. In Diagram K2, the cutter goes high (which is probably what occurs more
often). Here X5 drops low and inside O4, while X4 moves out to deny the pass to O5 flashing
to the elbow.

In Diagram L, the cutter cuts high. A switch is not always necessary as X5 steps up the lane
over the top of the screen and stays with O5, while X4 continues fronting O4.

Downscreens.
See the two diagrams below. It would be tempting to simply switch the downscreen as the X2
defender is in perfect position to pick up the cutter O4 coming around the screen, and X4 is in
good position to take the screener O2. Two problems could arise however. First, after the
switch, you could have a big-little mismatch. Second (see the diagram to the right below), the
cutter may read this switch and instead flare out to the short corner for the pass and open shot,
as X2 is caught inside. So we believe it is better not to switch this screen and instead
aggressively chase around the screen.

105
Backscreens.
We switch backscreens. See the two diagrams below. As O2 cuts backdoor, X4 will switch
and prevent the pass inside to O2. Very importantly, the screened defender X2 must quickly
step in front and around to get inside position on the screener O4 and avoid getting pinned
outside. This is usually not too difficult if X4 calls out the backscreen to warn X2 that it is
coming. After this switch, you may have a big-little mismatch and these defenders will want to
switch back at the first opportunity... which may be during the next perimeter pass, especially if
the pass goes weakside.

Defending Baseline Out-of-Bounds Plays with Man-to-Man Defense

Some coaches like to zone the baseline OB play with a 2-3 zone. However, there are plays
designed that can beat this defense (see "Out-of-Bounds Plays vs the 2-3 Zone"). Here is a
way to play the baseline out-of-bounds situation man-to-man without getting "burned" inside.
First, switch any inside screens, and fight for inside position. In addition, deny the pass inside
by having your inbounds defender play a "one-man zone" in the paint denying that pass. In the
diagram below left, X3 drops off the inbounder into the paint, looking to deny any pass inside
and lay-up. But once the pass goes outside, he/she must move quickly back on the inbounder
(O3), who may step out to the corner for the outside shot (below right).

Remember, good man-to-man defense is "team defense". Here is a good quote: "The best
man defense looks like a zone and the best zone defense looks like a man."

Also see: Basic Defense, Shell Drill, Man-to-Man Positioning Drill.

You can create your own simple breakdown drills to teach the above principles. Or get Coach
Bob Huggins' (University of Cincinnati) excellent book, "Building a Man-to-Man Defense". This
booklet is loaded with drills on teaching these man-to-man concepts.

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

106
 Zone Defense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Zone defense is different from man-to-man defense in that, instead of guarding a particular
player, each zone defender is responsible for guarding an area of the floor, or "zone", and any
offensive player that comes into that area. Zone defenders move their position on the floor in
relationship to where the ball moves.

Zone defense is usually effective in stopping dribble penetration and one-on-one moves, and
for this reason, has been banned in the NBA, as fans like to see spectacular one-on-one
moves. On a personal note, I believe that all kids must develop their man-to-man defensive
skills first. I believe youth basketball leagues should limit the use of zones to the older age
groups. On the other hand, some high school and college coaches treat zone defense almost
as if using it were blasphemous, or an admission of inferiority! At the upper levels, I believe
you should assess your team's strengths and weaknesses as well as your opponent's, and the
game situation, and use whatever tool you need to try to win.

Advantages of zone defense

1. Not all teams have quick, good man-to-man defenders. Or the offense may have a couple
of outstanding players too quick to defend individually. Playing a zone can help against mis-
matches such as these. You may have a tall, strong, but not particularly quick team. A zone
can look intimidating with all your big guys stacked up inside with their hands up.

2. In using a press, you can protect the paint area and force the opponent to shoot from
outside. An example would be using the 2-1-2 or 2-3 zone which places a lot of defense in the
paint and invites the offense to shoot from outside. This is a good way to see if the other team
can shoot from outside. Not all teams can shoot the outside shot consistently. Even good
shooting teams have off nights, especially under tournament pressure.

3. Your team may be in foul trouble, especially your big man. You can help protect him with a
zone.

4. You can slow the game and control the tempo somewhat with a zone.

5. Although players must hustle regardless of the type of defense that is being played,
sometimes when your team is fatigued, playing zone for a few minutes may help them catch
their breath.

6. By changing defenses from man-to-man to various zones, you can keep the offense off-
balance and confused.

7. If you use the full-court or half-court press, after the press is broken, it is easy to slip back
into a half-court zone defense

Disadvantages of zone defense

1. If your team is behind, you won't get enough pressure on the ball, and the offense can eat
up a lot of time by holding the ball for a good shot. You must go man-to-man in this situation.

2. If the opponent is having a good shooting night, your zone is beaten, and you must consider
going to the man-to-man to get pressure on the ball out on the perimeter.

3. There are not always clear-cut rebounding box-out assignments and sometimes the
offensive player will slip inside for the offensive rebound and lay-up.

107
4. If you play zone most of the time, and rarely play man-to-man, your players may become
complacent on defense and may lose their man-to-man skills. I would practice man-to-man 80-
90% of the time, and zone the remaining 10-20%.

Basic pointers for all zone defenses

1. Try to keep the ball outside. Double-team the ball in the paint.

2. Be vocal, talk to each other.

3. Move, adjust your position relative to the movement of the ball.

4. Get your hands up and out, to shrink the passing lanes.

5. When the offense dribble penetrates, quickly close the gap.

6. Get to know your opponent and adjust. Over-protect against the best shooters, or the "hot"
shooter, and sag off the guy who never shoots.

7. Trap the corners.

8. Especially if you are ahead, don't gamble or get too zealous about trapping the wing and
point guard positions. Keep pressure on the ball, but also protect the paint and force the
outside, low-percentage shot.

Now, see these zone defensive sets:

2-3 (or 2-1-2) zone
1-2-2 zone
1-3-1 zone
3-2 zone

108
 2-3 (or 2-1-2) Half-Court Zone Defense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The 2-3 zone has the advantage of protecting the inside, the "paint", and keeps your "bigs"
inside. It's weakness is that it can be beaten by good outside shooting, with open areas on the
wings, point and high post.

A critical point: When the ball moves into the corner and the #4 defender moves out to cover
the ball, it is imperative that the #5 defender slides over immediately into the low block vacated
by #4. If #5 does not get there in time, the offense may get an easy pass into the low block, and
a lay-up.

Study the diagrams below to understand the how the zone shifts, or moves. Read “Zone
Defense” for detailed tips on playing zone defense.

See also: 1-3-1 Zone Defense, 1-2-2 Zone Defense

Pass into the high post. See Diagram E.

Have your #5 defender come up to defend this (like a

2-1-2 zone now).

But watch out for the underneath cutter in the paint.

Your #3 and #4 defenders may have to cheat into the
paint when #5 moves high.

109
Defending the point.
Defending the point is always problematic.

If you know that their #2 guard is their best shooter, then have #1 defend the point at first and
allow #2 to sag toward their good shooter. And just the opposite applies if #3 is their best
shooter.

At first you may decide to defend the point loosely, but if their #1 starts hitting some shots,
you've got to get pressure there. See the web-page animation.

* Never let their point split the #1 and #2 defenders and dribble penetrate the middle.

#1 and #2 may really have to move quickly and work hard, and work together in order to cover
the point and both wings.

Players often think playing a zone is easier than man defense, but in fact, to play good zone,
you may have to work much harder to be effective.

Covering the Skip Pass

It depends if you have double-teamed the corner as in Diagram C, or are covering the corner
as in Diagram D.
In the usual single-coverage (Diagram D), a skip pass from the corner to the point or to the
opposite wing is covered by the opposite outside defender. For example, if the ball is passed
from the right corner to either the point or left wing, then X1 should cover the receiver as the
zone shifts into position (see Diagram F).

If you have double-teamed the corner (Diagram C), a long effective skip pass is less likely, but
in this case would be covered as follows (see Diagram G):
1. Pass from right corner to left corner or wing... cover this with X3 defender.
2. Pass from right corner to point... cover the receiver with X1.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

110
 1-3-1 Half-Court Zone Defense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The 1-3-1 zone has the advantage of being able to apply pressure on the outside arc and high
post, and allows for some trapping. The major weakness is when the offense attacks from the
corners and into the low post. Coaches may differ on who covers what, but you have to decide
which is best for your team and make sure your players all understand how you want them to
shift and defend.

Study the diagrams below to understand the how the zone shifts, or moves.

Any time the ball goes into the high-post, #1 should drop back and double-team the ball
(Diagram B).

If the ball is on the wing, #5 should be defending the ball-side low post, and #4 covers the ball-
side elbow, and the weak-side wing slides down to the opposite low post (see Diagram C)...
then when the pass from the wing to low post occurs, you should be in pretty good position to
stop them. If you want to gamble a little and trap the wing, have #1 and wing defender make
the trap and have the opposite wing stay outside a little to deny the pass back to the opposite
guard. The corners are vulnerable here, but hopefully the player with the ball will not see this
while under the pressure of the trap (See Diagram D).

Now, when the ball is in the corner (Diagram E), I have #5 go out and defend the ball-handler,
and #4 goes to the ball-side low block, and the ball-side wing sags toward the ball-side elbow.
Diagram F shows one way to trap the corner, provided #2 can get there quickly. #4 stays on
the ball-side low block and #1 fills the gap between the ball-side elbow and three-point arc.
The opposite wing (#3) has the entire weak-side, backside coverage.

All these movements have to be made quickly... a split second too late can make the difference
in the opponent scoring. Defenders must "get there" quickly.

See also: 2-3 (2-1-2) Zone Defense, 1-2-2 Zone Defense

111
Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

112
 1-2-2 and 3-2 Half-Court Zone Defenses
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The 1-2-2 zone has the advantage of being able

to apply some pressure on the ball on the
outside arc, and allow for some trapping. This
zone is more effective against a good outside
shooting team, whereas the 2-3 (or 2-1-2) helps
shut down inside scoring.

The major weaknesses are the high post area,

and this defense can also be attacked from the
corners. Study the diagrams below to
understand how the zone shifts, or moves, and
see the animation also.

Read Zone Defense for detailed tips on playing

zone defense.
See also: 1-3-1 Zone Defense, 2-3 (2-1-2) Zone
Defense

See Diagram B. Ball on the wing. The wing defender covers this and #1 drops down to the
ball-side free-throw line area.

See Diagram C. Trapping the wing. If you want to gamble a little and trap the wing, use #1
and the ball-side wing to make the trap. The opposite wing slides into the high post. Although
trapping the wing adds an element of risk to your defense, you might consider this when the
ball-handling skills of the offensive perimeter players is suspect, or if you are behind and need
to get pressure on the ball.

Many teams will try to attack this zone from the corner. Your defenders must shift quickly to
prevent the pass from the corner to the low post.

See Diagram D. Ball in the corner, no trap, deny the corner to wing pass. #4 will come out on
the ball, and #5 must really move and "get there" to defend the ball-side low post. The weak-
side wing (#3) will drop down to the weak-side low block and cover the backside. #2 will deny
the pass back out.

113
See Diagram E. Trapping the corner. You can try trapping the corner if #2 can get down there
quickly. Once again, #4 will come out on the ball, and the ball-side wing (#2) will drop down
and create the trap. #5 must really move and "get there" to defend the ball-side low post. #1
fills the gap between the ball-side elbow and the three-point arc. The weak-side wing (#3) will
move just inside the free-throw line and cover the high post and backside.

Defending the high post. This can be a real problem with this zone. We'll discuss some
strategies for stopping this.
1. When the ball is on the wing, and you are not trapping the wing, #1 should slide down and
deny the pass to the high post. See Diagram F.

2. When the ball is on the wing, and you are trapping the wing, then the opposite wing must
defend the high post. See Diagram G.

3. When the ball is passed to the point, if the pass to the point came from a wing, then the
opposite wing must defend the high post (if there is a high post player there). See Diagrams H
and I.

4. If you are still having difficulty stopping the high post, and if the opponent's point guard is
not a strong outside shooter, then consider going to a straight 3-2 zone.

114
3-2 Zone Defense
With the 3-2 zone, you drop the point defender
(#1) down to the free throw line. Because of this,
you can also position your wing defenders out a
little wider.

This will help in your defense against the high

post, but allows the point guard some open shots.

With the 3-2 zone, you can still cover the wing the
same as in the 1-2-2 zone seen in Diagrams B.
You trap the wing with the wing defender and the
middle defender, while the opposite wing slides
into the high post (Diagram K below).

You can cover the corner by having the ball-side low defender (#4) come out and the weak-
side low defender (#5) go to the ball-side low block... exactly the same as with the 1-2-2 zone
(Diagrams D and E above). Optionally, instead of #5 sliding over to cover the ball-side low
block, you can cover the ball-side low post with #1 sliding down (see Diagram L). The weak-
side wing (#3) will move to the ball-side elbow.

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

115
 Match-up Zone Defense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

I've had a number of requests for an article on the match-up zone. Sometimes this is called a
"combination" defense, combining elements of man-to-man defense (on ball), and zone
defense (away from the ball). This is a zone defense that acts a lot like a good man-to-man
defense. The on-ball defender closes-out and plays tight like in a man-to-man. The zone
away from the ball resembles man-to-man "help-side" defense.

A good man-to-man defense looks like a zone away from the ball (help-side defense)... see
Basic Defense. The match-up zone resembles what we years ago called a "switching man-to-
man", where defenders switch freely with one another, so that your defensive big men stay
down low and your quick guards are on the perimeter.

This discussion also reminds us that "a good zone looks like a man-to-man, and a good man-
to-man looks like a zone."

An advantage of the match-up defense is that it may confuse the opponent in trying to figure
out what defense you are actually playing. Also, it may dictate or affect the offense's basic set
and get them out of their usual comfortable set. With the match-up, you can show a 2-1-2
formation, which may force the offense to go with a 1-3-1 or a 3-out, 2-in set. If you show a 1-
3-1 or a 1-2-2 match-up zone, the offense may change to a 2-1-2, or 2-3 set. So you may be
able to put them into something they are less comfortable with. For a good listing of
advantages and disadvantages, see Coach Jackson's excellent page on "Combination
Defenses". As in any aggressive man-to-man defense, pressure the ball at all times, front the
low post, deny the passing lanes, and give help on inside penetration.

Now let's look at some defensive sets and how to match-up. You can create your own match-
up rules so long as your players all understand and know the coverage patterns. In the
diagrams below X = defense, O = offense.

2-1-2 Match-up Zone (Diagrams A and B)

Refer to Diagram A.
Here your 2-1-2 match-up faces a 1-3-1 offense. You see in the diagram
how your defensive players match up with the offense. X1 takes the point
(O1), and X2 gets the right wing player (O2), while X3 comes out to pick
up the left wing (O3)

Refer to Diagram B.
The 2-1-2 match-up zone faces a 3-out, 2-in offensive set. The coverage
pattern is identical to that in Diagram A, except that X5 will drop down to
the low block and pick up O5.

116
 One guard defensive front match up zone.

By using either the 1-3-1 or 1-2-2 set, you may be able to force the
offense out of their usual 1-3-1, or 3-out, 2-in offense and into a 2-1-2 set.

Refer to Diagram C. (1-3-1 match-up zone vs 2-1-2 offense)

X1 picks up the guard to his right and X2 gets the other guard. X3 drops
down to get the player in his/her corner and X4 gets the opposite corner.
X5 has the middle.

Refer to Diagram D. (1-2-2 match-up zone vs 2-1-2 offense)

Again X1 and X2 pick up the two guards (O1 and O2) and X3 gets the
wing-corner (O3) on his side. X4 picks up the opposite corner (O4) and
X5 moves up to defend the high post (O5).

Match-up zone vs Stack Offenses

Refer to Diagram E.
Here's how to match up against the 1-4 stack offense. X2 should play
the gap between O2 and O4, and X3 plays the gap between O3 and O5.
Both of these defenders can try to deny the pass to the wing and help
when the ball gets to the post player at the elbow. If X2 (or X3) gets
beaten by the back-cut, then X4 (or X5) must recognize this and pick up
the cutter, while X2 (or X3) slides over to pick up the post player (O4 or
O5) that was vacated by the switch.

Refer to Diagram F.
Here's how to match up against the 1-4 low stack offense. X2 should
again play the gap between O2 and O4, and X3 plays the gap between
O3 and O5. Both X2 and X3 can attempt to deny the pass to the two
offensive players they are gapping. X4 and X5 three-quarter front the two
low post players. X1 plays good man-to-man defense against the point
guard (O1).

So far, so good...

Now how are you going to deal with cutters? This is one of the difficulties with the match-up
zone. Players can get confused as to how to rotate to pick up cutters. Offensive players
cutting from side-to-side are usually not a problem as the defenders can easily switch this. But
confusion can occur when the cutters are moving from high to low, or when the offense
overloads one side. You can handle this in a couple of ways. You can create your own set of
117
rules for your players as to how to rotate the coverage, so long as everyone fully understands
the rules and you drill this in practice. A simple way to solve the problem of screens and cutters
is (1) have all players automatically switch on all screens and (2) stay with your man until
he/she moves near another defensive teammate and then switch. As in any good defense,
bump the cutter off his/her intended path.

The other option, which is even more simple, is to have just one rule... once the initial match-
ups are done (on that particular offensive possession by the opponent) and you have affected
the offense's basic set, everyone plays man-to-man, using the concepts of on-ball, deny and
help-side defense (see Basic Defense).

Refer to Diagrams G and H... you must have a solution for defending these offensive cuts.

Copyright 2001, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

118
 1-3-1 Match-up Zone Defense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by:
Coach Ken Sartini (aka "Coach Sar"), Arlington Hts, IL.

Coach Sar ran this 1-3-1 match-up for years with his high school team. But first take a look at
the general article on match-up zones. Also be sure to view the animation also.

An advantage of the match-up zone defense is that it may confuse the opponent in trying to
figure out what defense you are actually playing. Also, it may dictate or affect the offense's
basic set and get them out of their usual comfortable set. You can show this 1-3-1 match-up
zone, and the offense may change to a 2-1-2, or 2-3 set. So you may be able to put them into
something they are less comfortable with.

As in any aggressive man-to-man defense, pressure the ball at all times, front the low post,
deny the passing lanes, bump the cutters, and give help on inside penetration.

In this article, we will discuss Coach Sar's 1-3-1 match-up zone and demonstrate how to deal
with cutters. This is one of the difficulties with the match-up zone. Players can get confused as
to how to rotate to pick up cutters. Offensive players cutting from side-to-side are usually not a
problem as the defenders can easily switch this. But confusion can occur when the cutters are
moving from high to low, or when the offense overloads one side. In this discussion X =
defense, O = offense.

There are 10 rules in this defense:

1. Use a 1-3-1 set with X5 in the middle.
2. X5 plays O5 man-to-man at all times, while the other four defenders rotate around X5.
3. If O5 steps outside, X5 has him/her man-to-man.
4. Play the flash cut to the high post or elbow man-to-man.
5. When defending against the dribble, stay with your man and switch zones (not men).
6. Switch on screens.
7. Rules for covering shallow ball-side cuts (see below).
8. Rules for covering deep ball-side cuts (see below).
9. Rules for covering weak-side cuts (see below).
10. Play the baseline cut man-to-man.

Rule 1. Show a 1-3-1 match-up set with X5 in the middle.

By using the 1-3-1 set, you may be able to force the offense out of their
usual 1-3-1, or 3-out, 2-in offense and into a 2-1-2 set.

See Diagram A. X1 picks up the guard to his right and X2 gets the other
guard. X3 drops down to get the player in his/her corner and X4 gets
the opposite corner. X5 has the middle.

Rule 2. X5 plays O5 man-to-man at all times, while the other four

defenders rotate around X5.
So if O5 goes down to the low post, X5 goes with him and plays him
man-to-man. The other four defenders will rotate around X5.

119
Rule 3. If O5 steps outside, X5 has him/her man-to-man.
See Diagram B. Again, X5 is man-to-man with O5 at all times, even if
O5 steps out on the perimeter. X5 may sag back a little inside if he/she
knows that O5 is not a good outside shooter. However, if O5 can shoot
the outside shot, then X5 must play up (on-ball) on O5.

Rule 4. Play the flash cut to the high post or elbow and high-low
post situations man-to-man.
See Diagram C. Again, X5 is man-to-man at all times. But when the
other post (O4) flashes high, X4 stays with him/her man-to-man and
tries to get a hand in the passing lane to deny the pass from the wing.

X1 drops down to help deny this pass as well. X1 faces the wing (and
ball), putting his/her right foot alongside the left foot of O4. The
important rule here is, X1 must not let O4 hook his leg, else when the
pass goes back out to O1, X1 will not be able to recover, and O1 gets
the open three-point shot.

Coach Sar says that the high-low post offense gives this defense the
most trouble. Work on this a lot in practice (against the high-low set),
and master how you are going to cover each situation that arises.

Against some teams who play a lot of hi-lo, it might be best to play both
X5 and X4 man-to-man at all times against O5 and O4... something to
consider. Also see Diagram K below.

Rule 5. When defending against the dribble, stay with your man
and switch zones (not men).
See Diagram D. O1 has the ball and dribbles right. X1 will stay with O1
and X2 now takes X1's zone on top. You switch zones, not men.

Rule 6. Switch on screens.

See Diagram E. Switch screens on the perimeter. X1 and X2 will
switch men (not zones) on the on-ball screen. X2 takes O1 and X1 gets
O2.

X2 and X1 are in the same zones as they were at the start of the
screen. They switched men, while maintaining their same zones.

Rule 7. Rules for covering shallow ball-side cuts.

See Diagram F. As the pass is made from O1 to 02, X3 moves to the
help-side line. Then when the shallow cut is made, X3 will slide over to
the ball-side corner to pick up O4.

X1 drops down and covers 03.

X4 rotates out and picks up the shallow cutter 01.

Notice how X1, X3 and X4 all rotate to the ball clockwise around X5.

120
Rule 7. Rules for covering shallow ball-side cuts (continued).
Optional man-to-man coverage.
See Diagram G. You could also decide to play this cut man-to-man with
X1 staying with O1.

Whatever way you decide to play it, practice it and make sure your
players all understand their assignments.X4 all rotate to the ball
clockwise around X5.

Rule 8. Rules for covering deep ball-side cuts.

Diagram H shows a deep ball-side cut. As the pass is made from O1 to
02, X3 jumps to the help-side line.

X1 drops down with the cutter O1. Since X3 is already in help-side

position, X3 will then take the cutter O1 all the way to the opposite
corner.

X1 will slide over and get O3. X4 moves out with O4.

Once again, as with defending the shallow ball-side cut, X1, X3 and X4
rotate around X5 to the ball.

Optional man-to-man coverage.

See Diagram I. You could also decide to play this cut man-to-man with
X1 staying with O1.

Whatever way you decide to play it, practice it and make sure your
players all understand their assignments.

See Diagram J. Here's a situation with both posts low (a 3-out, 2-in set).
The weak-side wing makes a cut to the ball-side corner to create an
overload.

Here, X2 follows O2 down and then X4 picks up O2 and stays with

him/her to the corner.

X2 gets O4.

Remember X5 is man-to-man with O5 at all times.

121
See Diagram K. Here's a similar situation with a deep ball-side cut
except that first, O4 flashes to the high post or elbow. You recall from
Rule 4 above that the flash cut is covered man-to-man, so X4 moves up
to the high post with O4.

Now if the weak-side wing (O2) cuts to the ball-side corner, X2 will have
to play this man-to-man to the corner, since X4 is occupied playing O4,
and X5 never leaves O5 (always man-to-man).

Rule 9. Rules for covering weak-side cuts.

See Diagram L. A weak-side cut is non-threatening, being away from
the ball. The baseline defender (X4) will pick up this cutter (O2).

X2 will initially stay with and bump the cutter and then flare out and pick
up O4.

Rule 10. Play the baseline cut man-to-man.

See Diagram M. Baseline cuts on ball reversal must be played man-to-
man.

As the ball is reversed from O2 to O1 to O3, O5 cuts to the high post

and O4 runs the baseline to the ball-side corner. You can see that X4
MUST cover O4 all the way to the corner man-to-man, as there is no-
one else to cover O4 (remember that X5 is always man-to-man on O5).

A final note...
However you decide to play these situations, make sure you practice all of these scenarios so
that your players understand their assignments. Remember your goals: pressure the ball at
all times, front the low post, deny the passing lanes, bump the cutters, and give help on inside
penetration.

Be sure to view the animation on the web-site to better appreciate how these cuts are handled.

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

122
 2-2-1 Half Court Press
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This half-court trapping press can be especially effective against teams with mediocre,
inexperienced guards. Remember that any trapping defense always carries some risk of giving
up the easy weak-side lay-up.

Set up as in Diagram A. Two defenders are at the half court line (#1 and #2). #3 and #4 are
positioned near the three-point arc. #5 is positioned in the middle near the free throw line. We
like to have someone at this position at all times to cut off the center pass.

Our guards (#1 and #2) will meet the ball carrier at half-court and try to force him to move to
one side (away from the middle). As the ball moves to the side, the defenders shift also toward
that side (see Diagram A). In this example, the ball is being dribbled toward the right sideline. In
this case, #4 will come up and will stop the sideline penetration, with #1 completing the trap. #2
has dropped down toward the three-point line and #5 move out a little toward the corner, and
#3 moves to the middle (see Diagram B). Notice that we still have a 2-2-1 configuration at this
point.

#2 and #5 try to position themselves in the gap between two offensive players, and are
concentrating on the pass interception. #3 moves in front of any offensive player that moves
into the center at the free throw line, and denies that pass.

See diagram C. If the ball is passed across court to the opposite sideline, #2 and #3 should
create the trap, with #1 moving to the top of the three-point arc (#2's former position), #5
moving to the ball-side, and #4 moving quickly to the middle (#3's previous position).

If the ball is passed into the corner (Diagram D), #5 will move out to cover it, while #4 will move
to the ball-side low block. At this point, I would move into a standard zone defense, such as a
1-2-2 (see 1-2-2 Zone). You can continue trapping using this zone defense, as outlined on that
page.

123
Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

124
Defending a team with a “star” player, “Junk” Defenses
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Defending a team with superior talent or a star player is always a challenge. There are a
variety of “junk” defenses that can be tried in this situation, or a coach may simply choose to
make some adjustments in his usual man-to-man or zone defenses. What- ever the situation,
through good scouting, know what your opponent likes to do on offense and try to neutralize or
take that away from them. Go for the heart…the heart of their offense, whether this is their fast
break/secondary break, or a good low-post game, or good outside shooting. You probably
won’t completely stop them, but if you can make them work harder, or go to a second or third
option, you have a better chance.

No matter what kind of defense you play, make the “star” player work hard, and not only for his
shots on offense, but also make him play defense. Don’t let him rest on the defensive end.
Take the ball at him and force him to play defense, and expose him to picking up some early
fouls. If they try to protect him by using a zone defense against you, put your better shooters
on his side of the floor, and try to get most of your shots in his “zone”. If they play man-to-man,
find out which one of your players he is guarding. As soon as the opponent shoots the ball,
send this player down court on the quick breakaway. This may cause the “star” to drop back
on defense, and not pursue the offensive rebound, and may be a constant worry to him,
perhaps affecting his offensive play.

If it is your style, and not his, fast break every opportunity to tire the star, and make him less of
a factor than he is in a “half-court” game.

On defense, know the “star’s” tendencies. With a perimeter player who likes to drive to the
hoop, or who is very quick, have your defender drop back an extra step. If he prefers going
right, overplay him and force him left. If his main forte is outside shooting, deny and stay up
tight on him. A low post player who likes the baseline drop step, take that away and force him
to the lane.

Man-to-man defensive adjustments against a “star” player

As coach, if you have confidence in your team’s man-to-man defensive ability and quickness,
you might just consider some adjustments in your man defense. First, explain to the rest of the
team, that the person who has the assignment of guarding the “star” will not be able to help out
on team defense, as he must stay with the star at all times. Through good scouting, find out
which of their offensive players is not a real scoring threat (usually not all five players are good
shooters). Your player guarding this non-scorer can be positioned on the court to give help and
double-team the star... I’ll call this player the “helper”.

Situations:
1. The “star” is the point guard.
Try to take him out of triple-threat position by forcing him to dribble. Try to keep him from
penetrating. Have your “helper” set up at the top of the key, three-point arc area. By playing
here, he will be able to help double team the star, or pick him up if he gets by your main
defender. Also, try to confuse him…trap him the first couple times down the floor, then back off
and don’t show the trap for a few minutes, and then do it again. Keep him off-balance. After
trapping and forcing him to give up the ball, deny the pass back to him.

2. The “star” is a wing-forward player.

Try to deny him the ball. Stay between him and the ball (“on the line” --- see “Basic Defense”).
Force him to back-cut into traffic, where your low post defenders can help out.

125
 3. The “star” is a low post player.
(1) Box-out and keep him off the offensive boards.
(2) Deny the pass to him. There are several components to this. The low post
defender can three-quarter front him to keep the pass out. Your “helper” can front him.
Your perimeter defenders must harass and guard the perimeter tightly to prevent the
easy pass into the post. They must move their arms and feet and try to block the
passing lanes.
(3) One strategy is this: overplay his
baseline so he cannot drop-step to
the baseline. Force him to the lane,
where your opposite wing defender
will double team him. With this
strategy, assuming the opponent’s
outside shooters are only average, I
tell our wing defenders that when the
ball is in the opposite low post, to
drop down into the lane to help
double team the star in the lane. If
the star is able to recognize this, and
is willing to make the pass off to the
opposite wing, and if that wing
player is able to make the shot
consistently, we may have to change
this strategy… but that’s three “ifs”!

Junk Defenses
First, several points about “junk defenses”.
1. If your team is better than the other team, there is no need to use a junk defense. Just play
your good man-to-man, or your good zone.
2. Do not base your entire season’s defensive plan on junk defenses.
3. If you use a junk defense, use it as a diversion, or something to confuse the enemy.
4. If you use a junk defense, realize it is a gamble, can often be easily beaten, and you must
be willing to drop it quickly.

“Box and 1”
This defense uses four defenders playing
zone defense in the standard “box” set-up.
Two defenders are on the low blocks, and
two are up at the elbows. The fifth defender
plays man-to-man defense against the star
player. This defense may work best against
a team with a good point-guard or perimeter
player.

126
 “1-3 and a chaser”
Again, this defense will probably work best
against a team with one exceptional
perimeter player. In this case, three
defenders play across the low blocks as
they would in a 2-3 zone defense. The two
low block defenders have corner and wing
responsibilities. The “1” is set in the middle
at the free-throw line, and is probably one
of your quickest, best defenders. He has to
cover from elbow to elbow above the free
throw line, and try to contest the outside
shot. Your best defender is the “chaser”
who plays their “star” man-to-man.

Good outside shooting teams can quickly rip apart this defense, but if the shots aren’t falling,
this can be an effective defense. Opponents will usually counteract this by using a two-guard
front in order to split the defender out front. If this happens, you can change to the “box and 1”
(above).

“3-1 and a chaser”

This defense can work well against a team
with a good point guard, but only average
low post play. It is essentially like a 1-3-1
zone defense, except that the chaser out
front plays the point guard man-to- man,
and the other four defenders play a 3-1
zone. This defense enables you to play the
star point guard man-to-man, and still allows
you to put pressure on the wing shooters
and the high post. The low post is its
weakness.

This is about the opposite of the "1-3 and a chaser" (above). Both can be used against a star
point guard. You would consider using the "1-3 and a chaser" against the team with weak
outside shooting and stronger inside post play. Use the "3-1 and a chaser" against the team
with the star point guard and good outside shooting, but only average low post play. You can
also consider alternating between these defenses. If you are in the "1-3 and a chaser" and they
start hitting the outside shot, change to the "3-1 and a chaser".

127
"Diamond and 1"
This defense would work best against a team whose star is an all around good athlete who not
only plays the wings and corners, but will also go inside. Again, your chaser is your best
defender, and plays man-to-man against this star player.
The other four defenders are set up in a
diamond formation and play this as a
zone. The diamond consists of a
defender at the point, two wing
defenders and a low post, middle
defender. This defense is weak in the
high post area and corners. If you are
getting burned in the high post, or the
star goes out and plays the point,
consider switching to the "3-1 and a
chaser" (above).

“Triangle and 2”
You can try this defense against a team
with two excellent scorers and three
average players. Two defenders play
man-to-man against the two scorers.
These may not necessarily be your
best defenders, but quickness helps.
The other three defenders play zone.
Two play on the low blocks and have
corner responsibilities too. Your very
best, quickest, hardest-working
defender plays the middle position
starting at the free-throw line. He must
cover the free-throw line area and
above. He must also cover the ball-side
low block when the ball goes into the
corner.

If the offense splits the middle defender

with a two-guard front, then one of your
low block players moves up to the free-
throw line, and now you have an
"inverted" triangle with two players at
the elbows and one low in the lane.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

128
 Two Half-Court Defensive Strategies
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Deny the Wing Pass?

I sometimes hear coaches discussing which is a better defensive strategy, to allow or to deny
the pass from the point guard to the wing.

Some believe the wing defenders should play "on the line" (see Basic Defense) and prevent
the pass to the wing player. By denying the pass to the wing, you may be preventing one of
their better shooters from getting the ball. Also, since the entry pass to the low post most often
comes from the wing, you are making it more difficult for the offense to get the ball into the low
post by contesting two passes (the point to wing pass, and the wing to low post pass). The
disadvantages of this strategy include (1) the wing defender getting beat by the back-cut, and
(2) dribble penetration up the lane by point guard who can shoot or dish off to the low post.

On the other hand, some coaches want to get the ball out of the point guard's hands and allow
the pass to the wing uncontested, but then deny the pass back to the point guard. This
philosophy has the ball getting into the hands of players who may not be as skilled ball-
handlers as the point guard. This helps stop the point guard from being a big factor, but may
allow easier access to the low post.

So which philosophy is best?

As is often the case in this game, I think you have to be flexible and adapt your strategy
according to the team you are playing.

If your opponent has strong wing shooters, or likes to get the ball into the low post from the
wing pass, then try to take this away from them by denying the wing pass.

If the opponent's strength is their excellent point guard who like to dribble penetrate, then
pressure the point guard and get him to pass off to the wing. Then aggressively deny the pass
back to the point and keep the ball out of his hands.

Double Teaming the Low Post

There are various ways to try to stop the low post star player. You could go zone (2-1-2 or 2-3)
and pack the paint to make it difficult for him. Or you can use your man-to-man defense and
double team him as discussed below. No matter what strategy, keep him off the offensive
glass by boxing him out on every shot.

First, you may want to deny the point to wing pass as discussed above. This stops the first
pass.

Then try to deny the second pass (wing to low post pass) by having your low post defender
"three quarter" front him with a hand in front. If the post player receives the ball, his defender
should prevent the move to the baseline, as I believe this is the easier, more natural move for
most post players. So first take the drop step to the baseline away from him, and force him
toward the lane. Then double team him with your weak-side guard, who prevents the move
into the lane.

In this situation, when the ball is in the low post, your weak-side guard slides down quickly to
prevent the move to the lane. This should not be difficult for the weak-side wing defender as
he should already be backed down to the weak-side elbow in "help-side" position when the ball
is on the wing and his man is two passes away from the ball. As soon as he sees the pass go
into the low post, he should slide down and double team the post player from the lane side. I

129
think this is a better strategy than double teaming with your weak-side low post defender, as
this opens up the opposite offensive post player for a dish and open lay-up. Whereas, when
the double team comes from the weak-side wing, the low post player may be forced to pass
back out to the perimeter to the opposite wing. If the opposite side wing player is an excellent
outside shooter, you may have to double team with the low post instead.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

130
 Defense for the Last Few Seconds of the Game
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

There’s only a few seconds left in the game and you are up 1 or 2 points. You could either play
man-to-man, or use one of the zones below. Use your tallest players to prevent the long pass
and pressure the in-bounder. Use your quickest players on the sidelines and wing areas.

Rule: No fouls, unless you have a foul “to give”. Certainly no shooting fouls.

If the ball comes up the sideline, rather than batting it out-of-bounds, try to keep it in play so
that the clock keeps running. If you must “bat” the ball, bat it into the back-court.

Diagram A shows a zone defense against the full-court long pass.

Diagram B shows a zone against the half court throw-in. In this situation, #4 and 5 protect
against the long pass to the paint. #2 prevents the pass up the sideline for the corner three-
pointer. #1 must cover the 3-point arc including the top of the circle and the weak-side, being
wary of any weak-side pass (a skip pass to the left side of the 3-point arc).

Of course, if the opponent is down three points, put all four defenders on the three-point arc
and give them the two pointer.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

131
 Transition Defense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

"Transition" refers to the process of changing from defense to offense (transition offense), or
offense to defense (transition defense). Transition defense can be as simple as having one
guard protecting back after a score, rebound or steal, with the rest of the team hustling back on
defense. Or, if the opponent is a fast-breaking team, it may require two guards (see below).
Or transition defense may employ a full court pressing defense, which can be simple full-court
man-to-man pressure, or one of various zone presses.

Preventing the fast break

Our goal is to prevent the opponent from scoring easy lay-ups on the break.

When your team shoots, at least one guard should not attack the offensive board, and should
remain "back" beyond the three-point lane, in the center of the floor. This should be assigned
to a certain player and be his responsibility. When a substitute comes in for him, the sub must
know that this is now his responsibility. If this player drives to the hoop, there must be
communication and understanding that a second guard will now have this responsibility. If this
fundamental is not kept, the opponent will get easy transition, fast-break lay-ups. As the guard
retreats to stop the break, his teammates must hustle down quickly to defend. Players who fail
to sprint back on defense usually find themselves on the bench. There is no excuse for not
hustling and sprinting back on defense, unless it is fatigue and you need a rest.

Two-guards back
Some teams are very proficient at the fast-
break, and break every time they get the ball.
To stop this team, try this defensive approach
(diagram A). Assign two guards to stay back on
defense. When the shot goes up, the three "big-
men" crash the offensive boards, while two
guards retreat to the mid-court line, one on each
side of the center circle. The guard on the ball-
side will pick up the dribbler and try to stop the
ball. The other guard retreats back to the
opponent's paint area to prevent the lay-up. If
the opponent gets the rebound, one of our re-
bounders should try to "jam" and pressure the
re-bounder in order to prevent, or slow down,
the outlet pass. The other two players should
sprint back on defense.

Defending the paint area.

Again, we want to prevent the easy lay-up. All players should sprint back on defense and run
straight to the paint area to protect the basket. One player should stop the ball, to avoid dribble
penetration. Once the fast break is stopped and the "big-men" are back in defensive position,
then the defenders can move out of the paint to pick up their man assignment, or zone position.

If the opponent is successful in running a fast-break, your "prevent" guard may find himself in a
2-on-1, or 3-on-1 situation, he being the only defender. In this situation, the prevent man
should be taught to first prevent the lay-up. If the opponent chooses to shoot the outside
jumper, give it to them, as it is a lower percentage shot than the lay-up, you avoid getting a foul,
132
and you may get the rebound, or delay the offense long enough for your teammates to arrive
on defense. Often I see high school players make the mistake of coming up away from the
basket and challenging the ball, only to get beaten by an easy pass to another player under the
basket for a lay-up. Again, the defender must stay back and "gap" the offensive players, that
is, try to straddle and cut off the passing lanes to the easy lay-up.

With the above strategy, team hustle and understanding of transition defensive assignments,
you can go a long way in stopping, or slowing down the fast-break.

Full-Court Press Defense

Transition defense can be even more sophisticated with full-court pressing defense. First, the
disadvantages of a press defense are that is takes a lot of practice time to develop a good,
cohesive press. Also, remember that the full-court press is a gamble (especially trapping zone
defenses). You risk giving up the easy transition lay-up. Good offensive teams with good ball
handlers and passers can break the press and turn it into their advantage with an easy score.
If you press the entire game, your players may become fatigued, may get into foul trouble, and
the offense often "figures it out" with time. So you might want to press only in certain situations
(e.g. after a made basket), or certain times of the game. You may want to use the press as a
"surprise" tactic.

The advantages are that it can quickly produce back-court turnovers, and easy steals and
scores for your team. So it is an offensive weapon as such, and a way to come from behind, or
a way to break open a close game. The press keeps the opponent off-balance, changes the
tempo of the game, and often has the opponent doing things they don't normally like to do. It
often forces the opposing coach to use valuable time-outs. It favors a well-conditioned team
with a deep bench, and with more substitutions, allows more of your players to get playing time.
There is a saying, "To error is human, and pressure causes error."

Some basic principles apply to all presses.

1. Always have one player back in prevent mode to prevent the easy lay-up.

2. Sprint back to the paint when you are beaten.

3. When trapping, or trying to stop the dribbler, don't reach in! Rather, you must move your
feet to get into position and deny the sideline. The referee is watching closely for the reach-
in foul. Back- court fouls are usually "stupid" fouls, created when the opponent was not
even in position to score. It's especially "stupid" if the opponent is in the two-shot bonus, or
if it is committed with only seconds remaining in a period.

Trapping
In trapping, one defender should first stop the dribbler, often along the sideline or baseline, or
in one of the "trapping zones" (see below). Trapping zones are those areas where the
offensive player definitely does not want to get caught losing his dribble. It's like getting caught
in a corner.

Once the ball is stopped, the second defender sprints over and double-teams the ball carrier.
They cut off the ball-handler's view, and get into his passing lane. The position of their hands
should be at the same height as the ball. If the offensive player holds the ball high to "throw
over the top", the hands should be high. If the ball is low, the hands should be low to prevent
the bounce pass. Do not reach in! This only transforms a good situation into a bad one (now
the player goes to the free throw line). Instead, the trapping players should deny the player
from getting the pass off and get the 5-second call, or force him to make a bad pass, which is
intercepted by one of your teammates.

133
Gapping (zone press)
The other defenders who are not actively trapping, try to get into the gaps between the ball-
handler and his teammates. They play the passing lanes and deny and intercept passes from
the trapped player.

The yellow zones catch the player in

the corner.

The red zones are excellent trapping

zones, since the offensive player
cannot retreat across the 10 second
line.

The blue zones are good trapping

zones because the offense has to
worry about the 10-second count.

Types of full court presses

Often a pressing team will use more than one type of press. As the offense calls a time-out
and makes adjustments to your press, you can change to another type of press. Or you can
make simple adjustments of your own, such as whether to guard the in-bounds passer or not,
whether to deny the in-bounds pass with full-denial defense, or allow the in-bounds pass in the
corner, and then go trap it.

There are many type of presses. I will discuss a few below. Please check these links to view
that specific press.
Man-to-Man Press
Full-Court Pressure Defense

Zone Presses
2-2-1 Zone Press
2Up Zone Press and 2-2-1 Deny Press
3-1-1 Zone Press

Drills:
Rebound-Outlet-Break Drill, 4 on 4 Transition Drill, Piston Drill

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

134
 Full-Court Pressure Defense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Before reading this page, read “Transition Defense”.

The full-court pressure defense is a man-to-man full-court defense. Instead of using the
phrase, "we are going to press this team", I tell the kids "we are going to pressure this team.".
A full-court press often implies trapping, gambling. With the "pressure defense", we do not
gamble and trap much. Remember that a zone press that emphasizes trapping is always a
gamble. A good offense with quick, experienced guards can break through and score easy lay-
ups. Pressure defense is not a gambling defense. It applies full-court pressure to the ball,
while still protecting against the easy lay-up. It basically is the same as half-court man-to-man
defense, but extended to the entire court. The defender "on-ball" picks his man up tightly,
moves his feet and stays between him and the basket. The defenders who are on the ball-
side, play "denial" and stay in the passing lanes between the ball and their man. The other
defenders, who are opposite the ball-side, play "help-side", and help protect the basket against
the easy lay-up. So, what it looks like is the "on ball", and ball-side defenders playing a typical
man defense, but the opposite side looks like a zone back in the paint. There is a saying, "A
good man-to-man looks like a zone, and a good zone looks like a man." This is very true of this
defense.

All defenders must see the ball at all times. They should try to be in position to see both the
ball and their man.

There is one difference using this full-court man, as opposed to the half-court man, and that is
this. If the ball breaks through the perimeter, or gets up the floor ahead of any defender, all
defenders except the "on-ball" defender, must sprint back to the paint to prevent the lay-up.
The "on-ball" defender tries to stay with the ball.

There are two ways of starting the pressure in transition. First, after a made basket or ball out-
of-bounds, have each defender get on his assigned man. Second, after a rebound, steal, or
turnover in transition, have each defender just pick up the man closest to him, rather than trying
to run and find his pre-assigned man. Any mismatches that occur are usually outweighed by
getting the pressure started immediately, and stopping the fast-break. If the offense advances
into half-court, players can "switch" at opportune moments when they are back in half-court.

Trapping, while not the primary consideration, is not completely excluded. If the offensive man
bringing the ball up is caught along the sideline, or in one of the trapping areas (see below), a
second defender can run over to his blind-side and trap him, hoping to create a turnover. But
do not reach-in and get the foul! The other defenders then should be ready to intercept.

This full-court man defense will require the defenders to switch when they are screened.
These switches must be called out loudly and happen immediately, so that the ball does not get
by them. Again, any mismatches, can be switched back later in the half-court if necessary, or
your team can optionally drop back into a zone defense in the half-court.

Remember, good "pressure defense" is not a gambling one, but one that extends the pressure
over the entire floor, while still protecting the paint. This steady, relentless pressure over the
course of the game will harass and tire the opponent, and will cause the offense to make bad
passes, and other turnovers that they would never make if they were just allowed to dribble up
the floor slowly and uncontested. "It is human to err, and pressure causes error."

Check this page in regard to the concepts of "on-ball", "denial", and "help-side":

135
 “Basic Defense”.

Check this page for a full-court man-to-man defensive drill: “Z-Drill”.

The yellow zones catch the player in

the corner.

The red zones are excellent trapping

zones, since the offensive player
cannot retreat across the 10 second
line.

The blue zones are good trapping

zones because the offense has to
worry about the 10-second count.

“41 Deny”
Use this man-to-man press to deny the inbounds pass.
You are going for the 5-second count, or an interception
of a poorly made pass from the in-bounder. With this
press, the defender whose assigned person is the in-
bounder gets back to at least half-court or beyond as the
“safety” against the long pass and lay-up. The other four
defenders immediately locate their man and deny the
pass from the in-bounder by playing the passing lanes
and staying between their man and the ball. These four
defenders should not worry about the long pass over their
heads, as the “safety” is back to stop that.

Copyright James A. Gels, 2001, all rights reserved.

136
 2-2-1 Zone Press
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Before proceeding with this page, read “Transition Defense”, on full court defense.

Set up the 2-2-1 zone press like this (see Diagram A). Have two players set at both ends of the
free throw line. Two other defenders should be positioned just inside the half-court line, and
the fifth player plays "prevent".

The in-bounds pass is not contested or guarded. Do not allow a pass in the middle of the floor.
They defenders #1and #2 should allow the pass to a receiver near the corner. They should
wait until he commits himself and starts dribbling. Once he starts his dribble, they should
attack and trap him near the sideline (Diagram B). The other two defenders then position
themselves in the passing lanes to other would-be receivers and look for the interception. The
#5 defender should only come up if he has a clear-cut interception. At this point the defense
looks like a "trap-2-1" zone.

If the ball gets part way up the sideline, the mid-court defender (#3 or #4) should stop the
penetration along the sideline, and trap the ball-handler along with the guard from that side (#1
or #2). Now the opposite guard and mid-court defenders play the zone passing lanes (see
Diagram C).

Allow a backward, retreating pass, as the 10-second rule is in your favor. If the ball moves to
the opposite side, the traps and zones are set on that side the same as described above, only
with the opposite defenders positioned as above. The defenders should never let the ball get
ahead of them on the court. If that happens, they must sprint down-court quickly to recover.
Once the press is broken, or the offense crosses mid-court, all defenders not on the ball should
sprint back to the paint to protect basket (unless there is an easy trap in the sideline, mid-court
line corner). The on-ball defender should stay on the ball and stop dribble penetration.

There are variations and adjustments to this basic zone, depending on how the offense uses their
point guard... i.e. whether he tries to receive the in-bounds pass, or make the in-bounds pass and
137
then receive the ball right back. See “2-2-1 Zone Defense Variations.”
 2-2-1 Zone Press Variations
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This page shows a couple of variations on the 2-2-1 zone press. Before reading this page, first
see the pages on “Transition Defense” and the description of the basic “2-2-1 zone press”.

2-Up Zone Press

The "Two-up" zone press is used against teams who have their
best ball-handler make the in-bounds pass, and then step in-
bounds and receive the pass right back. We want to keep the
ball out of the hands of the best ball-handler, and have
someone bring it up who is not comfortable in that role, thereby
increasing the chance of a turnover.

See Diagram A.
In this case, the #2 defender will deny the pass back to the in-
bounder, and will play him man-to-man, in full denial. The other
four defenders essentially play a zone.

#3 will prevent the sideline pass, and #4 prevents the middle

pass.

The weak side of the court is open and #5 might be able to

anticipate a long cross-court pass there, or a long down-court
pass. Long passes are often thrown out-of-bounds, or are
intercepted. But again remember, all zone presses have an
element of risk, and are a gamble.

2-2-1 "Deny" Defense

With this full-court press, we try to deny the in-bounds pass and get the 5-second call. This can
be used against a team that tries to make the in-bounds pass to their best ball-handler.

See Diagram B.
In this defense, don't guard the passer. Instead, place your #5 man
back in "prevent", to protect against the long pass and lay-up. The
other four defenders match up with the other four offensive players
and play full denial, trying to prevent the in-bounds pass. Until the
ball is passed in-bounds, you have a 5 on 4 situation, with five
defenders and only four offensive receivers.

The offense may try to screen to get a man open. Be ready for the
quick switch, or fight through.

The offense may try to run their #4 and #5 man toward the passer
for a quick pass. Defenders 3 and 4 must stay between them and
the passer to deny this pass. Often defenders 3 and 4 are worried
about getting beat by the long pass over their heads, but defender
5 should be back to cover the long pass. This is the advantage of
not guarding the passer, but rather having your #5 man protect
against the long pass.

138
 3-1-1 Zone Press
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Before reading this page, first see the page on “Transition Defense”. Read the information on
full court defense.

The 3-1-1 zone press features three defenders across the free throw line area, one just beyond
the 3-point line in the center, and one down-court in "prevent" (see Diagram A).

There are two ways of playing the in-bounds pass. In the first method, the in-bounds pass is
not contested, but allowed to an offensive player near the corner (try to deny a center pass).
The middle and outside defender on the ball-side immediately trap the ball-handler, while the
other three defenders cover the gaps between the other four offensive players, trying to deny or
intercept the pass (see Diagram B). In covering the gaps, the defenders should stagger, or
position themselves halfway between two passing lanes. They should watch the ball-hander's
movements and eyes in order to anticipate where the pass will go. Once they see the
commitment in the passer, they should quickly move into that passing lane and get the
interception.

A second method has one of the three front line defenders guard the passer, and then stay with
the passer after the in-bounds pass has been made. This is to prevent the pass back to the
offensive player who in-bounded the ball. The other two front line defenders trap the ball, and
the other two defenders play the gaps between the offensive players.
`
The defenders must stay ahead of the ball. If the ball gets ahead of any defender, he must
sprint back immediately to stay between the ball and the basket. If the press gets beaten, all
defenders must sprint back to the paint and protect the basket. Once the break is stopped,
they can fan out into their zone or man-to-man assignments.

Playing the gaps.

Diagram B. Triangles
are defense players.

There are 4 passing

lanes to the offensive
players. The 3
defenders not involved in
the trap (#3, #4 and #5),
stagger themselves
between those lanes,
and look for the
interception.

139
Adjustment:
Diagram C.
If the offense is successful in passing up the
sidelines (on either side of the #4 defender), then
adjust your zone defense to a 3-2 zone, bringing
the #5 defender up, and have #4 and #5 play just
inside the mid-court area. This of course is more of
a gamble, because no defender is back in
"prevent". All defenders must really hustle back
any time the press is broken.

140
 "1-2-1-1 Zone Press – Diamond Press"
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The 1-2-1-1 zone press pressures the in-bounds passer, and attempts to trap the first pass
receiver. You can call either "one fist" or "two fist" options from the bench to change your
strategy a little, and confuse the opponent.

With one-fist and two-fist, always try to deny a center in-bounds pass... make them pass to a
player in the corner, or off to the side.
When the offensive player is trapped in the corner, or
along the sideline, make sure the first defender to get
there, seals off the sideline, so the offensive player
cannot dribble up the sideline. The other defenders must
play in the gaps between the passing lanes, and try to
deny or intercept the pass.

"One-Fist"
#4 and #1 (or #3) immediately trap the first pass.

"Two Fist"
#4 and #1 (or #3) wait until the first pass receiver puts the
ball on the floor and starts her dribble, and then quickly
close in and trap her. In this situation, you are waiting for
the pass receiver to first commit herself with the dribble.
Once you trap her, she has lost her option to dribble.

"Side Fist"
You can also call "side fist" to signal your players to trap
the ball handler along the sideline, either in the back-
court, or the front-court.

Adjustment, changing to a 1-2-2 zone press.

The 1-2-1-1 diamond press is vulnerable up the sidelines.
If the opponent is beating your press up the sidelines,
then you can adjust your defense to a 1-2-2 zone press.
#2 and #5 stop the sideline passing and dribble
penetration. Of course, this press is a gamble and
makes you more susceptible to getting beat long for a
lay-up. Have a rule that if one offensive player goes long,
then the mid-court weak-side defender (opposite the ball)
will move back to prevent the long pass. For example, if
the ball is on the left side (#1's side), or in the center, and
a player goes long, then #5 should drop back. If the ball
is on the right side (#3's side), then #2 drops back.

141
Some basic principles apply to all presses.
1. Always have one player back in prevent mode to prevent the easy lay-up.

2. Sprint back to the paint when you are beaten.

3. When trapping, or trying to stop the dribbler, don't reach in! Rather, you must move your
feet to get into position and deny the sideline. The referee is watching closely for the reach-in
foul. Back-court fouls are usually "stupid" fouls, created when the opponent was not even in
position to score. It's especially "stupid" if the opponent is in the two-shot bonus, or if it is
committed with only seconds remaining in a period.

4. Trapping
In trapping, one defender should first stop the dribbler, often along the sideline or baseline, or
in one of the "trapping zones" (see below). Trapping zones are those areas where the
offensive player definitely does not want to get caught losing her dribble. It's like getting caught
in a corner.

Once the ball is stopped, the second defender sprints over and double-teams the ball carrier.
They cut off the ball-handler's view, and get into her passing lane. The position of their hands
should be at the same height as the ball. If the offensive player holds the ball high to "throw
over the top", the hands should be high. If the ball is low, the hands should be low to prevent
the bounce pass. Do not reach in! This only transforms a good situation into a bad one (now
the player goes to the free throw line). Instead, the trapping players should deny the player
from getting the pass off and get the 5-second call, or try to tip the pass, or force her to make a
bad pass, which is intercepted by one of your teammates.

5. Gapping (zone press)

The other defenders who are not actively trapping, try to get into the gaps between the ball-
handler and his teammates. They play the passing lanes and deny and intercept passes from
the trapped player.

6. If the opponent is successful in running a fast-break, your "prevent" guard may find herself
in a 2-on-1, or 3-on-1 situation, she being the only defender back. In this situation, the prevent
defender should be taught to first prevent the lay-up. If the opponent chooses to shoot the
outside jumper, give it to her, as it is a lower percentage shot than the lay-up, you avoid getting
a foul, and you may get the rebound, or delay the offense long enough for your teammates to
arrive on defense. Often I see high school players make the mistake of coming up away from
the basket and challenging the ball, only to get beaten by an easy pass to another player under
the basket for a lay-up. Again, the defender must stay back and "gap" the offensive players,
that is, try to straddle and cut off the passing lanes to the easy lay-up.

The yellow zones catch the player in

the corner.

The red zones are excellent trapping

zones, since the offensive player
cannot retreat across the 10 second
line.

The blue zones are good trapping

zones because the offense has to
worry about the 10-second count.

142
 Coach Sar’s 1-2-2 Presses
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by: Coach Ken Sartini (aka "Coach Sar"), Arlington Hts, IL.

This 1-2-2 zone press is an easy press to teach, and is a fairly safe press to run with some
"back" coverage to prevent the lay-up. There are several variations of this press. With each of
these variations, X1, X2 and X3 work together as a unit, while X4 and X5 work together as your
"back" unit. As with most other presses, always try to keep the ball out of the middle of the
floor.

"80" is an aggressive 3/4 court press with trapping in the back-court.

"70" is a "safe" press with just mild pressure designed to control the tempo and burn some
clock.
"76" looks like "70" with mild pressure, but then an aggressive trap is made once the ball is
across the half-court line, in the corners.

"80"
This is the aggressive 3/4 court trapping press. We always want to keep the ball out of the
middle and force toward the sidelines. Refer to the diagrams below.

See Diagram A. X1 has responsibility for pressuring the ball and stopping penetration back to
the middle. He/she can either attack and trap immediately, or wait until the ball-handler starts
the dribble and then attack. If you want extreme pressure (like late in the game), go straight
man-to-man.

X2 and X3 have sideline and middle responsibility, preventing dribble-penetration up the

sideline and closing the trap with X1. If the ball is along the right sideline, X2 and X1 trap while
X3 prevents the pass into the middle. X4 slides up to the ballside half-court line to prevent the
pass up the sideline. X5 drops back as the safety in the middle, deep to prevent the long
diagonal pass. A teaching point... teach X4 and X5 to keep their butts toward the middle of the
floor to get to the sideline for steals and deflections.

143
Ball Reversal
See Diagram B. If the ball is passed back to the inbounder, X1 slides over a little but still wants
to deny the pass back to O2. X3 waits in the middle until X2 rotates over to the middle and
then X3 slides to the right. X3 should not leave the middle until X2 is there as this could allow
the ball to get up the middle. Notice that your "back unit" has rotated also with X4 and X5
assuming a position similar to what they started with in Diagram A.

See Diagram C. As the ball is reversed to the opposite sideline, X3 now prevents the sideline
dribble penetration, X1 sprints over to trap and X2 denies the middle pass. X5 now rotates up
to the ballside sideline at half-court to prevent the pass up the sideline. X4 now drops back as
the deep, middle "safety".

Each time the ball is reversed, the defenders must give up some ground and move backward
some so that X1 will have a better angle to trap.

With "80", Coach Sar says they could usually get one good, hard trap deep and sometimes a
second trap either just before or after half-court. But usually it was 'one and done" and
everyone retreats looking for the half court trap. They ALWAYS looked for this trap no matter
what the call was.

"70"
This is a "safe" press with just mild pressure applied and no trapping. It is "safe" because there
is no real gambling, you don't give up the lay-up, and there is less chance of committing a foul.
The objective is to control the tempo, slow down the offense a little and burn some clock. The
defenders set up a little deeper than in "80" (see Diagram D), and just "float" in front of the
offense, slowing their progression up the floor, while keeping the ball in front of them (no long
passes). If you have a very quick, aggressive point guard, allow him/her to pressure the ball all
over the court.

X1 sets up just inside the top of the key and X2 and X3 set up a little farther outside the arc.
X4 and X5 drop back a little as well.

Anytime you utilize this press, you can still look for the half court trap as in "76" below. When a
team thinks that you are just controlling tempo, the trap seems to work well.

"76"
This variation starts out like "70" with just mild pressure. We try to lull them to sleep, while
gently steering them and inviting them to cross half-court along the sideline (see the red blocks
in Diagram E). Once the ball crosses half-court, we aggressively trap in that corner, red block
area. You could set the trap with X1 and either X2 or X3 (depending on which side of the floor)
and use rules similar to "80" wherein the opposite wing (X2 or X3) denies the middle pass. X2
and X3 have to "act" a little and seem dis-interested in trapping to get the ball to enter the half-
court along the sideline.

A variation is "Red 76". X1 and X2 (or X3 depending on which side of the floor the ball is on)
will trap in the red corner (Diagram F). The opposite wing (X3 or X2) will deny the pass to the
middle. We have the ballside deep player X4 move to the sideline to deny the pass up the
sideline, while X5 denies the pass to the middle. Obviously bringing X5 up from the safety
position is a gamble, opening the door for a long, diagonal pass under the basket. You
probably only want to use this option once in awhile as a surprise tactic. If you do this all the
time, you will eventually get beaten by the long pass over the top.

144
Again, always try to keep the ball out of the middle of the floor. Communication between the
defenders is vital. This is especially true between X2 and X3, and between X4 and X5. The
one in the middle must not leave too soon on ball-reversal until the other has rotated over to
deny the middle, as we always want to keep the ball out of the middle.

Coach Sar thinks his teams became more accomplished with "76" since there was less area to
cover. And sometimes the offense would throw the ball away even with just the light "70"
pressure, perhaps because they were confused and didn't know what the defense was going to
do.

There were other times they ran either "70" or "76" just to get the ball out of the hands of the
opponent's best player, and then, when that happened, they would go into a pressure man-to-
man defense and deny the ball back to the best player.

Copyright 2002-2004, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

145
 Basic Concepts of Motion Offense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

A motion offense is a flexible offense that utilizes player movement, correct floor spacing,
passing and cutting, and setting screens. Rather than running set plays (which can also be run
in the motion offense), players move within a basic set of rules. This allows for greater
flexibility than just running set plays, and will usually be effective against any kind of defense,
whether man-to-man, zone or "junk" defenses. Players can move freely to open areas on the
court. Once the basic concepts are learned, special patterns or plays can be designed by the
coach to take advantage of his team's offensive strengths.

Motion offense can be run with almost any set: 3out-2in, 1-3-1, 1-2-2, 1-4, 4out-1in, etc. For
purposes of this discussion, I will use the 3 out, 2 in set which uses 3 perimeter players and 2
post players (see diagram A).
If you have a very talented team with five
players who can play any position, then your
players can interchange or rotate into any of
the five positions. If you have two dominant
post players, or excellent perimeter players,
then you will want to rotate a little differently.
In the later case, have the two posts rotate
with each other and the three perimeter
players rotate in the three outside positions.
Always try to have your point guard bring the
ball up the floor and start the offense. Make
sure that whoever is at the #1 position when
the shot is taken, stays back to prevent the
opponent's fast break. The 3, 4, 5 positions
go for the offensive rebound and the #2
position plays half-rebound and half-prevent
Basic rules: mode.
Spacing
Players should try to stay 12 to 15 feet apart. Avoid bunching up, which can result in double-
teams, steals, interceptions, and turnovers.

Triple threat position and patience.

Perimeter players should always receive the ball in triple threat position, where the player has
the options of shooting, driving to the hoop, or passing. Perimeter players should be patient
and hold the ball for a count of two to allow the screens and cuts to develop. If he passes too
soon, the cutters don't have time to execute their cuts. The exception is when the defense is
coming to trap, then pass immediately.
Do not allow your players, after receiving a pass on the perimeter, to immediately put the ball
on the floor, bounce it once, and then lose the dribble. The player actually loses the options of
shooting and driving to the hoop, and passing may be more difficult when the defender closes
in, and the other defenders go into deny mode.

Players may dribble only:

1. To attack the basket with a drive.
2. Improve or open the passing lane.
3. Penetrate gaps in a zone defense.
4. To get out of trouble and avoid the 5-second count.
5. To exchange positions with another player. For example, if you want the ball to go to the
wing, and the defense is denying the pass, the point guard can simply dribble to the wing, and
the wing player can exchange and go to the point.

146
Player Movement
Players must not stand still. They must move with a purpose.
1. The post players can screen for each other and move up and down the lane to the low
blocks, elbows, and top of the free throw line.
2. The perimeter players can occupy the three positions shown in diagram A, and also move to
the corners. They may make front or backdoor cuts to the hoop, and V-cuts to replace
themselves (see Cutting and Faking). They screen for each other and run pick and roll moves
(see Setting Screens). They must move after making a pass.

Passing
We want to try to get the ball into the low post. A wing entry is usually the easiest way. You
can also get there by passing to a post on the free throw line, and he in turn can pass to the
low post.
Don't pass to someone standing still. These passes are more likely to be intercepted.

After passing, players must do one of these:

1. Cut to the hoop for the return pass ("give and go" play).
2. Screen away. Example: after the point guard passes to the right wing (2), he sets a screen
for the left wing (3).
3. Follow his pass and set a screen for the ball-handler (and then roll off the screen).
4. V-cut and replace himself.
5. After a cross-court "skip" pass (example from #3 to #2), slide out of the defender's (who
should be in "help" mode) line of vision and go backdoor to the hoop.

Read the defense

Situations for Perimeter players:
1. You have the ball and the defender is overplaying you up tight: give him a fake and explode
around him straight to the hoop. Don't go wide around him as this just gives him time to
recover. Make contact with his shoulder and get him on your backside. If help defense closes
in, dish to the low post where the help came from.
2. You have the ball and the defender is sagging off you: hit the outside shot.
3. You have the ball and the defender is playing good defense on you: pass to a teammate
and then execute one of the five options above (what to do after passing).
4. You are one pass away and the defense is denying the pass to you: Make a fake outside,
and then cut hard backdoor. The low post on that side should learn to read this situation also
and clear out to the opposite side, to make spacing for the backdoor cut. See Diagram B.
5. You are one pass away and the defender is sagging off you: make a V-cut inside and come
back out for the perimeter pass. See Diagram C.
6. You are one pass away, and the defender is playing good defense and you can't get free:
Set a screen either for the ball-handler or the low post.

Situations for post players:

1. Read the defensive overplay (deny) on the wing. Flash to the high post to receive the ball
and then pass to the wing going backdoor (see Diagram B2 above).

147
2. You get the ball one on one against the defense: Make a low post move and try to score or
get fouled. (see Post Moves).
3. You get the ball and are double-teamed: Pass the ball back outside, often to where the
double team came from. Going "inside-out" is a good way to get wide open three-point shots.

Post players working together:

1. If the ball-side post is being fronted: the opposite post flashes to the ball-side elbow for the
pass. Meanwhile the low post player seals the defender on his back, and the post at the elbow
passes inside to the low post for the lay-up. See Diagram D.

2. If the ball-side post defender is playing behind him: The wing should pass to the low post,
and the opposite post player should clear out to the weak-side elbow. See Diagram E.

3. If the ball-side post defender is 3/4 defending him with a hand in front: the ball-side post
should set a screen for the weak-side post, who comes to the ball for the pass and lay-up
(Diagram F). Note that if the low post defenders switch on this screen, then the low post cutter
should move out to the ball-side short corner, and the screener should seal off his defender
and come back to the ball for the lay-up. (see Diagram G).

Once your team learns and executes these concepts, you can devise your own patterns and
special plays to take advantage of your best scorers and the defense's weaknesses.
For example, if the defense is in a 1-3-1 zone, then consider using two of the perimeter players
out on top and drop the third perimeter player down in the ball-side corner (see Beating the 1-3-
1 Zone). If the defense is in a 3-2 zone, after passing to the wing, have your point guard
shallow cut to the ball-side corner to overload the zone (see Beating the 3-2 Zone). You don't
need a time-out to communicate this... just yell out "corner 1" (point guard shallow cuts to
corner) or "corner 2" (#2 slides down to the corner), or "corner 3" (#3 moves to the corner).
If they are in 1-2-2 zone, have one of your post players play up on the free throw line (yell "1
up").
If you want to try the 1-4 set, call "2-up" and both posts move up to the elbows. Of course you
can get more creative on these signal calls! (See Motion Options)

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

148
 3-2 Motion Offense Options
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

First read "Motion Offense". So you want flexibility and want to vary your offensive attack,
while maintaining the 3out-2in as your basic set. Here are some easy ways to do it.

“1 UP”
To change to a 1-3-1 set, call "1 up" and the
weak-side low post player moves to the high
post.

If the ball is on the point, #5 moves to the high

post.

"2-UP"
Want to show a 1-4 stack set, call "2 up" and
both posts move to the elbows. Now you can
run either the "high-post pick 'n roll" play, or
another 1-4 stack play.

“4-Down”
Call "4 down" to run a simple low stack play
such as this. #1 drives and tries to create his
own shot, or dishes off to a teammate.

#2 and 3 set picks for 4 and 5. #2 flares out

for a three-point option. #3 moves out on top
as prevent man on defense.

149
“3-Cross”
Want to overload a zone (in this case the right side)? Call "3-cross" to have #3 make a cut to
the hoop, and then out to the opposite corner. Now the right side of the floor is over-loaded.

“3-Corner”
The defense is showing a 1-3-1 zone and you want to go to a two-guard front. Call "3 corner" to
have your #3 slide down to his own corner, and #1 and #2 move over into a two-guard set.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

150
 3-2 Motion Offense Options, More!
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

First read "Motion Offense". Here are some simple plays to run off the 3-2 set. These do not
necessarily have to be called as set plays, but can be taught to the players as various types of
screening options to use within the general motion offensive scheme. These plays can be run
right or left.
Wing-Low Post Motion

Wing sets a down-screen for the low
post, who curls around the screen for
pass from #1. After setting the screen,
#3 can seal for the inside position and
the pass from #1, or flare out to the
short corner or wing for a pass for an
outside shot.
Low post sets a back-screen on the
same side wing defender. The wing
cuts backdoor for the pass from #1.
The low post can also seal and roll for a
pass from #1.

Post-Post Motion

Option #1: #4 sets pick for #5 who cuts off the screen for the pass from #1.
Option #2: Same play as option #1-- in this case the defenders made a "switch" and the #4
defender picks up our #5. So our #5 takes his defender out to the short corner, and meanwhile
our #4 should have inside position after screening and sealing his man, for the pass from #1
(who dribbles a little to the right to set up a better passing angle).

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

151
 3-Out, 2-In “Hi-Lo”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Here’s some simple hi-lo post motion that you can run out of the 3-out, 2-in set.

See the diagrams below. In Diagram A, the ball-side post (4) sets a screen for the opposite
post (5). If the 5 goes low around the screen to the block, then the screener (4) cuts up to the
high post area. The pass from the wing could go to either 4 or 5. If the pass goes to the high
post (4), 4 can either shoot or look down low to 5.

Now look at the diagrams below. In Diagram C, the cutter (5) cuts to the high post, so the
screener (4) goes to the low block. Again, the pass from the wing can go to either post player.

It is essential that the screener reads the situation correctly. The screener’s cut is opposite of
what the cutter does. If the cutter goes low, the screener goes high. If the cutter goes high, the
screener goes low.

One precaution: This must happen quickly in order to avoid the “3-second” violation.

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

152
 3-2 Motion Offense Plays
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

First read "Motion Offense". Here are a few set plays to run off the 3-2 motion offense.

"43"

Diagram A. #1 passes to #2. Meanwhile #5 screens for #4, who sets a screen for the opposite
wing #3. After setting the screen, #5 flashes to the high post for the pass from #2.
Diagram B. #3 cuts backdoor for the pass from #5. Optionally, #5 can shoot, drive, or pass to
#2 (now in the corner), or across to #4.

Double Curl "Michigan"

#1 passes to #2. Meanwhile #4 moves
to the opposite elbow to act as a
screener. #5 curls around #4 and looks
for pass from #2 (and clears back to his
original short corner if he doesn't get
the pass).
After #5 cuts, #3 delays and curls
around #4's screen looking for the pass
from #2 (and clears to the opposite
corner).
Then #4 delays, seals, and cuts into the
paint for the pass from #2.
This play starts with both wings in the
corner, and both posts at the elbows.
#1 passes to #3 cutting up to the wing,
and #1 cuts thru for the pass, and clears
to the opposite corner. #2 moves out to
the point.
#5 sets pick for #4 who cuts to the ball-
side block looking for the pass from #3.
#5 slides down to the weak-side block. or
optionally, can cut back to his original
elbow position for the pass from #3.

153
 3-2 Motion Offense Plays -- "Red, White and Blue"
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net
These three set plays are run off the 3-2 motion offense. First read "Motion Offense".

"Blue"

Diagram A. #1 passes to #2, who passes to

#4 in the corner.

Diagram B. #2 makes a lane cut and #4 can

pass to her for lay-up. If the pass is not there,
go to diagram C.

Diagram C. #2 goes over and sets a screen

for #5. #5 cuts to the ball-side block and gets
the pass from #4.

"Red"
This play is similar to "White" (see below) except here #1 just makes the pick for #5.

Diagram A. #1 passes to #2. #1 sprints down and sets a pick for #5.
Diagram B. #4 passes to #5 for the low post lay-up.

154
"White"
This play is similar to "Blue" except here #1 makes the lane cut.

See also: Play 23, Slip Play, Isolation, Motion Options, Motion Options - More!, 3-2 Motion
Plays, 32 Reverse, Red-White & Blue, Michigan.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

155
 3-2 “Reverse”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Do you have a good post player who can score in the low block, but he/she is not getting the
ball often enough. Are you having difficulty getting the pass from the point guard to the wing?
This simple play should help that also. I call this "reverse" because it is easy for the players to
remember.

Refer to Diagram A. We use the 3-out, 2-in set. But in this instance, the low posts #4 and #5
start at the wing positions and #2 and #3 start at the low blocks... just the "reverse" of their
normal positions. #4 and #5 set picks for #2 and #3, who cut off the screen hard to the wing
areas looking for the pass from #1 (it is easier to complete pass from the point to the wing
when the receivers are cutting and not stationary).

As soon as #2 and #3 cut off their screens, #4 and #5 immediately pivot and seal the defender
and get into the "post position" to receive the quick pass from the wing (Diagram B). The
passes from #1 to #2 and from #2 to #4 should be made without delay... like a "quick hitter". Of
course, you can run this on the left side too... the point guard makes the wing pass to whoever
is open for the pass. Once the post opposite the ball sees the pass going to the opposite side,
he/she can move up to the elbow to keep that defender "occupied".

Another advantage of using this "reverse" (over simply passing down into the low post) is that
often the defense will switch on the screen, and now you have your tall post player going
against a shorter guard on the low block... a possible "mismatch" for the defense.

After the two quick passes, you only need your post player to "finish". Have him/her practice
low post moves and do the low post drills in practice.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

156
 3-Out, 2-In “Options” Series
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by: Coach Jeff Farquhar, 7th & 8th Grade Boys Basketball, Metro Christian
Academy, Tulsa, Oklahoma.

The first is called "Option" because of the many options available off this play.

Diagram A. Set up in a double stack as shown. #2 breaks out to the right wing and receives
the pass from #1. #3 cuts out to the left wing. #4 posts up hard on the ball-side block. If open,
#2 can make the pass to #4 for the post move and shot (Diagram B).

Meanwhile, after making the pass, #1 cuts around #2. If #1 is able to lose his defender, #2 can
simply handoff to #1 passing by (Diagram C), or make a little delayed "dump" pass to #1 who is
cutting toward the hoop (see Diagram D). In either case, #1 dribbles the ball to the hoop for the
lay-up. You will note that #4 moved out of the low block area, up to the high post, to clear the
area for #1. #4 should be taught that if he does not receive the pass immediately from #2, he
should move to the high post.

If #1 does not receive the ball, he then moves along the baseline, receives a screen from #5,
and cuts to the weak-side corner-wing area (Diagram E). Diagrams E and F. Now the ball-side
is cleared out for a pick and roll play with #4 setting the pick for #2 and then rolling to the hoop.
#2 can drive to the hoop for the lay-up, or dump the pass off to either #4 for the lay-up, or #3 or
#1 for the outside three-pointer.

157
"Fist" Option (see the diagrams below)
After the opponent begins to "cheat" on #1 coming off the screen on the "Options" play above,
then use this play. It starts the same way with the double low stack, and once again #1 passes
to #2 on the wing, and makes the cut around #2. #4 immediately moves up to the high post
area. This time, #1 cuts around #2 and sets a screen for #5 (Diagram B). #5 receives the pass
from #2 for the lay-up (Diagram C). If #5 is not open for the pass, he clears to the short corner
area and once again, you have a pick and roll play with #4 setting the pick for #2 (Diagram D).

While #5 is making his initial cut, #3 sets a down-screen for #1. #1 pops outside to the three-
point line. #2 can drive to the hoop, or pass to #4 for the lay-up, or #1 for the three-point shot
(Diagram D).

158
 Open Post Offense, “Double-Up”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by:
Coach Ken Sartini (aka "Coach Sar"), Arlington Hts, IL.

"Double Up" is a 5-Out, open post offense used by Coach Sar with his Blue Demon high school
boys varsity team. This could be your primary offense, or something that you go to from time to
time during a game for various reasons.
These are the following reasons Coach Sar gives for using this offense.
1. To change the tempo of the game.
2. To give your more athletic players an opportunity for "takes" to the basket.
3. To create mis-matches on defense.
4. It's a great delay game offense.
5. It has continuity.
6. Opponents hate to play defense against this, which gives you a psychological advantage.
7. Defenses must be very disciplined or you are going to get some great scoring
opportunities.
8. It allows you to shoot 3's if the defense gets lazy and sags. It allows for great one-on-one,
or two-on-two situations. If the defense overplays, there are opportunities for back-door
moves.
9. When you are over-matched size wise, it moves the advantage to you, providing you can
handle the ball and read defenses.
10. If can be used at the end of practice for conditioning and fundamentals, both offensively
and defensively. Games up to "50", you make the rules. Click here to see the drill. It
teaches teamwork and moving without the ball.

Rules of the Double-Up offense:

1. All players are set above the free-throw line extended.
2. Save your dribble for:
a. Dribble entries
b. Possible one-on-one takes to the hoop.
c. Penetration
3. Pass fake every time you touch the ball.
4. Reverse the ball. Once you get the ball reversing, it is very difficult to cover this offense.
5. Meet all passes.
6. Keep moving.
7. Don't fight pressure.
8. Think back-door. Make all back-door cuts all the way to the rim.
9. Exchange spots whenever possible.
10. Fill the five spots.
11. Utilize back-screens.
12. V-cuts to the ball, back-cuts, L-cuts to the mid-court area. On the cut to either half-court or
back-door, you must read the defense.

The possibilities are endless... use your imagination within the rules.

Double Up vs Man-to-Man Defense

See the diagrams below. The original set is seen in Diagram A. Place your personnel however
it best suits your team. The basic two cuts seen throughout this continuity are the cut from the
top (#5 in Diagram A), and the following cut by the opposite wing (#4 in Diagram A) to the ball-
side elbow. The #5 top cut is made first, and then #5 moves to the weak-side block. After #5
makes his cut, #4 cuts to the ball-side elbow. In Diagram B, #4 could receive the pass, cut to
the hoop, or cut back out to fill the middle top position, and must read the defense here. #5
sets a back-screen for #2... this could be very effective if #4 receives the ball on the elbow, and

159
then passes back-door to #2 cutting to the hoop. Note in Diagram C that the back-cut goes all
the way to the rim, and then the cutter returns and fills the wing spot, while #5 fills the top
sideline spot. Optionally, instead of filling the wing position, #2 and #5 can run a counter move
where #2 would flash back up to the elbow, and then #5 would cut back-door (similar to what is
seen in Diagram H below). Continuity is seen in Diagram D as the ball is reversed.

Players must keep moving and make good V-cuts to receive the pass. Make good pass fakes.
Keep the ball moving. All players should look for openings and possible takes to the hoop.

See Diagrams E and F for a couple "specials" to run off this set. In Diagram E, #5 passes to
#1, who in turn passes to #3. After the pass is made to #3, instead of cutting through, #5 then
sets a screen for #2, who cuts through. If the defense switches on this screen, #5 should roll
off the screen to the hoop. If #2 does not receive the pass, #5 pops back out on top, #2 rotates
out to the weak-side wing and #4 moves out to the top weak-side position. If unable to make
the pass to #3, #1 can pass back out to #5 (Diagram F) and set a screen for #3 who now
makes the basket cut.

160
Here is another variation called "Counter". This is useful against teams that switch on screens,
and is helpful in creating "big-little" (and "little-big") mis-matches for the defense. See
Diagrams G and H below. You set up a little differently with #3 on top, your post players on
the top sidelines, and your guards (#1 and #2) lower on the wings (Diagram G). #1 and #2 set
back-screens for the post players, who move down to the blocks. Assuming the defense has
switched on the screens, the post players now have smaller defenders guarding them. Both
posts then flash back up to the elbows (Diagram H), looking for the pass. Meanwhile your
quick guards (#1 and #2) who are now being defended by slower post defenders (after the
switch) make quick back-door cuts.

Pointers when going against a trapping defense:

1. If you are playing a team that you know traps in the high corners (or if they start to do this),
then have the opposite wing player DRAG his man towards the low block and then flash to the
middle of the court (wherever the open spot is)... can't really say where that will be as it
depends on the defense. This will help relieve pressure and give you a spot to pass to in the
middle of the floor.

2. If they trap the wings, have the opposite side wing flash EARLY.... you need someone in the
middle of the floor to help relieve pressure. Then the opposite side hi player can cut back door.
Scouting reports should be able to prepare you for this. This is something that your team
should be prepared for as teams will try to do something to prevent you from holding the ball for
any length of time.

Double-Up Vs. Zone Defenses

1. The same basic set is used (Diagram I below). #5 can pass to either #1 or #2. The entry
pass is then made to the wing (either #3 or #4 depending on which side the ball is on).
2. Note the same two basic cuts are used as above. #5 V-cuts to the ball-side block and then
moves to the opposite block. #4 V-cuts to the ball-side elbow (Diagram I). Note that these cuts
are not made until the wing (#3 or #4) receives the entry pass.
3. Ball reversal.. See Diagram J. If the cutters do not receive the pass, then #4 moves out to
the top middle position and the ball is reversed (3 to 1, 1 to 4, 4 to 2 and 2 to 5). Also note that
the player that occupies the top middle spot can cut and replace himself to get open. This is a
good option when the defense is sagging a lot, and also if you have a good wing that is flashing
in the middle to the L and making some things happen.
4. Continuity. Once #5 receives the ball, then #4 now makes the basic top cut to the ball-side
block, and then to the opposite block (Diagram K). And #3 makes the cut to the ball-side
elbow. Note that these are the same cuts that were previously run on the opposite side in
Diagram I.
5. Ball-reversal back. Again, if the cutters do not receive the pass, #3 now pops out to the top
middle position and the ball is reversed back around to the original side (Diagram L. 5 to 2, 2
to 3, 3 to 1).

161
Several pointers:
1. Players are encouraged to interchange frequently in order to get to their offensive strengths,
so that your post players get inside and your shooters pop outside.
2. Players should pass fake with every touch of the ball, to get the defense to react.
3. The middle top cut must be timed so that the WING player (#3 or #4 above) has the ball first
before the cut is made.
4. The timing of the wing to ball-side elbow cut is such that it is made after the initial top cut is
made, but not too late, especially against heavy ball pressure (in which case it is better to be
early than late).

Now look at the diagrams below. The set can be lowered (depending on the zone you are
against) so that all the players are positioned around the three-point arc (Diagram M). Players
should hit the gaps and seams. The same basic cuts and movements are used as above
(Diagram N). With this set, the post cutter (#5) can hold at the opposite block, and then step
out to the short corner on ball-reversal (Diagram O).

162
 Open Post High Offense : Basic Motion

Contributed by:
Geoff McCracken
Head Boys Basketball Coach
Dayton High School, Dayton, Texas

Figure 1

Figure 1 above shows our basic set up and entries for our open post high offense.
Our initial set begins with 3 players across the free throw line and the other 2 players
along the free throw line extended. The initial objective is to get the ball to the free
throw line extended. Once the ball reaches this spot then the true motion and
opportunities of this offense begin. The point position (# 1 in fig.1) will look to enter the
ball either to the wing along the half court line or to the FT line extended on a skip pass.
If the wing at half court (#2) receives the entry pass (figure 2 below), the player at the FT line
extended (#5) must make a strong cut to the basket looking for the possible back door. If the
backdoor option does not occur then #5 must make a replacement cut, looking for an entry
pass from the wing.

Figure 2

163
In figure 3 below, when the point position (#1) enters the ball either to the wing (#2) or
to the FT line extended (#5) directly he/she executes a basket cut exiting to the FT line
extended opposite the ball.

Figure 3

Figure 4

In figure 4 above, once the ball is entered to the free throw line extended and
immediately after the point position (#1) has executed their basket cut, the weak side

164
wing (#4) flashes to the decision spot (middle of the free throw line marked in figure 4
with an X).

In figure 5 below, when #4 reaches the decision spot he/she must recognize how his/her
defender is playing. If the defensive player is denying the flash (in the passing lane) then
#4 immediately plants his/her outside foot and goes backdoor. If the defender plays off
the line then #4 hits the decision spot looking to catch the basketball. If #4 does not
receive the basketball at the decision spot, then he/she plants their inside foot and
replaces the point position looking for ball reversal.

Also, in figure 5, once the basket cutter (#1) has gone through and exited to the weak
side and the weak side flasher (#4) has hit the decision spot, the player at the FT line
extended with the ball (#5 in figure 5) has four options:
1. he/she can hit #4 for a lay-in opportunity on the backdoor cut
2. he/she can look to reverse the basketball either through the half court
wing (#2) or by skipping the ball back to the point (#4 who hit the decision
spot and filled the point position)
3. reversing the ball by skipping it across court to the weak side free throw
line extended player (who was the basket cutter and has filled the weak side
FT extended spot- the 1 in this case)
4. he/she can give the ball to #4 at the decision spot.

Figure 5

165
If the ball is given to #4 at the FT line, then he/she faces the basket and has the option
to shoot, drive, or as in figure 6 below give the ball to a backdoor cutter (either #1 or #5
in this case)

Figure 6

Or, when #4 receives the ball at the FT line, #1 and #5 can back screen for #3 and #2
sending those players on a hard cut to the basket looking for the backdoor pass from #4
(figure 7 below).

Figure 7

166
Obviously, if either backdoor cutter sees #4 begin to drive to the basket they should
stop their backdoor cut immediately and flare out to the corner looking for a penetrate
and pitch opportunity from #4’s drive to the basket (Figure 8 below)

Figure 8

When the ball returns to the point position, we are again in our initial set (figure 9 below)

Figure 9

167
Figure 10 below: The best way we have found to get the ball entered wing to FT line
extended is to back screen both sides when the ball returns to the point position. In the
figure below the wings (#3 and #2) make a hard backdoor cut to the basket off the back
screens set by #1 and #5. After setting their back screens, #1 and #5 pop out to the
high wing area looking to receive an entry pass from the point position. If the wing player
who has cut backdoor does not receive a lay-in pass, he/she must break back to the FT
line extended looking for an entry pass from the wing
position.

Figure 10 Figure 11

In Figure 11, the ball is entered to #5 who popped out after setting the back screen for
#2. #4 makes the required basket cut after entering the ball to #5.

Counters to Defensive Adjustments

1. In order to try to better defend the back screen and pop out for ball entry,
you might find teams that try to switch those high back screens. In figure 12 below, #4
and #5 set their back screens. The defenders will switch men when the screens are set.
This means that X4 and X5 will pick up the back door cutters and X2 and X3 will pick up
the back screeners who pop out looking for an entry pass. The back door cuts MUST be
made by both # 2 and #3. In doing so, X4 and X5 will pick them up on their path to the
basket (figure 13). When the switch is made, the screeners #4 and #5 will naturally find
themselves ON THE INSIDE of defenders X2 and X3. #4 and 5 should immediately roll
open to the basketball using an inside pivot and cut directly for the elbows looking to
receive a pass. #2 and 3 will find themselves on the outside of the defenders who
switched onto them. #2 and 3 should then stop their cut, plant their inside foot and
make a hard cut to the high wing positions to act as outlets and to draw their defender
away from the FT line extended area.

168
 Figure 12 Figure 13

2. Another situation that will occur when defenses try to switch the back
screen is that the defense will find itself in a big/little , little/big mismatch. These
mismatches occur when a post screens for a perimeter player and the two defenders
switch men. That leaves a perimeter player guarding a post and vice versa. In order to
take advantage of these mismatches, start your posts in the high wing positions and your
perimeter players at the FT line extended.

Figure 14 below shows the perimeter players setting the back screen for the post players.
The posts must make their basket cuts off the back screens. About midway through
their basket cut the posts should plant their inside foot and make a hard cut to the elbow
looking for the ball. The player at the point position should look to enter the ball to
either of the posts at either elbow. On the entry pass, the perimeter players (who now
have a post guarding them) must plant their outside foot and make a hard back door cut
to the basket looking for the ball.

169
 3. You will find that teams that play aggressive man to man half court defense
– I mean, right in your face, always in the passing lanes defense – should - and let me
emphasize SHOULD – have real problems with an offense like this as long as the ball is
moved quickly, is moved side – top – side, and is entered to the free throw line extended.
One reversal of the floor should get teams that likes to play aggressive “D” chasing your
cuts and struggling to close out.

But…coaches make adjustments. One adjustment that you would likely see is a sagging
man to man. Especially, if you are consistently beating the other team off the dribble and
getting easy penetration to the basket or if you are beating them consistently off back
door cuts.

If we encounter a team that tries this strategy then we go to either our cutting series or
our screening series.

Screening Series

Basic Set

In our screening series we talk to our players about 2 types of passes that are made in
this set:
1. entry passes
2. reversal passes

170
We define an entry pass as any pass that is made going toward the baseline. We can have
two types of entry passes in our screening series:

point to wing pass – made when a player at the point position (#1 in the diagram below)
enters the ball to either wing at the free throw line extended (#’s 2 and 3 in the diagram
below)

wing to corner pass – made when a wing player (either #’s 2 or 3 in the diagram below)
enters the ball to a player in the corner position (either #’s 4 or 5 below)

171
A reversal pass is defined as any pass that is made from a wing player back to the point
position.

A pass from the corner position to the wing position is not considered a reversal pass, but
once the pass then goes from the wing back to the point it will be a reversal pass.

172
Screens are set on ANY entry pass and on a reversal pass.

There is ONE RULE that must be followed in the screening series is that on ANY screen,
the cutter always goes to the basket and the screener always steps back to the ball.

Point to wing entry: In the diagram below, the point position (#1) enters the ball to the
wing (#2). Upon entering the ball, #1 will set a screen away for the weak side wing (#3).
#3 will curl over the top of the screen making sure he/she uses the screen well by
rubbing shoulders with the screener. According to the screening rule, #3 will go to the
basket and #1 will step back to the ball after setting the screen.

#3 would complete their cut to the basket exiting opposite the basketball to the corner
position. The corner position, with an open spot above them, would fill the next highest
open spot – in this case the wing (since #3 vacated the spot with the curl off the point to
wing screen).

If the defenders switch the screens, then the wing would stop their curl and pop back to
the ball and the screener would pivot and roll open to the basketball going toward the
basket. The screening rule is still in effect and has been met because the wing stepped
back to the ball and the screener went to the basket because of the defensive switch.

173
Wing to corner entry: On the entry pass from #2 to #5, #2 would then set a screen
somewhere around the elbow area for the player at the point position (#1). #1 would curl
around #2’s screen making sure he/she uses the screen well by rubbing shoulders with
the screener. According to the screening rule, #1 will go to the basket and #2 will step
back to the ball after setting the screen.

#1 would complete their cut to the basket exiting opposite the basketball to the corner
position. With an open position above them, #3 would fill the next highest open spot (in
the diagram below, the point position vacated by #1 going to the basket off #2’s elbow
screen). The corner position #4, with an open spot above them, would fill the next
highest open spot – in this case the wing (since #3 vacated the spot to fill the point
position).

In the diagram below:

If the corner position, #5, hits the wing, #2, on the step back, then the weak side wing,
#3 will flash to the decision spot. #3 will cut to the basket if their defender is playing
the passing lane aggressively (playing in line with the basketball) or pop out to fill the
point position if their defender allows the cut by playing below the free throw line.

174
In the diagram below:
If the defenders switch the screens, then the point (#1) would stop their curl and pop
back to the ball and the screener (#2) would pivot and roll open to the basketball going
toward the basket. The screening rule is still in effect and has been met because the
point stepped back to the ball and the screener went to the basket because of the
defensive switch.

175
Drill: Open Post 5 on 5 Full Court Drill

Purpose: This drill is designed to work on the open post offensive system under
competitive conditions. You’ll find that this drill also acts as a GREAT conditioner.

Objective: The first team to reach a predetermined point total wins the drill. The drill is
made competitive because we always have a consequence for the losers. Before the drill
begins we usually allow the teams who are running the drill to determine the consequence for
losing.

The Drill: Two teams play full court 5 on 5 using only the open post system as a half court
offense. For this drill we can have the offense run the open post high motion series, screening
series or cutting series.

Teams collect points for the following:

Offensive Points Defensive Points

Completed pass = 1 pt. Steal = 1 pt.
Score = 2 pts. Defensive Rebound = 1 pt.
3 pt. Shot = 3 pts. Drawn charge = 5 pts.
Ball Reversal = 5 pts.
Backdoor lay-in = 10 pts.
Offensive Rebound = 2 pts.

Teams can lose points for the following:

Offensively Defensively
Slow inbounds= -2 Missed Box Out = -2
Turnover = -2
Offensive Foul = -2
Standing Still = -2

Basically, the two teams play a full court game up to a predetermined point total. We have the
kids call out their points as they get them and one of the coaches tallies the points. The drill is
completely flexible in that you can adjust the points awarded, what the points are awarded for,
you can award points when only a certain player scores off a certain option, etc….

176
 Post Entries for the Open Post (5-Out) Motion Offense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by Geoff McCracken

Head Boys Basketball Coach
Dayton High School, Dayton, Texas

First read Coach McCracken’s “Open Post Motion (5 Out Motion Offense) Basic Rules”

Ball side corner flashes to the post

when the ball is passed to the wing.
He must wait for the cutter to clear
the post area.

Rule for getting out of the post is

to back screen the wing once the
ball leaves.

The wing curls around to the

corner if he does not get the ball.

Backside corner or wing flashes

to the post. (You might want to
specify which one has the
freedom to flash in there to
eliminate confusion). Again he
must wait for the cutter to
clear. .

Rule again is he must back

screen his way out of the post.
This time the wing (#2) clears to
the opposite corner. Following
the rule of “Fill the open spot”

177
3. Point passes to wing and
screens away for weak side wing
or corner. Weak side wing or
corner flashes to the post. The
point fills the corner no matter
whom he screens for and the
other players fill up.

Again Rule is he must back

screen his way out of the post
on ball reversal. #2 continues
to the corner

4. Point passes to the

wing and cuts through
the lane for a post up.

Again he must back

screen his way out of the
post on ball reversal.

178
 4-Out, 1-In Motion Offense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net
Contributed by Geoff McCracken
Head Boys Basketball Coach
Dayton High School, Dayton, Texas

4 around 1 motion
Basic Spacing and Positioning

#1 and #2 position themselves about 10 to 12 feet from the elbows at a 45-degree angle.
#3 and 4 position themselves 12 to 15 feet from the baseline on the arc.
#5 can take any one of the 3 post positions shown.

Rules without the ball

1. If you have an overplay cut backdoor

179
2. If you have an under-play pop out to spread the defense.

3. Dribble at----- cut back.

4. Fill the open spot when a teammate cuts or drives.

5. Dribble penetrate-------relocate.

• The most important rule is to keep moving. If you do not catch a pass with 2 seconds you
need to move on.
• When filling spots on the floor move up and away

Rules after passing the ball.

After you pass the ball there are four things you can do
1. Cut to the basket
2. Screen away
3. Cut in and pop out
4. Screen the ball

180
Reading screens
It is very important that both the man setting the screen and the man coming off the screen
read the defense.

Rules for setting screens

1. Turn your rear end to the direction that you want the man you are screening for to go.
2. Set your feet solid and protect yourself by extending your arms down and crossing them.
3. Call out the name of the man you are screening for.
4. Screen the Defense not the offense. Go to where the defense is and set the screen.

Rules for coming off screens

1. Set the screen up by v-cutting or jab-stepping away from the screen and then running back
into it.
2. Rub shoulders with the teammate who is setting the screen
3. Read the Defense when you come off the screen
• If the defense goes under a screen then screen then the player coming off the screen
should run off the top.

181
• If the defense follows you around the screen then the player coming off the
screen should curl.

• If the defense switches on the screen, then the man who set the screen should
seal the player he screened and come to the ball.

• If the defense overplays the screen then use a flare move.

182
 4-Out, 1-In “Flash”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Here is a play you can run out of the 4-out, 1-in set.

Set up in the 4-out, 1-in with four perimeter players

and one post player. Start with #5 on the opposite low
block.

#1 yells "Flash!" and #5 makes a flash cut to the free

throw line and receives the pass from #1 (Diagram A).

Meanwhile, as #5 is receiving the pass, #4 fakes out

and then makes a hard quick back-cut to the hoop. #5
passes to #4 for the lay-up (Diagram B).

Now if #4 is covered and doesn't get the pass from #5,

he/she continues through and sets a screen for #3
(Diagram B). #3 cuts around the screen and gets the
pass from #5 for the lay-up (Diagram C).

If the defense switches on the screen, #4 should have

inside position (after sealing the defender). #3 clears
to the opposite side and #4 rolls to the hoop for the
pass from #5 (Diagram D).

Of course, at anytime, #5 can take the shot from the

free throw line if open, or make a move and drive to
the hoop as another option.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels. All rights reserved

183
 4-Out, 1-In “Slip”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This play is similar to the 3-2 Slip play, but is adapted for the 4-out, 1-in motion offense.

Set up in the 4-out, 1-in offense. #1 has the

ball and the post player is on the opposite low
block.

This starts out as a simple pass and screen-

away play. #1 passes to #3 (who has made a
V-cut back out to receive the pass). #1 sets a
screen for #2. Meanwhile, #5 slides up to the
elbow. See Diagram A.

#2 cuts hard around the screen, looking for the

pass from #3 and the lay-up. See Diagram B.

Note this option if the #1

defender moves out on
top of the screen. Then
#1 slips the screen and
cuts to the hoop (See
Option diagram to the
right).

Well, assuming #2 has cut through, and does

not receive the ball, then he/she continues
out to the weak-side short corner.

Now, #5 sets a screen for #1 who "slips"

around the screen for the pass from #3 and
the lay-up. #4 moves out to the top as a
defensive safety. See Diagram C.

If the defense switched on the screen and #1

does not receive the pass, then #5 should
have inside position on the defender if he/she
"sealed" the defender correctly. Then #5 just
rolls to the hoop for the pass from #3 and the
shot.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

184
 4-Out,1-In “Swing”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This is a play you can run out of the 4-out, 1-in motion offense.

Set up in the 4-out, 1-in set. #1 has the ball and starts the play. #5 flashes to the ball-side
elbow. #4 "swings" around to the ball-side low block. You will notice that this "clears out" the
right side. See Diagrams A and B.

#2 makes a V-cut and receives the pass from #1. #1 then cuts around #2, and receives a
hand-off from #2 and takes it hard to the hoop for the lay-up. If the defense prevents the hand-
off, then #2 might be able to make either a bounce pass, or a "dump" pass (a soft lob pass) to
#1, who still takes it to the hoop. See Diagram B.

If #1 does not receive the ball, then he/she moves through and sets a screen for #4. #2 passes
to #4 for the lay-up. See Diagram C.

Of course, another excellent option (if you have a good #2 guard) is to let the #2 guard have
the option of attacking his/her defender one-on-one after #1 has cleared through, as there will
be an open alley to the hoop. If #4 sees this happening, he/she should stay clear of the right
block.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

185
 4-Out, 1-In “Fist”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Here’s another very simple but effective play to run off the 4-out, 1-in set. It’s nothing but a
simple pick and roll play (anyone remember watching John Stockton and Karl Malone run this
for years for the Jazz?). If the pick and roll is executed properly, it is very difficult to defend.

The inside post player (5) sets the pick for any of the outside players, and then they run the
two-man game of pick and roll. I think this is more effective if the post player sets the pick on
the middle side so the ball-handler (1) can go around the pick and up the middle of the lane,
while 5 rolls to the opposite side of the lane (See Diagram A below). In Diagram B, the defense
has switched, and now 5 should be open on the seal and roll to the hoop.

One last pointer...

If the X5 defender comes out on top of the screen to prevent 1's penetration, 1 should
immediately recognize this and spin around back to the left. 5 still has inside position on X1
and releases to the hoop. Now 1 can hit 5 with the over-the-top lob pass.

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

186
 The Shuffle Offense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The shuffle offense originated in the early 1950’s by Coach Bruce Drake at Oklahoma, and was
subsequently taught by Coach Bob Spear of the United States Air Force Academy, and also
Coach Dean Smith of North Carolina. The Air Force Academy had player height restrictions,
which often left them without a dominant post player. The shuffle offense is an offense that has
all five players rotate in each of the five shuffle positions. So this offense would be an option
for a team that has good ball-handlers but is not blessed with height or a strong dominant post
player.

For a detailed description of the offense see the excellent chapter in Dean Smith's book
"Multiple Offenses and Defenses". This article below describes some basic concepts of the
shuffle.

The Basic Set and Basic Cut.

See Diagram A below. Instead of a conventional numbering of players, the shuffle positions
are labeled as O1 (the "first cutter"), O2 (the "point"), O3 (the "feeder"), O4 (the "second
cutter") and O5 (the "post"). This is a continuity offense and if ran long enough, each of the five
players would eventually occupy each of the five shuffle positions.

O1 starts the offense by dribbling the ball up to the wing. O2 makes a V-cut and receives the
pass from O1. O2 could take the outside shot here. Meanwhile O3 fakes inside and cuts hard
outside for the pass from O2. At this point, O3 has the option of taking the shot, taking the ball
to the hoop, or looking for the first cutter O1. Meanwhile O5 sets a screen for O1, who makes
the Basic Cut either around the top of the screen, or back-door, and looks for the pass from O3
for the lay-up. Soon after setting the pick for O1, O5 then screens for O4, the second cutter
(who has drifted outside even up with O5). O4 then cuts to the high post or ballside elbow
looking for the pass and shot (Diagram B). If nothing develops, O2 sets a down-screen for O5
who then pops out to become the point and O2 drops down to become the next feeder
(Diagram C). You now have the same set, but on the opposite side, and with different players
occupying the shuffle positions. O3 is now the first cutter, O4 is the post, and O1 is the second
cutter.

187
 Ball Reversal, Continuity.
Now study Diagrams D, E and F. The same series of cuts is now run from this side, only this
time, for the purpose of illustration of the back-cut option you see O3 cutting back-door around
O4. The first cutter has the option of cutting either way around the screen, whichever looks
best at the time. Again, each player may have a scoring option. In Diagram F, O2 is now the
first cutter, O3 - the second cutter, O4 - the point, O1 - the post, and O5 - the feeder.

The "Split".
Now lets suppose the defense is denying the pass back out to the point (Diagram H). Instead,
we run the "split" with the pass going into the post O1. This pass triggers the point O4 to set a
down-screen for the feeder O5 and they exchange positions (Diagram I). Meanwhile the first
cutter O2 sets a down-screen for the second cutter O3, who comes around the post looking for
the shot. If the shot is not there, then O3 can start the basic cut motion again as seen in
Diagram J.

Usually the pass to the post as seen in Diagram H is

available, as the defense usually plays behind the post at
the elbow. However, if the post is fronted (Diagram K),
then the feeder O3 moves up to the elbow, and the post
O5 can pin the X5 defender and drop inside for the "over-
the-top" lob pass.

Strongside, Corner Option.

Again, let's suppose the pass to the point is being denied (Diagram L). Our second cutter O4
should recognize this and cut to the corner looking for the pass from O1 as another option.
After this pass is made, the post O5 again sets the screen for the first cutter O1, who can either
cut over or under the screen, looking for the pass from O4 (Diagram M). Of course O4 could
also take the shot from the corner. If neither is available, our post O5 simply steps outside to
become the new first cutter and receives the pass (Diagram N). The offense resets with O2
dropping into the post, O3 moving out to the point and O1 is now the feeder.

188
Diagonal Option.
Once again, let's suppose the pass to the point is being denied (Diagram O). This time, our
point O2 takes the X2 defender high outside. The feeder O3 recognizes this and cuts to the
top of the key underneath the X2 defender and receives the pass from O1. The point O2 now
cuts hard around O3 who screens the X2 defender and hands the ball off to O2 going to the
hoop for the lay-up (Diagram P).

Feeder Back-cut Option.

The defense is playing aggressive "on-the-line" man-to-man defense and the feeder O3 is
being denied the pass from the point (Diagram Q). The feeder O3 then plants the outside foot
and makes a hard back-cut to the hoop, looking for the pass from the point O2 (Diagram R).

Point Pass Fake Option.

You can actually give this option a name and call it as a play. The defense is playing man-to-
man defense and the X4 defender has dropped down into the lane in helpside (Diagram S).
The offense starts the basic cut, but instead of the point O2 making the pass to the feeder O3,
he/she makes a hard pass fake instead, shifting the defense to that side. Meanwhile, the
second cutter O4 cuts out to the wing looking for the pass back to the left and the shot
(Diagram T). The post O5 can drop down just above the block and post up, and you now have
a two-man game with O4 and O5 (Diagram U).

189
Dribble entry.
See Diagram V. If the pass is being denied, another
option is to use the dribble entry where the first cutter O1
simply dribbles out to the point and exchanges positions
with the point O2 (who now becomes the first cutter).
The pass is then made to the feeder O3, and O2
executes the first cut.

The dribble entry and exchange can also be made for the
corner option described above wherein the first cutter
would dribble to the corner and would exchange positions
with the second cutter. Similarly, the point could dribble
over to the feeder's usual position on the wing and the
feeder would move out to the point.

Screens and Exchanges.

In addition to the dribble entry and exchanges noted in the previous paragraph, exchanges can
be made away from the ball. Diagram W shows the post O5 setting a screen for the feeder O3
and exchanging positions. In Diagram X, the point down-screens for the post O3 and they
exchange positions. Finally, in Diagram Y, the second cutter screens for the feeder and
exchanges positions. These are just some of the ways of getting the passing lanes opened up
against a pressure defense.

After an Offensive Rebound.

After the missed shot, and the offensive rebound is secured, I would teach my players to go
right up for the put-back shot if available. If not, or if you are trying to run the clock down, bring
the ball outside and set up the offense.

The shuffle creates movement and scoring opportunities for all five players and would be most
effective against man-to-man defenses, but also could be useful against some zones,
especially match-up zones. This offense favors a ball-control, intelligent team who has the
patience to wait for a good scoring opportunity to develop. The shuffle may take some time to
teach as each player must learn all five positions and the various options. But this could be an
excellent offense for the smaller team that lacks a strong post player. With all five players
moving and changing positions, mis-matches will occur where at times the defense's tall post
players will find themselves defending their man out on the perimeter while their guards may
get caught down near the basket. Also, player substitution is easy since you can substitute
your best player on the bench rather than a guard for a guard or a post for a post, since all
positions are interchangeable. Additionally, opponents may have difficulty scouting this offense
since a given player’s role is constantly changing.

Copyright 2004, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

190
 Swing Offense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by:
Dave Genis
Varsity Girls' Basketball
Niles West HS, 5701 W. Oakton, Skokie, IL 60077
davgen@niles-hs.k12.il.us

Our “Swing” offense is really nothing terribly original. It is

a simple pass, cut, and fill offense that offers a variety of
counter options based on how the defense chooses to
play.

The basic set up is a 2-3 formation with the wings

positioned
As free throw
I stated earlier, line
all of theextended outside
options we theof
use out three-
“Swing”
point line and a post player positioned at the free
are counters to how the defense is playing. One counter throw
line (diagram 1).
would be used when the wing is looking to reverse the
ball after a basket cut and a defender is doing a great job
of denying the pass. Immediately, #2 would recognize
the denial of the reversal pass and make a hard basket
cut initiating the basic swing motion. (diagram 4)

The motion of Swing is initiated with an entry pass to the

wing. On the entry pass a hard basket cut is made and
the player exits to the wing area opposite the ball. All
other perimeter players “wheel” around to fill the open
spots in front of them i.e. 2 fills the spot vacated by 1, #3
fills #2’s spot, and #1 fills #3’s spot after making his
basket cut. (diagram 2).

Another counter option might occur if the wing entry is

being aggressively denied. In diagram 5, #2 cannot enter
the ball because #3 is being denied. 3 has the option of
immediately planting their outside foot and cutting back
door. If #3 receives the backdoor pass and #5’s defender
drops off to help, #5 should move into the mid lane area
to look for a drop off pass from #3.
After the ball is entered to the wing and a basket cut is
made, we look to reverse the ball from side to top to side.
(diagram 3). Once the ball is reversed and another entry
is made to the wing, the basic motion is initiated again
beginning with a basket cut.

Another counter that could occur as a result of the wing

entry being aggressively denied is a simple dribble entry
as shown in diagram 6.

191
Diagram 5

192
 Your post at the free throw line can be a threat as well.
We give our posts the options of rolling into the low post
at anytime as long as it is after a basket cut. We give the
basket cut priority so as to not end up with 2 players
cutting to the same area at the same time. (diagram 7).
Our posts are given a 2 count and then they must either
relocate back to the free throw line until another basket
cut is made.

Or…

#5 can step away from the low post and set a ball screen
for the strong side wing and play a 2-man game (diagram
8).

As I said, this is not a terribly original offense, nor is it terribly complicated. It does offer a lot of
flexibility during its motion. I’ve provided some of the counters we’ve used and been successful
with. You certainly can play around with the set and motion and come up with options or set
plays on your own.

Another aspect to this offense that I like is that it can be used as a half court man to man
defensive drill. By removing the post at the free throw line and playing 4 on 4 you can work on
your help side positioning, jumping to the basketball, denial, close outs, etc…. The offense
creates the motion requiring use of those defensive skills/concepts.

193
Thunder Offense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This page was contributed by:

Coach Thomas J. Koeller
Southwestern High School
Hazel Green, WI

Initial Setup of Thunder

Keys to remember in this step…
1. Spacing
a. 3 cannot be too deep outside.

Step One (First movement and ideal shot)

Keys to remember in this step…

1. 3 must get open for pass from 1 to
start the play. Use a v-cut.
2. 4 cuts only when pass is thrown from
1 to 3.
3. 5 MUST set a good pick for cutter.
a. Cutter, use 5’s pick.
4. 3 then passes around defender to 4
on the block if 4 is open.
5. 4 turnaround jump shot, kiss off of
the glass, on corner near-side top
corner of the square.

Step Two (Pass or shot not open to 4 on cut)

Now we motion to new set

Keys to remember in this step…

1. 3 immediately passes back to 1.
2. 2 moves down and sets a screen for
5 to come up and replace her.
3. 2 then floats out to the wing.
4. We are now in the original formation
just on the other side.
5. 1 passes to 5 (now the other guard).

Original setup from opposite side (The result of

first rotation).

Key points to remember in this setup…

1. 5 is now essentially the point guard.
2. Spacing should remain the same as
the original set. Get to the correct
spot on the floor.

194
 Step One (First movement and ideal shot)

Keys to remember in this step…

1. 2 must get open for pass from 5 to
start the play. Use a v-cut.
2. 3 cuts only when pass is thrown from
5 to 2.
3. 4 MUST set a good pick for cutter.
a. Cutter, use 4’s pick.
4. 2 then passes around defender to 3
on the block if 3 is open.
5. 3 turnaround jump shot, kiss off of
the glass, on corner near-side top
corner of the square.

Step Two (Pass or shot not open to 3 on cut)

Now we motion to new set

Keys to remember in this step…

1. 2 immediately passes back to 5.
2. 1 moves down and sets a screen for
4 to come up and replace her.
3. 1 then floats out to the wing.
4. We are now in the original formation
just on the other side.
5. 5 passes to 4 (now the other guard).

This offense can be rotated an infinite number of times. After 5 rotations, everyone is back in
their original position, only on the opposite side (i.e. #1 is point again, and the #5 girl is setting
the screen again). After 10 rotations, you are back to the very first setup. This offense can be
difficult to learn at first. Patience, timing, and repetition will end the frustration of learning this
offense and increase the frustration experienced by the opponent trying to defend it. After
mastering this offense, many things can be done out of it to keep the defense guessing. The
scoring options that are available from this offense are nearly impossible to stop even by a
team that knows exactly how to run it themselves. For example, if the defense is getting used
to the pass to the wing and begins cheating out, the wing needs only to signal to the point
guard that instead of v-cutting, they will be back-cutting to the basket for a quick hit. Another
option is to cut at the middle block or the elbow if a "cheating" defender is filling the low post.
Also, be sure to know what to do if the point guard picks the left side. If this happens we simply
move the #4 out to the wing on that side and shift the #5 to the other block and make #3 the
first cutter. More than anything, if the screens are good and the passes are crisp, after a few
motions you will always get a shooting window. If this offense begins failing to produce points
there are some keys to it that are likely being neglected that must be practiced or re-learned.

Key 1. The screen

-Failure to set or use the screen deep in the lane is the cause for this play not
working 75% of the time. The screen must be set and used.

195
Key 2. Timing
-Timing is everything to a motion offense. Timing is everything to this play. The
cutter absolutely cannot begin their cut before the wing has the ball to pass it
to them. This is a bang, bang play.

Key 3. Poor passing

-More than with any other play that we will run, quick, crisp passing is vital. The
wing should almost always use the step around method with their pivot foot to
pass to the cutter. The bounce pass should be used most of the time in this
play.

Key 4. Lazy/slow cuts

-There is no excuse for a slow/lazy cut on any play, however a lazy cut will
definitely kill this play. A lazy cut will destroy the timing of this play. Timing is
everything (Key 2). Cut hard and deliberately this will open up your already
small window of opportunity for shooting on the block after the cut.

Key 5. Forgetting where to move to if the entry pass and shot is not open.
-We will drill this play over and over again. Not knowing the motion kills the
play. Forget the play, forget playing.

196
 Zone Offense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Zone defenses create special problems for the offense. Plays and sets designed to be
successful against man-to-man coverage often run into problems against zones. You must
have a "zone offense(s)" in your offensive arsenal to counteract zone defenses. Here are some
pointers in dealing with zone defenses.

1. If it is your team's offensive style, fast-break and push the ball up the floor as quickly as
possible, before the defensive zone can get set.

2. Full-court press on defense, in order to favor a "transition type", wide-open, up-tempo game.
A slow-down, half-court game allows the zone defense to be more effective.

3. Analyze the zone defense to see what set you are facing. Then set your offense accordingly.
If the defense shows a two-guard front (e.g. 2-1-2 or 2-3 zone), use a one-guard front, or point
guard (e.g. 1-3-1, 1-2-2 ("3-out, 2-in"), or 1-4). Just the opposite applies if the defense shows a
one-guard front (e.g. 1-3-1, or 1-2-2 zone), use a two-guard front (e.g. 2-1-2, 2-3, 2-2-1). See
Diagrams A and B. Observe to see if the defense keeps switching its defensive set, and be
ready to call out your offensive counter-move from the bench. Some defenses will keep
changing on you, and you can't call a time-out every time!

4. Be patient on offense, but take the first open,

good percentage shot. Make sure your best
shooters are getting their shots.

5. Crash the offensive boards as a zone defense

often does not have clear-cut box-out
assignments, and extra, high-percentage shots
can be gotten off the offensive rebound.

6. Maintain good spacing, don't get "bunched

up".
Players should move into the gaps in the zone
(see Diagram C). "Overload" zones by flooding
areas of the zone with more offensive players
than it can cover.

197
7. Avoid unnecessary dribbling as this allows the defense time to adjust or reset. However,
guards and wings should look to dribble-penetrate the gaps in the zone (Diagram C), and look
to dish off inside.

8. You must get the ball inside for high-percentage shots. It's OK to take the outside jumper or
three-pointer, but don't settle for the outside shot on every possession. You must find a way to
get inside to be successful. You must be able to get those important "points in the paint".
Having success inside will cause problems for the defense, may result in their getting into foul
trouble, and will open up your outside shot when the defense collapses inside. When the ball
goes inside, if it is well-defended, go "inside-out" with a quick pass out for a wide-open three-
pointer.

9. Use crisp passing, and use the "skip" pass from corner to wing, and wing to corner. Look for
the lob pass to the baseline and back-door. Passers should use ball-fakes, where they fake a
shot or fake an overhead pass in one direction to get the zone to move, then pass in the
opposite direction.

10. Set screens against the zone, both inside and outside. Players should make cuts into the
open areas, and look to the weak-side, or "back-door".

11. Make sure your players receive the ball in "triple-threat" position, ready to shoot, pass or
penetrate.

One last strategy:

If you have the lead and the opponent switches to zone defense, and if you are not confident
that you can beat their zone, you can refuse to play against it. Instead, you go into a "4-
corners" delay offense. Since you have the lead, they will have to eventually come out a play
you man-to-man. Of course, this strategy won't work if there is an offensive shot clock rule. See
“Delay Spread Offense”. Also, if your forte is a fast-breaking style, going to a delay game may
be the worst thing you can do!

For specific offenses against specific zone defenses see the following pages:
Type of Zone Defense
2-1-2 zone or 2-3 zone (see "Beating the 2-1-2 zone", "1-4 Stack Offense", "1-4 High-Post Pick
and Roll")
3-2 zone (see "Beating the 3-2 zone")
1-3-1 zone (see "Beating the 1-3-1 zone")

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

198
 How to Attack the 2-3 (or 2-1-2) Zone Defense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The 2-3 (or 2-1-2 zone) is a commonly used zone defense, usually designed to stop the inside
game. Good outside shooting can rip it apart. But you still need to get the ball inside,
especially late in the game, or when your shooters are not hitting. The 2-1-2 zone is basically
the same as the 2-3, except that the middle low defender is positioned a little higher in the
paint, just below the free throw line.

Let's discuss several ways to beat this zone… (1) simply over-shifting the zone, (2) a 2-3 zone
offense and (3) a more complicated over-loading scheme. But first, if you are coaching young
players, I strongly advise you to click here for a simple, easy 2-3 zone buster... easy to
understand and teach.

Over-shift the Zone

To over-shift a zone, the offense should pass the ball quickly around the perimeter, and into the
high and low posts. The ball should be like a "hot potato" - pass it quickly without holding onto
it. By passing quickly and using "skip" passes (e.g. wing to wing pass), the zone has to move
quickly to cover the offense. By quickly reversing the ball to the opposite side of the court, the
zone can be caught over-shifted on the wrong side, and the opposite wing player, or post
players, can often get an open shot.

Using a 1-3-1 offensive set is a good way to do this. 4 sets up at the free throw line and 5 runs
the baseline back and forth, cutting to either a post-up position (on the block), or the comer on
the side the ball is on. If 5 goes to the comer, then 4 can cut down to the ball-side block and
post-up there. Meanwhile, 3 can flash down to the low block on the weak-side.

If the ball goes back out to the wing or point, 4 moves back to the free-throw line. If the ball is
on the wing, 4 should move to the elbow on the ball side. If 4 gets the ball, 5 can cut low
through lane for a pass from 4.
#1 should try to keep the ball moving quickly and
avoid unnecessary dribbling (which allows the
zone time to reset). #1 should look to pass to the
wings (2 and 3), or to 4.

2 and 3 should look to shoot, if open, or pass to

4, 1, or the comer (5). When the ball is on the
wing, the opposite wing should slide in near the
opposite elbow to get a pass for an open shot.
Good outside shooting will break the press
down. Players can dribble penetrate the gaps
(see Basic Concepts of Motion Offense).

199
"2-3 Zone Offense"
Here is an offense that you can use against this zone (refer to the diagrams below). Notice in
Diagram A that the defense is set in the 2-3 zone. Use a 1-3-1 offensive set, but with some
modifications and the following rules:

1. #5 will run the baseline from short corner to short corner and we will try to get the ball down
to him.

2. The wings #2 and #3 will set out a little farther than usual from the three-point arc so that the
#1 and #2 defenders are not in their passing lane (from #1). After receiving the pass, #2 or #3
can dribble in, get the defender to commit and then pass or shoot.

3. When the ball is on the wing, instead of posting at the elbow or at the low block (which are
usually defended in this zone), #4 will set up a little lower than the elbow, actually in the gap
between the high and low defenders.

4. You can get the ball to #5 either through a pass from #2 or #4 (or #3 when the ball is on the
left side). #5 may be able to make a quick inside pass to #4 cutting for the lay-up (once the #4
defender commits to guarding #5). The other option for #5 is to pass to #3 in the opposite
corner.

5. The weak-side wing always cuts to the corner when #5 gets the ball (Diagram B). When #4
has the ball (Diagram C), the weak-side wing can either slide into the gap between the high
and low defenders looking for the medium range jumper, or if he/she is a good three-point
shooter, look for the skip pass out to the three-point arc.

6. Outside shooters have a tendency to let the first open shot go. So that we continue to try to
get the ball inside, we have one rule. Before taking the outside shot, the ball has to go inside to
#4 or #5 for at least one touch. Looking at Diagram C, you can see that once #4 gets the ball,
there are several offensive "triangles", or passing options (4-2-5, 4-2-1, 4-1-3) where you gain a
3 against 2 advantage on the defense. Quick passing will get you a good shot.

200
 2-3 Zone Offense Using the 3-Out, 2-In Set
Here is yet another way to attack the gaps in the 2-3 zone. This is similar to the above attack,
but instead of having a high post, the attack comes from underneath the zone, from the
opposite low post. Refer to the diagrams below.
The offense can be started by #1
with a pass to the wing (Diagram
A), or a dribble to the wing, with
#2 making a shallow cut out to
the point (Diagram B).

See Diagram B. As the ball

arrives on the wing, the ball-side
low post (#4) cuts to the short
corner yelling "ball, ball, ball!", in
hopes of drawing the low post
defender out with him.
Meanwhile, the opposite low post
(#5) makes a cut from
underneath the zone to the ball-
side lane looking for the pass
from the wing.

The wing passes to either #5 along the lane or #4 in the short corner
(Diagram C). #5 has the option of taking the shot, driving to the hoop
(if the #5 defender has moved out), or passing to either #4 or
reversing it to #3 (who should be wide open on the opposite side).

If the pass from the wing goes to the short corner (#4), then #5 can
cut to the low block looking for the pass from #4. Note that #2 and #1
have slid down a little toward the corner in case #4 must pass back
out.

Hi-Lo Option (below diagrams)

Again using the 3-out, 2-in set, #1 makes the pass to the wing, and this triggers the ballside post
player (#4) to flash to the gap near the ballside elbow.

After receiving the pass, #4

pivots and looks inside or
makes a shot fake, and passes
to #5 who maneuvers inside the
opposite post defender for the
pass and shot (Diagram B).

201
 If the ballside post defender
cheats up on the elbow to deny
#4, or if the pass to the wing is
being denied, then do the simple
dribble entry and shift seen in
Diagram C. #1 dribbles to the
wing. #2 sliding to the corner will
help to occupy the #4 defender,
forcing the #5 defender to move
up on #4 as the pass is delivered
to the elbow. #5 works to get that
inside position again for the pass
and shot.

2-3 Zone Offense using the 1-4 Set

See the diagrams below. The concepts are the same as the above two zone offenses. Here you are
starting with a 1-4 offensive set. You will end up with your players in the same positions as seen the
previous discussion using the 3-out, 2-in set. Using the 1-4 set, as the pass goes to the wing, the ball-
side high post (#4) goes to the short corner.

The weak-side high post (#5)

makes a cut toward the middle
defender and then back to the
lane looking for the pass from the
wing. #3 again slide into the gap
in the opposite wing and will be
wide open again. Use good
passing and ball movement and
the same options as outlined
above.

Over-Load the Zone

Although a bit more complicated, over-loading the zone allows you to get the ball inside. There
are only 2 guards (#1 and #3). #2 and #4 stack up along the right elbow. This puts pressure
on the center of the 2-1-2 zone to cover both players. #5 plays the opposite block.

Start with #1 passing to #2. #2 can

roll around the right of #4 (#4
screens the middle defender), and
#2 can shoot, or pass to #4 rolling
off the screen into the paint. If the
opposite post defender comes up
to get #4, pass to #5 down low.

202
Option:
Do this if the low post defender comes up to defend the stack.

First, take the ball to the corner. #1 should dribble the ball to the corner. When the defender
comes out to get #1, #1 passes to #4 cutting to the hoop. #3 gets back on defense.

If the guard defending #1 goes with #1 to the corner, then

#5 cuts across to the block for the pass from #1. If the
defender goes with #5, then #5 passes back door to #3
cutting to the hoop. If #1 can't pass inside, then #2
should split out to get pass from #1. If the ball goes
inside, then #2 gets back on defense.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

203
 A Simple, Easy 2-3 Zone Attack
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

My 7th graders were really having difficulty playing against the 2-3 zone, which we seem to be
running into frequently in youth tournaments. If you find your team in a similar situation, I think
this article will help.

I dedicated an entire practice session to learning how to beat this defense in a simple way that
young kids could understand. I used some visuals and made it interactive for them, instead of
me just talking (the kids get bored after a couple minutes of me lecturing). First, I pulled a table
out on the floor, and we all got around it with my clipboard and some tokens (pennies and
dimes) that they could move around on the clipboard. I let the kids set up the board and
helped them with placing the defense in a 2-3 zone. Then I told them to set the offense markers
in a 1-3-1. I had one orange marker for the person with the ball. Then I let them just start
figuring out where the gaps in the zone are... so every time they would position the offense, I
would then move the defense and then they would have to find the gaps again. They really got
into this, like playing checkers... so then we went out on the court to practice what they
discovered on their own. Amazingly, the kids, on their own, came up with the same offensive
scheme that I had devised, and it is diagrammed in the drawings below.

So now, on the court, I used hula hoops and some old car floor mats that I threw down in the
gaps so they could see where to move to. Having these visuals seemed to help them
understand where to move on the floor. One caution: players could trip and injure themselves
with these objects on the floor, so we just used them in “walk through” ball rotations, not up to
speed.

Now study the diagrams on the subsequent pages, and at the end I will give you just a few
simple rules that the kids have to remember.

First things to stress to the kids: you beat the zone by quick passing and movement, and avoid
unnecessary dribbling (which allows the zone to recover). Dribble only to penetrate a gap, or
improve a passing angle, or to get out of trouble. Offensive rebounding is very important since
the zone defenders do not have clear-cut box-out assignments (as in a man-to-man).

This zone offense will start with a 1-3-1 offensive set where our offense is already positioned in
the gaps. One tip: your high post #4 might initially be positioned along the lane, and then as
the point guard brings the ball into the forecourt, #4 makes a quick flash into the high post at
the free-throw line. Make sure the wings are high and wide, so that the point-to-wing pass is
not easily intercepted.

204
Now notice in the Diagrams A thru E below how the offense moves as the ball moves. Each
move is to fill a gap in the zone where you can get open for a pass and shot. When we pass to
the right wing, 4 moves to the right lane and 5 moves to the corner and 3 moves inside the 3-
point arc (Diagrams A and B). If the ball is passed to the corner, 4 cuts hard down to the hoop
for the bounce pass from 5 (Diagram C), and 3 moves to the free-throw line area because if 4
does not get the ball, then 3 is often wide open (Diagram D).

Now look at Diagram E. If the pass from the

wing goes instead to 4 near the elbow, 4 can
either shoot or pass to 3 for an open shot, or
to 5 in the corner.

205
Now here’s an option where we can attack the zone straight up the middle, by passing, not
dribbling. See the diagrams below. 1 passes to 4. 4 pivots and faces the basket and if open
can shoot it. Meanwhile, 5 who has been hiding behind the defenders down low, cuts into the
paint for the pass from 4, and the lay-up. 4 makes the decision here… if the middle defender
comes up to block the shot, then just fake a shot and bounce pass it to 5 down low. If the
middle defender stays low, then just shoot it. If a wing defender moves in, pass off to that wing.

“Zone 1” Now here is a play for our point guard, #1. If #1 yells “1”, then both post players
move down low to the low blocks. Now #1 will try to dribble between (split) the two outside
defenders right up the middle and will pull up for a shot just inside the free throw line. Do not
try to take it all the way to the hoop as the low defenders will get you!

Now, going back to the start of this play, if the two outside defenders stop the point guard from
getting inside, then she should immediately pass off to either 2 or 3 on the wings, and then
move back out to the point.

“Zone 21” (or “31”) Here is another play using a wing screen for #1. See the diagrams
below. You can see that if 2 sets a screen for 1, and then 1 dribbles into the gap on the right
she can stop and shoot the mid-ranged shot, or pass into the corner to 5. Again, do not dribble
all the way to the hoop as the low defenders will get you! If 5 gets the ball, then 4 should cut
down to the block looking for the pass from 5 (Diagram C).

206
So you see that there are certain areas (hula hoops) that we want to fill as the ball moves. The
diagrams below show red circles that should be filled when the ball is in that location.

207
And in the end, the entire system is very easy for them to understand with very few rules.

Low post rules:

1. run the baseline and always be in ball-side short corner when ball is on the wing.
2. when the ball is at the high post, duck under the zone into the paint for the pass down low.
3. offensive rebounding

High post rules:

1. Move with the ball... always point toward the ball. Ball at point, be at the FT line. Ball on the
wing, fill the hula hoop just below the ball-side elbow. Ball in the corner, cut down to the low
block.
2. Look to score, or pass inside or to opposite wing.
3. offensive rebounding

Wings rules:
1. Look to penetrate from the wing, and make good passing decisions, avoid too much
dribbling.
2. Look for the shot, and when the high post is at the elbow, the opposite wing drops down into
the gap on the weak-side.
3. When high post dives to low block, the opposite wing slides into the high post or ball-side
elbow area.

Point rules:
1. Keep the ball moving, with little dribbling, except to penetrate or open a passing lane.
2. Look for opportunity to dribble and split the two top defenders, and if they collapse, dish out
to either wing.
3. Responsible for staying back (on top) to prevent the fast break.

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

208
 3-2 Zone Attack (How to beat the 3-2 zone defense)
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The straight 3-2 zone defense is similar to the 1-2-2 zone, except that the middle defender
sags into the high post area. Click here, to look at the 1-2-2 zone attack.

First, if your point guard can shoot the three-pointer, he/she should get some open shots
against this zone, since the middle defender is playing off the point.

Use a two guard front and put your best shooter in the ball-side corner, running the baseline.
Put your two post players along both sides of the lane, in the gaps above the low defenders but
below the outside defenders (Diagram A). Attack this zone from the corners.

Let's assume the defense covers the corner by having their low defender come out. If your
corner shooter hits a couple, the low post defender will have to come out to defend and then
you should be able to pass into the low post or lane (Diagram B). If the opposite low post
defender comes over to help, you can dump it to your weak-side low post (Diagram C). But if
he/she is being covered by the weak-side wing defender, then kick it out to your #3 for the shot
from the wing... either the weak-side low post or weak-side wing should be open.

Now let's look at two options for inside screens. For success, you will have to recognize how
the zone covers the ball-side low block when the ball is in the corner. They can cover it by
either:
(A) having the middle defender slide down from the high post area, or
(B) having the opposite low defender slide over to the ball-side block.

(A) As the ball goes into the corner, if the middle defender slides down to cover the ball-side
low block, have your ball-side post screen the middle defender and seal him/her outside
(Diagram D). The opposite post can now cut over for the pass inside. If the weak-side post
covers this, then your post player who set the screen (#4) should have inside position (if he/she
sealed correctly) and should cut to the opposite block for the pass (Diagram E). If their #3
defender is playing down, kick it out to the weak-side wing for a shot (Diagram F).

209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
(B) As the ball goes to the corner, if the opposite low defender slides over to the cover the ball-
side block, have your ball-side post player set a screen on the opposite post defender, before
he/she slides over (Diagram G). You just screen that opposite post so he/she can't get there
and your #5 should be open for the pass and lay-up (Diagram H).

Now, let's assume the defense covers the corner by having the wing defender slide down. First
of all, if the passing is crisp, your best shooter (#2) should get some open shots, as it will take
time for the wing defender to get there. So look for the three-pointer from #2 as the first option.

As the ball is passed into the corner (Diagram I), #4 sets a down-screen on the low defender,
and #5 cuts into the gap on the ball-side just outside the lane for the pass and shot (Diagram
J). Another option (Diagram K) is to just have #4 step out into the gap for the shot... if the #4
defender comes out to defend, pass underneath to #5 cutting to the ball-side low block. Skip
passes to #3 on the opposite side will be effective also.

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

223
 1-2-2 Zone Attack (how to beat the 1-2-2 zone defense)
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The 1-2-2 and the 3-2 zone defenses are similar, with the exception of the position of the
middle defender. In the 1-2-2, the middle defender plays out on the point, and in the straight 3-
2, the middle defender sags into the high post area. Also see Zone Offense.

Like the 3-2 zone attack, you want to attack this zone from the corner, as this puts pressure on
the down defenders.

See Diagram A below. Set your offense in a 2-out, 2-in set with #1 and #3 flanking the #1
defender, and #4 and #5 positioning themselves in the gaps between the low and high
defenders on each side of the lane. Have your best shooter, #2, run the baseline from corner
to corner, always on the ball-side. If he can make a couple from the corner, the #4 defender
will have to come out to defend (Diagram B). This frees up #4 on the low block. If the #5
defender slides over to pick up #4, then your #5 should be open for the pass from #4 and the
lay-up (Diagram C). Or, although not shown in the diagrams, #4 can screen the #5 defender
(before he/she slides over) and this frees #5 for a cut to the ball-side low block and the lay-up.

Copyright 2001, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

Another way to attack the 1-2-2 zone...

I believe that a 4-out, 1-in motion offense would work
very well.

Take a look at the diagram at the right. With this

offense, you split the #1 defender with a two guard
front. Start with your inside player at the high post.
Your #3 and #4 cause problems for their wing
defenders, especially as they stretch the defense
toward the corners. This may cause the low post
defenders to come out to defend. Then #5 cuts down
the lane, or to the low block for the pass and shot.

Look at the spacing... #3 and #4 are in excellent position to attack the short corner gaps in the zone. If
#3 dribble penetrates the short corner, and the #5 defender comes over to stop him, there is a good
chance for a dish off to your #5 cutting down the lane.

With this offense, #5 is already in good position between defenders at the high-post and causes
problems when he slides down to the ball-side block. And #1 and #2 are also in a position to attack the
outside gaps.

224
Using a 1-3-1 offensive set.
In this case, #1 passes to the wing and cuts under the
wing defender into the corner. At the same time, the
high post dives to the ball-side low block. This puts a
lot of stress on the wing defender and the down
defender.

1 passes to 2 and then cuts to the right corner. 2

passes back to 1. 4 cuts down to the block. 1, 2, and 4
have a 3 on 2 situation with the defenders, if the
passing is crisp.

Options: After 4 goes to the block, 5 can flash to the

ball-side elbow, and 3 can cut back-door to the weak-
side block.

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

225
 Attacking the “Box and 1” Zone Defense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The "box and 1" defense is a commonly used "junk defense", or combination defense. With
this, the defense sets up in a four-man zone box formation, with one defender playing your best
player man-to-man (see Junk Defenses).

Like attacking any zone defense, look for the gaps in the zone and penetrate those areas. See
Zone Offense to review the principles of zone offense. Your other four players have to "step
up" and look for the shot themselves.

There a number of ways to attack the box and 1, depending on whether your star player (being
guarded man-to-man) is a guard or post player. Actually, it doesn't even have to be anything
fancy. You could have your players set good screens for your star player. Or, what is often
even more effective is having your star player set screens for the other four players and then
he/she seals the defender being screened and rolls to the hoop for the pass (see Setting
Screens). This is often an easy way for your star player to get open, and it often creates a
"mis-match" in the defensive coverage.

Another easy strategy is to put your star player in either corner, running the baseline, always on
the ball-side. This forces the defense to play what looks like a 2-3 zone. Now just use your 2-3
zone offense (see Beating the 2-3 Zone).

Now let's look at a couple simple set plays.

Situation #1. Your star player is your #2 guard, your shooting guard.
See the diagrams below. Using a 3-out, 2-in offensive formation, put your star player way out
on the right wing so that his/her defender is out of the way. You will note that the "box" is
vulnerable in the middle. Have #3 slide down to the corner, or short corner area. #5 cuts to
middle of the box and receives the pass from #1. If open, #5 can turn and shoot the short shot,
or pass to #3 cutting back-door if the #5 defender comes up to defend the middle (Diagram B).
Instead, if the #4 defender comes up to defend the middle, then your #5 can dump the pass off
to #4 down low (Diagram C). If the defender guarding your star player recognizes this and
drops down to help defend against #4, then your #5 makes the pass outside to your star player
for the outside shot. These decisions and passes must all happen quickly so that your #5
player does not pick up the 3-second lane violation. Work on this in practice, emphasizing to
#5 that he/she must quickly make the decision to either shoot or pass to #3, #4 or #2.

226
Situation 2. Your star player is a post player.
See the diagrams below. Use a 1-3-1 offense, with your star player running the baseline. In
this particular play, your star player once again is a decoy, playing below the low defenders in
the zone, off in the weak-side corner. Your point guard #1 starts the play by making the pass
to #2. #1 then shallow-cuts to the ball-side short corner area. #2 makes the pass to #4 in the
middle of the 1-3-1 offense at the high post. If #4 is a good shooter, he/she can destroy the
defense with a few shots from this area (Diagram B). If the #4 defender comes up to defend
the high post, then your #4 simply dumps the pass down to #1 in the short corner, who should
be wide open for the shot, or lay-up (Diagram C).

Although not shown in the diagrams, instead of having their #4 defender come up to defend the
high post, the defense might have their #3 defender come up to defend the high post. In this
situation, teach your #3 to move down to the weak-side low block any time he/she sees the #3
defender moving up to the high post area. Meanwhile, your star moves way out to the corner
or wing areas to take his/her defender out of the picture. Now #3 is wide open on the weak-
side low block for the pass and lay-up.

“21”
Put your star player at the weakside elbow. O1 dribbles toward X2 to engage X2. O2 screens
X2 and O1 dribbles around the screen for the open 10-12 foot pull-up jumper. If X3 comes up
to defend O1, O1 passes to O3 down low who is open for a lay-up. You could also run this to
the left and call it “51”.

3. Your star runs the baseline.

Here is another offense you can run, albeit a little more complicated, requiring some practice
time. See the diagrams below. Have your star player run the baseline. Set your wings (O2 and
O3) wide at the three-point line extended, 3-point arc areas. Set your low post (O5) on the low
block, same side as the star in the corner. Refer to Diagram A. The point guard (O1) dribbles
toward the wing opposite the star and passes to that wing. Meanwhile, O5 sets a backscreen
for the star, who cuts around the backscreen, under the two low defenders to the corner or
short corner. O5 the seals and rolls off the screen to the middle of the paint. Both the star and

227
O5 are looking for the pass and opportunity to score. O2 rotates a little toward the top of the
key.

See Diagram B. If nothing develops, O3 cuts to elbow paint area looking for a pass, and then
moves out to the opposite wing. O2 rotates out to the point. O1 waits for O3's cut and then cuts
hard to just inside the free throw line, looking for the pass, and immediately cuts out to the
ballside wing if the pass in the paint is not there.

Diagram C. The ball is reversed from the corner to the wing and to the point. The point now
starts the same play, going to the opposite direction.

Copyright 2002-2004, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

228
 Beating the 1-3-1 Zone Defense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Use a two-guard front to attack the 1-3-1 zone defense, and attack it from the corner where it is
most vulnerable. Position #2 (your best shooter) in the ball-side corner. #2 will run the
baseline and always be in the ball-side corner. Have two low posts on opposite sides of the
lane.

As the ball is passed into the corner, the opposite post player cuts up to the ball-side elbow
(Diagram B). #2 can shoot, or pass to either post at the block or elbow. #3 can slide "back-
door" on the weak side. Notice the ball reversal and player movements in Diagram C.

Here is another way to attack this zone using an inside screen. Refer to the diagrams below.
#2 runs the baseline, and is always in the ball-side corner as above. This time, the ball-side
post (#4) is positioned halfway up the lane, or near the elbow. We once again attack with a
pass to the corner. #2 can shoot the 3-pointer or dribble-penetrate the baseline. Meanwhile #4
screens off the middle defender in the zone, and you now have a two-on-one situation with #2
driving to score, or dish off to #5 (Diagram B). Your screener (#4) must be aware of his/her
position and the three-second violation, but if the initial screen is set above the free-throw line,
#4 could release up the middle for the pass and shot also (Diagram C).

Here is yet another way, again attacking from the corner. See the diagrams below. Set your
#3 and #4 on the blocks and #5 at the free-throw line. Use a two-guard front (Diagram A). #1
draws the trap and just before the trap arrives, passes into the corner to #4 who has cut out to
the corner. #5 now dives to the ball-side block looking for the pass (Diagram B). If the pass to
the block is not open, usually #2 will be open for the skip pass on the opposite wing (Diagram
C). #2 can shoot the outside shot or pass into either #3 or #5 who should have good position
after pinning their defenders.

229
See also: Zone Offense

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

230
 Transition Offense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

"Transition" refers to the process of changing from defense to offense (transition offense), or
offense to defense (transition defense). Your transition offense can be a slow, walk-it-up-floor
transition, an aggressive fast break transition, or something in between. Each coach has to
decide which is best for his team and his personnel. Do you really want an up-tempo fast
game, especially if you have a strong half-court game with good post men, or if your guards are
not particularly quick, have trouble keeping the ball under control, or are inexperienced?

On the other hand, if your team is quick, with good, experienced ball handlers, an aggressive
up-tempo style has advantages.
1. The fast break can produce easy scores.
2. Pushing the ball up the floor quickly puts pressure on the opponent, and they will be
constantly worrying about getting back on defense. This thinking may cause them to be less
aggressive going for their offensive rebounds, and may keep their point guard from penetrating
(thinking he has to stay back to prevent the fast break).
3. An aggressive team attitude on offense will often carry over to your defense and rebounding.
4. An up-tempo game will favor the team that is well-conditioned. A poorly conditioned team will
"run out of gas" by the fourth quarter.
5. The fast-break will often break the opponent's press defense.
6. A team that plays up-tempo will usually use more of its bench players, with frequent
substitutions. This often creates good team harmony with many players getting playing time. An
up-tempo game will favor the team with a "deep bench", with many good substitute players.
7. The players and fans enjoy a well-played up-tempo game.

Transition Offensive Concepts

The most important rule to inculcate in your players' minds is to always keep under control. You
don't want your fast-breaking style to result in turnovers and missed opportunities to score.
They have to learn to recognize when to push the break, and when to slow down and stay
under control. They must learn not to force bad passes. Some teams like to push the break
every opportunity they can (after a steal, defensive rebound, an opponent's score, etc). Some
teams only push it up after a steal or a score, or only certain times of the game.

Although this is very basic, young players learning the game must be taught how to transition
from defense to offense. Kids must be taught that when an inside, tall player gets a defensive
rebound, he/she should immediately look to pass to a guard, a good ball-handler, to get the ball
up the court, even if you are playing a slow-down game. Teach your ball-handlers that on every
defensive rebound, they must move into a position quickly where the rebounder can pass to
them. Coaches often assume kids know this, but like every other fundamental in the game, it
must be taught. Re-bounders should be taught to take care of the ball after a defensive
rebound and make a clean, simple pass to a guard. So often, I see kids work hard for the
rebound, only to lose it with a careless outlet pass. Impress your kids that the opponent is often
"lurking around" to steal those outlet passes.

Also, some coaches like to assign the same person (usually a post player with good passing
skills) to be the inbounds passer each time a basket is made, or the ball is out-of-bounds. The
post players should be taught to get down the floor and allow spacing and room for the guards
to bring the ball up.

Running the primary fast break

There are different ways of running the transition offense, but most methods use the idea of
filling three lanes coming up the floor, a "trailer", and a "prevent" person (diagram A). The
guards, or small forward should run the three lanes. One lane is straight up the middle of the
floor, and the other lanes are along each sideline. Some coaches feel that it doesn't matter

231
which player is in which lane, but just fill each lane position as quickly as possible and "go!".
Other coaches teach that the outlet pass always goes to the point guard (the team's best ball
handler) in the center, and the outside lanes, trailer and prevent position are assigned to
individual players, so each one knows his role. If the break doesn't develop, then just bring it up
slowly and avoid the turnover that can happen by getting the ball into the wrong person's
hands.

Preferably, the ball will be in the center lane, although the break can be run from the wing and
can be run with only two lanes filled (as after a quick mid-court steal). The center person should
dribble the ball all the way to the free throw lane, and should not make any unnecessary
passes prior to that point. The two outside lanes should cut at 45 degrees to the hoop for a
pass from the point, and the lay-up. If the point guard pops the free throw jumper, the wings
should crash the boards for the rebound. If neither happens, the wings should cross under the
basket and fill the opposite corner or wing, and the point guard should move to the right side of
the free throw circle. Next the "trailer" should cut through the left side of the lane, expecting the
pass. The "prevent" player should come up the floor slowly, making sure no opponents are
behind him. He prevents the opponent from taking it to the hoop should they steal or intercept
the ball. If nothing develops from the break, the team then flows into its usual half-court
offensive set.

Starting the break

Coaches differ on how to start the break off a defensive
rebound. Some prefer the outlet pass to go to a guard out
on the wing (free throw line extended). This guard can
either pass to the other guard who is filling the center lane,
or dribble quickly and fill the center lane himself.

Other coaches teach getting the outlet pass directly to the

point guard in the center of the floor. If you can get this
pass through, this is certainly the fastest and easiest way
to get the break going, and avoids a dangerous pass to the
wing, and a centering pass. It also gets the ball into the
hands of your best ball-handler. The point guard should
come to the pass, pivot and start the speed dribble up the
floor, while the other guard and small forward fill the
outside lanes.

A successful fast break depends on:

1. Getting the defensive rebound.
2. A good, quick outlet pass.
3. Filling the lanes.
4. Maintaining control. "Be quick, but never hurry."
5. Recognition. Don't force the break or pass if it is not
there.
There are several drills that will help your transition offense.
See Transition Offense Drills, 4 on 4 Transition, Pitch 'n Fire, Rebound-Outlet-Break Drill

Secondary Fast Break

When the primary fast break is not possible, consider using a secondary break. Having a
secondary break is often helpful in getting quick baskets in transition, before the defense can get
down the floor. Also a good secondary break can flow directly into your half-court offense. A
good use of the secondary break is after the opponent scores, and we inbound the ball quickly
and get it moving up the floor. See "Secondary Break" and "Coach Sar's Secondary Break".

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

232
 Secondary Break, Transition Offense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Read also: "Transition Offense" and "Press Break".

Here is a secondary fast break, when the primary fast break is not possible. You can use this to
transition quickly after the opponent scores, or after getting possession by either a rebound or
steal. The idea is to push the ball up the floor as quickly as possible, before the defense can
get set. You can even use this as a press breaker if you get it in quickly, before the press has
time to get set.

After the opponent scores

(See diagram A)
The keys are: get the ball out of the net quickly and pass in-bounds immediately to the point
guard (#1), your best ball-handler. #2 and #3 sprint down the sidelines into the forecourt. #1 will
either speed dribble the ball up the floor, or make the long pass to #2 or #3. Then there are a
number of options as outlined below.

#5 always makes the in-bounds pass, and after a made basket, should quickly get the ball out
of the net (don't wait for it to hit the floor), step out-of-bounds, and quickly get the pass into #1.
Don't waste time and let the defense get their press set. Notice how the floor is spread, with
#1 and #2 on the right, and #4 and #3 on the left. #2 and #3 should get down the floor. #4 plays
opposite of #1. #5 will be the trailer coming down the floor last. #4 will cut to the ball-side block.
#5, the trailer, comes last and goes to the opposite side elbow. There are many options
depending on what the point guard finds open.

The options are:

1 all the way
If nobody stops her, #1 can take it all the way to the free
throw line for a nice 3-on-1 break.

1 to 2
1 passes long up the side to 2, who takes it to the hoop.

1 to 3
1 passes long to 3, who takes it to the hoop.

1 to 4
1 passes long to 4 (going to the ball-side block), who takes it
to the hoop.

1 to 5
1 passes to the trailer 5, at the elbow.

1 to 2 to 4
1 passes to 2. 2 passes to 4 down on the low block.

1 to 2 to 5
1 passes to 2. 2 passes to 5 at the elbow.

1 to 2 to 5 to 3
1 passes to 2. 2 passes to 5 at the elbow, and 5 passes to 3
cutting to hoop.

If nothing develops, then flow into your half court offense.

233
 After a rebound

(See Diagram B)
Everyone goes for the defensive rebound. As soon as the
rebound is secured, #2 releases up the right side-line, #3
sprints up the left side-line, and #1 comes to the top, ball-side
for the outlet pass. Usually the defensive guard that plays
“back on defense” will back-pedal to the center of the court. By
having #2 and #3 wide on the side-lines, you should be able to
get the pass down floor.

#1 pushes the ball up the floor, or can make the long pass to
either #2 or #3.

#4 runs the same pattern as in diagram A, and #5 becomes the

trailer again. You could reverse the roles for #4 and #5,
depending on who gets the rebound... allowing the re-bounder
to be the trailer.

The patterns and options are the same in both situations, so it

is not difficult to learn this secondary break.

Also see “Coach Sar’s Secondary Break”.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

234
 Coach Sar’s Secondary Break
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by:
Coach Ken Sartini (aka "Coach Sar"), Arlington Hts, IL.

Having a secondary break is often helpful in getting quick baskets in transition, before the
defense can get down the floor. Also a good secondary break can flow directly into your half-
court offense. A good use of the secondary break is after the opponent scores, and we
inbound the ball quickly and get it moving up the floor. See also Transition Offense, Secondary
Break #1.

Below is a secondary break that Coach Sar used with his high school teams. I like it because:
(1) it may result in some quick lay-ups by pushing the ball up the floor.
(2) even if the defense gets back in position, several good half-court scoring opportunities are
possible.
(3) this secondary can flow easily into your half-court offense.

Now see Diagrams A and B below. The outlet (or inbounds pass) should go quickly to your
point guard #1. #2 and #3 sprint up the sidelines, both looking for the long pass from #1. #1
should try to get the pass to either wing as soon as possible, and if the defense is not back, the
wing may be able to attack the hoop for a quick lay-up. #5 moves to the ball-side block and #4
moves to the top of the arc opposite #1. #2 can look to pass into #5 on the low post. Anytime
in this series below that the ball is on a wing with a low post player, there is the possibility of a
two-man game. If this pass isn't possible, #2 reverses the ball (Diagram C) to #1 and then to
#4. #5 sets a screen for #2. #2 makes the flex cut around #5's screen and #5 the opens up to
the ball.

Now look at Diagram D below. If the pass to #2 (coming off the flex cut) is not there, then #3
sets a down-screen for #2 and #2 cuts to the three-point arc looking for the pass from #4 and
the possible three-point shot.

Now see Diagram E. As the pass is made to #2 on the wing, #5 drags his/her man toward the
elbow, and #3 sets a diagonal back-screen for #5. #5 makes the basket cut looking for the
pass from #2 (Diagram F).

235
See Diagram G below. #2 can pass back out to #4 and you can now run a hi-lo option with #4
and #5.

Or you can flow directly into your half-court offense. Diagram H shows how simple it is to move
into a 4-out, 1-in set with #3 simply moving out to the corner.

Diagram I shows one way to move into a 3-out, 2-in set with #4 setting screens for #1 and then
#3. #4 then ends up at the right low block, while your point guard is at the top of the key and
#3 is on the right wing.

236
 Beating the Full Court Press
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Full court press defenses try to get turnovers and easy baskets by pressuring, trapping, and
harassing the offense. There are several principles and some strategies in beating this
pressure.

Stay calm. The press tries to upset you, and make you commit turnovers. Try to be calm and
confident that you can beat this. If you make a mistake, you must immediately forget it and stay
calm. Otherwise, they may get three more steals from you, like a snowball effect. Do not dwell
on what's already happened always think "next play", what is going to happen next. The coach
must stay calm too. An upset, angry coach is not what the already rattled players need. In a
time-out, the coach must be calm, reassure, re-focus his players, and settle his players down.

Think "attack!". A full court press is always a gamble for the defense. If you think positive, and
attack the pressure, you can get an easy lay-up and score. So when you see a press coming at
you, ATTACK! Think of it as something to beat, to get an easy score... make 'em pay!

Three "looks".
1. Look up. See the floor. Look up the court. Don't look down at the ball.
2. Look before you pass. Make good, quick safe passes.
3. Look before you dribble. Don't dribble unless you have to. You beat the press by quick,
sharp passing usually not dribbling.

Avoid "trap areas"... the corners. Don't dribble into one of the trap areas (see below)... back
away but keep your dribble alive, or pass off.
Getting the ball in-bounds. Get the ball in quickly, before the defense can set up. Make sure
you make a good in-bounds pass. Do not take the ball out from directly under your basket, or
your passing lane may be restricted by the backboard. If the other team has just scored, you
may "run the baseline". You cannot run the baseline if the ball went out of bounds and the
official is handing it to you. You must stay where the ref gives it to you. If the ref doesn't handle
it (like after a score), you can use the whole baseline.

Quick, accurate passing. You must look and find the open man immediately, and make a quick,
accurate pass. Avoid soft, lob passes. Passing up the floor, and cutting, are the secrets to
beating the press. Look up the floor and anticipate where you will pass the ball, even before
you get it.

Receivers meet the pass... go to the ball, get open. But keep your spacing. Look for the open
spots in the defense. Get open so your teammate can pass to you. Before you even get the
ball, look to see where other open teammates are, so you will know where to pass to
immediately. When you receive the ball, don't have your back turned. Immediately pivot and
face down-court, so you can find an open teammate.

Use the whole court and reverse the ball to the opposite side. Keep at least one player on the
"weak-side" to reverse the ball to the opposite side of the court.

237
This is one set you can use:

1 takes the ball out. 2 and 3 start at elbows

and cut hard. 1 passes to 2 or 3. After passing
in bounds, 1 steps into the middle, paint area.
5 should read the defense and either get open
in the middle, or along the ball-side baseline. If
2 gets the ball, and gets double-teamed, she
must immediately pass to 1, 3 or 5. If 1 gets
the ball back, she should look immediately to
reverse it to 3 on the left sideline, or to 5 in the
middle. If 5 gets the ball in the middle, she can
look for 4 down-court. Or look for 2 and 3
cutting hard down the sidelines for a pass back
from 5. The press is now beat and you should
"attack" and take the ball to the hoop if
possible.

Remember, stay calm, see the floor, pass quickly, make sharp cuts, and "ATTACK!"

Avoid the corners (yellow).

If you get trapped in the blue

zones, you risk the 10 second call.

The red zones are just like getting

caught in the yellow corners... you
are trapped by the sideline and the
center line.

Another way to beat the press is to use the "secondary" fast break (see "Secondary
Break"). Get the ball in quickly before the press is set defensively, then a good long pass
up the sideline and you've got a lay-up.
See also: "Transition Offense", "Beat the 1-2-1-1 Press"

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

238
 Beating the 1-2-1-1 Full Court Press
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

First see "Beating the Full Court Press" for general pointers on how to beat the press.

How you attack the 1-2-1-1 zone press to some extent depends on your personnel. Realize
that the 1-2-1-1's weakness is up the sideline at mid-court. You can use a 1-2-2 setup. The two
on the free throw line can be side by side or in a stack formation. Have two at half court, near
the sidelines. You often like to go up the middle against the press, but in this case, always have
a receiver along the ball-side sideline near mid-court. The point guard will look to the middle
and the ball-side sideline for the pass.

1. Have one of your post players take the ball out as quickly as possible after a made basket.
Have the same player take it out each time and make sure he knows that this is his
assignment. He should get the ball out of the net before it hits the floor and make the in-bounds
pass quickly. Don't let the press defense get set.

2. Try to get the ball into the hands of your best dribbler and passer. If your point guard can get
the ball in the middle, this is preferred because then he can either dribble, pass up the middle
or to the left side, or dribble and draw the defense and dish off. But often the center pass is not
possible, so let's say he cuts toward the right corner. Teach him to look immediately to the
middle, or up the right sideline for the quick pass, and not dribble with his head down into a
trap.

3. The forward at half court who is opposite the ball-side comes toward the ball in the middle for
the pass. He is a good target for a pass because he is moving toward the ball. If you pass to a
guard moving away from the ball, you often get intercepted. The ball-side forward at half court
should be in position to receive the pass along the sideline (see diagram). Once he(#3) gets it
in the middle, he should pivot and face up-court and look to pass to #2 cutting up the left
sideline, #5 on the right sideline, or back to the point guard cutting up the right sideline. Once
you get those passes back to the sideline cutting guards, it’s a lay-up!

4. OK, the middle pass is covered and you can't get it there... look up the ball-side sideline and
pass to #5. You'll notice that usually one defender will cover both #3 and #5 and will straddle
between them. Teach you passer to make a quick pass fake to one, and then pass sharply to
the other. The pass fake will get the defender leaning one way, and will open up your intended
passing lane.

5. If nothing is open, you may have to outlet back to #4 in the paint who passes either to #2 on
the left side, or #3 in the middle, or maybe back to #1 on the right sideline. You usually don't
want #4 dribbling unless he is one of those exceptional big men who has good ball- handling
skills. So assuming he's not a great ball-handler, teach him to look first to make the quick pass
left, and not put the ball on the floor and start dribbling as so many kids do.

6. The defense may change to a 1-2-2 by bringing their "prevent" man up to help cut off the
sideline passes. In this case, the middle might be more open, and the defense is more
susceptible to getting beat by the long pass.

Another way of beating the full-court press is to use your secondary press break (see
"Secondary Break"). Also see “Press Break Passing Drill”.

239
Also see "1-2-1-1 Press Breaker" for yet another way to beat this press. Also take a look at the
"4-Across Press Breaker".

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

240
 1-2-1-1 Press Breaker
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by:
Jeff Randich
Girls' Basketball Coach
Olympia High School
Olympia, Washington

Here is another way to beat the 1-2-1-1 full-court press. Also see "Beat the 1-2-1-1 Press" and
“4-Across Press Breaker”.

#5 is the in-bounder. Usually the defense will try to deny #1 the ball. So #1 acts as a decoy
and cuts into the lane, drawing two defenders with him. #2 goes long to the front-court, top of
the key area. Having #2 go long usually gives you a speed-quickness advantage as your #2
will usually be quicker than their #5 playing back. #3 and #4 setup up initially at the sideline
hash marks, make a fake toward the ball, and drop back for the "over the top" pass. #5 can
pass to either #3 or #4. Meanwhile, #2 cuts to the ball-side sideline. In Option #1, #3 receives
the pass, and passes up the court to #2. Now you have a 2-on-1 situation with #4 sprinting up
the opposite sideline. If the deep defender (#5) denies the sideline pass to #2, then #3 can
look to pass diagonally to #4 up the right side (Option #2).

241
 Four Across Press Breaker
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net
Here is one way to beat the full-court press. Use this four across setup.

Option #1
#3 fakes in and then cuts long. #2 and #4 set a double screen for #1. #1 runs his defender into
the screen and cuts through the lane to the opposite elbow and receives the in-bounds pass.
Meanwhile, after screening, #2 slides down into the weak-side short corner as another in-
bounds pass option. #4 releases to the weak-side half court. After your point guard (#1)
receives the in-bounds pass, he dribbles up the floor, looking to pass to either #3 or #4.

Option #2
#5 can run the baseline and the in-bounds pass goes to #2. #2 looks to pass to #1 or #4.
Option #3
#4 comes back to the top of the key to receive the in-bounds pass. #4 looks for #2 and #1
cutting, or #3 long.
"Four Fly"
This is a set play for when you only have a few seconds left on the clock. This time #1 cuts
over the top of the double screen. As soon as #1 rubs shoulders with #4, #2 takes off on a "fly
pattern" for the long pass from #5. #3 should be moving up the floor as well and could receive
the pass from #2. #5 should make sure that he has a clear pass and is not blocked out by
being directly under the backboard.

242
Simplified Version of the 4-Across Press Breaker
Oftentimes in basketball it is best to keep things as simple as possible. The above 4-across
press breaker will require some practice time. Below is a simplified 4-across press breaker that
I was actually able to teach my 16U girls team at a half-time break.

The line-up is a little different, and I think easier for the players to understand. The #1 and #2
line up on the inside and #3 and #4 are along the sidelines. Instead of a double screen, #2
sets a screen for #1 who receives the in-bounds pass from #5. Meanwhile, #3 and #4 make a
fake cut toward the ball and then break up the sidelines toward half-court. After #1 receives the
pass, she/he turns up the floor with just a couple quick dribbles and can probably pass to either
#3 or #4 up the sidelines. If #3 and #4 are covered on the sidelines, then #1 can probably just
dribble straight up the middle. If the defense collapses on her/him, then #3 or #4 should be
open.

If #1 is unable to get the in-bounds pass, then #2 should be open to receive it and also attack
the middle with the dribble, while looking for the pass to #3 or #4.

Here's another adjustment. If the defense is denying the sideline and the middle looks open, try
this scheme. #5 is the in-bounder and #1 and #2 screen and cut for the ball, same as above.
This time, #3 fakes going long up the sideline, and then cuts back hard to the middle. #4 goes
long. After #1 or #2 receive the inbounds pass, they look for #3 open in the middle and cut up
the sidelines looking for the pass back. If #3 is denied the pass, #1 or #2 can pass back to #5
who is used as the "reverse" person who can then pass up the opposite side or middle (usually
one of the other is open). See the diagram below.

243
244
245
You can use this simple press break to also attack the 2-2-1 zone press, where the defense is
denying the sideline pass, and the middle is open… see 2-2-1 Press Breaker.

Another Version of the 4-Across Press Break

See the diagrams below. This time #3 is the inbounder, your two best ball-handlers line-up on
both sides of the free-throw line, #4 is at ballside sideline, and #5 is at weakside sideline. #4
fakes long and v-cuts back hard to receive the inbounds pass. #1 and #2 fake a cut toward the
inbounder #3. #1 then cuts hard up the middle looking for the pass from #4. #2 is your second
cutter delaying his/her cut until #1 clears, and then looks for the pass from #4. If both #1 and
#2 are denied the pass, then #4 can pass back to #3 moving inbounds and #2 can move to the
weakside for ball reversal from #3. #5 breaks long and may occasionally be able to receive the
“home run" pass.

246
 2-2-1 Zone Press Breaker
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

For general advice on attacking the full court press, see "Beating the Full Court Press".

The 2-2-1 zone press attempts to deny the offense the sideline at the half court line. This press
could be the opponent's primary press, or could be an "adjustment" after you have beaten their
press up the sidelines a few times. Now they are trying to deny the sideline. So, like any other
situation in basketball, you take what they give you... you will attack up the middle.

Here is one way to attack the 2-2-1 zone press. Refer to the Diagrams below.

Use a 4-across set-up (Diagram A). #5 is the in-bounder. The two up front defenders will
probably make it difficult for your #1 or #2 to get the ball, but #2 should set a screen for #1
(Diagram B). #5 fakes a pass to #1 or #2 but instead makes the quick pass up the side to #3
(who initially breaks long and then v-cuts back to the ball). As the defense attempts to trap #3
(Diagram C), #1 should be open for the quick pass up the middle. #1 can then pass to #4
going up the opposite sideline. #4 should get past the #4 defender. If the #4 defender goes
man-to-man with #4, then #2 should be cutting up the left sideline for the pass from #1.

Now refer to Diagram D. If #1 is covered, then he/she should clear out and cut to the ball-side
sideline just beyond the half court line. #2 should cut toward the middle to receive the pass
from #3. Or #3 could pass to #1 up the ball-side sideline. Keep #5 back for a "safety" out pass
for #3. If the ball reverses back to #5, then #2 must stay back and get the ball from #5.

247
 Half-Court Press Breakers
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Teams will sometimes throw a half-court press at you, especially if they think your ball-handlers
are inexperienced and subject to committing turnovers. Steals at half-court can result in easy
transition lay-ups for the defense. The half-court press trap can look very intimidating to the
point guard bringing the ball up the floor, when he sees a wall of two or three defenders just
waiting for him. So how do you counteract this defense?

First, with any half-court press, try to push the ball up the floor as quickly as possible and beat
them before they get their defense set. Using a secondary break after the opponent scores is
oftentimes effective. #5 quickly gets the ball out of the net, and passes in quickly to your point
guard. Meanwhile #2 sprints up the right sideline and #3 sprints up the left sideline. Oftentimes,
#1 can hit either #2 or #3 with the long pass for the lay-up. See: Secondary Break.

But assuming the half court press is already set...

If it is a 3-1-1 half -court press... (see
Diagram A). Keep in mind that this press
is vulnerable to the pass up the sideline.
Have a player move up along each
sideline (#3 and #4), at about the top of
the key extended. Send one receiver
deep to keep their #5 defender from
cheating up. Your point guard should
dribble to commit two defenders, and #2
should slide to the sideline outside the #2
defender. Just before the trap arrives, #1
passes to either #2, #4, or across to #3.

Now see Diagram B. If the center

defender shifts to cover the ball-side
sideline (#3), then your opposite sideline
player should slide to the middle spot
vacated by the defender. #1 makes the
pass to the center (in this case #4) and #4
should immediately take it to the hoop with
the 2-on-1 situation with #5.

If it is a 2-2-1 half-court press... (see Diagram C below). Have your point guard attack the
middle if possible and draw the two defenders who are waiting to trap him. Just before the trap
arrives, he must make the pass to the open teammate. With a 2-2-1, have a tall receiver with
good hands (your "tight end") set up in the middle between the two "second tier" defenders.
Have #3 and #5 move quickly down into the opposite corners. Your point guard can pass to
the center, or to #3 or #5 in the corners. In fact, most half court presses are vulnerable down
low in the corners. Good accurate long passes over the defense into the corners will often beat
this defense. If the back defender starts cheating toward the corner, then the middle is open.
Another way to beat this press, is have your #2 set an outside screen on their #2 defender and
#1 can dribble around the screen up the right sideline. The #4 defender may slide over to stop
him, but #1 should be able to make the quick pass into the corner to #5, and then #5 and #3
have a 2-on-1 situation with their #5 defender.

248
If is a 3-2 half-court zone press...
(Diagram D). .. with three defenders across
the center line, and two at the top of the
key, again have your "tight end" in the
middle (#4) and one of your wings along the
ball-side sideline. Send one tall, good
receiver down deep, to the hoop. If the two
back defenders cheat toward outside, you
may find your deep receiver wide open for
the "over the top" pass to the hoop.
Sending a receiver deep will also help
commit at least one of the back defenders
to stay back, and allow your perimeter
passing lanes to stay open. By forcing one
defender to stay back, you have essentially
converted their zone into a 3-1-1, which you
know from above is easy to beat with the
sideline pass. Your point guard takes the
ball to one side and tries to commit two
defenders to him... then either the "tight
end" or sideline teammate will be open.

Against the 2-1-2 half court press...just put your players "where they ain't". Take a look at
Diagram A below. In this instance, make sure your #2, 3, 4 and 5 get up the floor as quickly as
possible. They must beat the point guard up the floor and get into the positions indicated in
diagram A below. Instruct and drill your point guard not to dribble into the trap at the half court
line. He has 10 seconds to get it across and he can take his time and look for the open
teammate to pass to. He must make the pass just as the double team is coming to him... he
draws the two defenders and then makes the pass to the side before the double team arrives.
Drill this pass, because this is the one that gets intercepted the most... no lazy soft lob passes
here. You may have to teach him to "look the defense off" and pass the opposite way to clear
the passing lane.

Go to next page…

249
For example, if he goes right with the pass...
either #2 or #4 should be open for the pass
(Diagram B). If the #4 defender cheats up
and covers #2, then your #4 should be wide
open in the corner for the pass. Then #5
cuts to the paint for the pass from #4 and
the lay-up. You can run the same thing on
the opposite side using #3 and #5 as
receivers.

If the #3 defender cheats toward the ball-

side, you can bring your #3 into the middle
for the pass.

By using this setup, your #1 is occupying

two defenders, their #3 is really covering no-
one, and their #4 and #5 have to try to cover
two players at the same time.

Your point guard has to learn to keep his head up, see the floor, be patient, stay calm and find
the open teammate with a good quick pass, just before the trap gets to him. Teach him to
avoid dribbling between two or three defenders, but stay patient and make the good pass. You
should work on this in practice. Teach your team that once the pass gets into your "tight end"
or up the sidelines, you should have cutters slashing to the hoop for a quick pass and lay-up.
Often your "tight end" can pivot, face the hoop and find the deep man wide open for the lay-up.

Once you get through their press line at half court, you've got them beat and should be looking
quickly for a lay-up, a quick score. After you burn 'em a few times, they'll drop the press.

If it is a 1-3-1 Half-Court Press... (see the diagrams)

Use a 2-1-2 offensive set. Have your two
guards flank the point defender. Have two
offensive players deep up the side-lines
flanking the one deep defender and beyond
the three-across defenders.

Have your ball-handler O1 dribble a little

toward one side to try to get the point
defender and the zone to commit to that
side. He can make the pass over-the-top of
the zone up the sideline, or he can quickly
make the reverse pass to the opposite
guard who is still behind him (neither have
crossed the 10-second line yet). Now O2
can look for the pass up his sideline, or
dribble penetrate if the zone is shifted out of
position. They may try to trap here so he
needs to learn to pass up the side quickly
before the trap arrives.

250
If the middle back defender (X5) slides over to the sideline to prevent that pass, then have your
middle player O5 drop to the basket in the middle and hit him with the pass over the top. A
couple lay-ups later and they'll drop the press. Another option... if X3 and X4 attempt to trap
O2, then O5 can slide to that sideline for the pass from O2 (Diagram D).

If it is a 1-1-2-1 Half Court Trap...

When attacking a this half court trap, make sure two of your players get down the floor into your
forecourt before the ball the point guard arrives, and they should get deep up the sidelines,
beyond the deep defender. With this trap alignment, the opponent is trying to get your point
guard to commit first, either to the right or left. One option would be for the point guard to delay
before crossing the half court line and make the long over-the-top pass to either corner.
Another option would be to have the two remaining players even with him (#2 and #3), and on
both sides of him (right and left) as he crosses the line. The point can make the quick pass to
either side, and then the pass goes quickly from that side straight up the sideline to the player
deep in that corner. Once the ball gets into the corner areas, have your wings cut thru looking
for the pass back and lay-up. Now, one other thing... if the initial pass from the point goes to
one side, then have the opposite side player (not the opposite corner player) cut to the middle
looking for a pass there in case the middle defender cheats to the ballside. There might even
be an occasion when the player with the ball on the side may have to make the deep, skip pass
to the opposite corner, which should always be open... just make sure you've got someone who
can accurately make that pass, and with some zip on the pass... no floaters please!

You can also screen the deep zone

defender... pin him so he can't move to
either the sideline or down low.

Then cut your opposite deep corner

player to the ballside for the pass and
layup. This screen and cut must be done
quickly... before #2 gets trapped. The
cutter should be in position almost as #2
gets the ball, so he can make the pass
quickly before the trap arrives (see the
diagram).

If it is a 1-2-1-1 Half Court Trap...

See the diagrams below. When attacking this half court trap, make sure three of your players
get down the floor into your forecourt before the ball the point guard arrives. #3 and #4 get
deep up the sidelines. Have #5 get in the middle of the zone on the same side as the guard
who does not have the ball (the intended receiver of the first pass #2)... he can screen and get
ballside position on the middle defender (see diagram). You can also screen the deep zone
defender... pin him so he can't move to either the sideline or down low. Then cut your opposite

251
deep corner player to the ball-side for the pass and layup. This screen and cut must be done
quickly... before #2 gets trapped. The cutter should be in position almost as #2 gets the ball, so
he can make the pass quickly before the trap arrives (see the diagrams below).

One last tip...

If your point guard is small and having difficulty getting his/her passes intercepted by the taller
defenders, try this. Have one of your taller players (who is a good passer), say back with your
point guard in the back-court, and along one of the sidelines. Just before the point guard
reaches the half court line, he passes sideways to his taller teammate who makes the quick
pass up the floor. Encourage this post player to pass and not attempt to dribble (especially is
he/she is not accustomed to dribbling in the open court).

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

252
 1-3-1 Motion Offense, "1"
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Run this motion offense against a man-to-man defense. Also read “Motion Offense Concepts”.

Use a 1-3-1 set. #1 is at the point, #2 and #3

are on the wings, #5 is high post and #4 is low
block (see diagram A).

#1 starts the play on either side by passing to

either #3 or #2. #4 goes to the opposite block
from the ball (see diagram B). #5 sets pick for
#1. #1 cuts around the pick on the ball side. #3
can pass to the cutting #1 who can take it for
the lay-up or shot.

If #1 does not get the pass, he/she continues

through and sets pick for #4 (Diagram C). #4
then cuts to the ball-side block to post up.
Meanwhile, #5 drifts back to the free throw
line, and #2 rotates out to the point.

#3 tries to pass to #4. #4 then makes a post

move for the shot. If #4 shoots, #1 should get
into rebounding position on the opposite side.
If the ball is passed out, #1 goes out to the
right wing.

Options:
#3 can pass to the cutting #1, or to the posting
#4, or to #5 at the free throw line, or back out
to #2. Or #3 can take an open shot.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

253
 1-3-1 Motion Offense, "2"
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Run this motion offense to run against a team who likes to switch between man-to-man and 2-
1-2 (or 2-3) zone defenses. Also read Motion Offense Concepts.

#1 is at the point, 2 and 3 are on the wings, 5 is

high post and 4 is low block (see diagram A). It
may be helpful to have a good 3-point shooter
playing 4, as 4 may get the 3-point corner shot.

Try to overload the zone. #1 starts the play on

either side by passing to either 2 or 3. 4 sprints
to the ball-side corner (see diagram A).

Next (Diagram B), #2 passes to 4 in the corner

and cuts through looking for a pass back from 4.
If 2 does not receive the pass, she goes on
through to the opposite side and fills the #3 spot.
#1 should rotate over to the 2 (right wing)
position, and 3 should now rotate to the 1
position at the point.

5 waits until 2 has cleared through. If 2 does not

get the ball, 5 then cuts down to the low block
for a pass from 4.

The zone on the right side is now overloaded,

and there are now 2 on 1 offensive opportunities

Now the offensive options are:

Diagram C.
4 can shoot the 3 pointer, or drive, or pass to 5
down on the block, or pass out to 1 on the right
wing.

#1 could then shoot, or hit 2 with a back door

pass, or reverse it back out to 3 on the point.

254
Reverse the ball
If there are no good options, reverse the ball
quickly to the opposite side. 4 passes to 1,
who passes quickly to 3, who then passes to
2.

By this time, 5 should be back up to the high

post position (free throw line). 4 should
always follow the ball to the ball-side corner
(Diagram D).

Diagram E. Now #2 passes to 4, and cuts

through. If she doesn't get the pass, she
goes to the right wing position. 1 and 3 rotate
back to the left. If 2 doesn't get the pass, 5
waits and cuts through to the block.

Diagram F. Now you have all the same

options, except now on the left side. 4 can
shoot or drive, or pass to 2 or 5 cutting
through, or pass back to 3 on the left wing. 3
could step up for a shot or hit 2 back door on
the right, or pass out to 1.

255
 1-3-1 Motion "3"
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net
This play starts from the 1-3-1 set. This is triple option play, or "3". Also read Motion Offense
Concepts.

First Option:
#1 at the point, passes to 2, and cuts
around 4.
2 passes to 1 for the lay-up if 1 is open.

Second Option:
If 1 is not open, she clears out and cuts
around 5. At the same time, 4 breaks to
the hoop. 2 passes to 4 for the lay-up, if 4
is open.
3 swings out to the point for two reasons:
to protect against the other team's fast
break, and for the outlet pass for the next
option

Third Option:
If 4 is not open, she moves over to the post-
up low block position. She can post-up there
and 2 can still try to get the ball to 4.

If 4 is not open, 2 passes out to 3 at the

point. 5 screens for 1 and 1 cuts hard around
5's screen, and gets the quick swing pass
from 3. 5 moves to the high post.

1 takes the outside shot, which could be a

two or three pointer, depending on where she
spots up, and which shot she is comfortable
with.

There are actually a number of other options. 2 could take the outside shot if open, or cross-
over dribble and drive to the paint once 4 clears. 3 could take the outside shot if she is open.
Once 1 cuts around 5's screen, 5 cuts to the high-post (free throw line) to get a pass from 2 or
3. She could then shoot, drive or pass off to a wing, or down low to 4.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

256
 Play "23" (or "32")
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This is a simple "give and go" play to either side of the floor.

Setup:
#1 is at the point, 2 and 3 are on the wings,
5 and 4 are the post players.

1 starts the play by passing to either 2 or

3... can run this right or left.

5 stays on the block opposite the ball side.

4 cuts to the ball-side corner.

2 passes to 4 in the corner, and then makes

a quick, sharp cut to the basket, and gets
the pass from 4

If the defensive player guarding 5, picks her

up, 2 then dishes to 5.

If #2 does not receive the ball, then she

sets a pick for #5, who cuts to the ball-side
block for the pass.

1 rotates over to the 2 spot, and 3 rotates

out to the point.

Remember, this can be run either direction, left or right. The first pass from the point guard
determines the direction of the play, and #5 should remember to be on the block opposite the
ball, and 4 goes to the ball-side corner.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

257
 Isolation "2"
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The defense is in man-to-man. Let's suppose your #2 wing player is your best scorer and
offensive threat. You want to get the ball in her hands, and give her the chance to beat her
defender one on one. You can run this simple isolation play. Essentially, you have three of your
players move off to the left side of the court, resulting in a "clear-out" for #2 on the right side.
See Diagram A. Now you have several options.

1. Diagram A. The point guard (#1) can

pass directly to #2, who can then shoot
the 3-pointer, or execute a drive move
to the hoop (see Outside Moves).

2. Diagram B. Another option is to have

#2 make a jam-down, V-cut move back
out to receive the ball for the shot or
drive. To execute this, #2 walks her
defender down to the block, and then
makes the sharp, quick V-cut back out
to receive the pass for either a two or
three-point shot.

3. Diagram C. After making a couple of

outside shots off option #2 above, the
defender will be looking to deny the
pass on the V-cut. So this time #2 does
the same jam-down, V-cut as described
in option 2. But this time, she signals
the point guard that she is going "back-
door" (use a hand signal), and makes
the quick back-door cut after the V-cut.

On any of these options, it the

defenders on #4 or #5 come over to
help on #2, then dish the pass off to
your #4 or #5 player going to the hoop.

Also, #'4 and #5 should be looking for

the weak-side rebound when #2
shoots.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

258
 Back-Door Play "Baseline 3"
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This is a simple back-door play. The low post player running the baseline (5), sets a weak-side
screen for the opposite wing (3). We use the label "baseline 3" because it tells our players that
our baseline low-post is going to pick for 3, and because the defense might erroneously think
that "baseline 3" might mean a 3-point shot from the corner.
Diagram A. Setup: Diagram B. 1 passes to 2, while 4 comes to
#1 is at the point, 2 and 3 are on the wings, 5 the ball-side elbow. 2 will pass to 4 at the
is low post and 4 is high post. elbow.
3 slides down toward the corner. The Meanwhile, the baseline post player (5),
defender may think she is looking for the 3- sprints over and sets a pick for 3.
pointer there.

Diagram C. 3 cuts hard around the screen to the
hoop. 4 pivots quickly and passes to 3 coming in
the "back door". Or the pass can go directly from 2
to 3.
2 slides toward the hoop for either the rebound, or
a dish from 3.
1 stays on the point to be back on defense, and
also, if the play fails, she could get the pass back
from 4 for an open 3-point shot.
Diagram D. Option on the screen.
If the yellow #5 defender switches and
goes with 3, then 3 clears out, #5 has
inside position on the screen and seals the
defender and cuts to the hoop for the
pass.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

259
 "Slip"
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This play starts off as a simple screen and wing cut-through, but there's more to it!

See Diagram A.
#1 is at the point, and starts the play. 1 passes to 3 and screens away for #2. 5 moves out to
the ball-side corner. #2 cuts through. If open, 3 could pass to 2.

See Diagram B.
As 1 is setting the pick for 2, 4 comes up and sets a pick for 1.

After 2 has cleared through, 1 cuts off 4's screen and "slips through " to the hoop, and gets the
pass from 3 for the lay-up. If 4's defender switches to cover 1, then 1 should clear out to the
right corner and now, if 4 sealed the defender off correctly (when she made the screen for 1),
she should have inside position for the roll cut through the lane and the pass from #3.

2 continues through and sets a pick for 5, who is also an option. 2 then rolls off the screen for
the three-point option in the corner.

This play features two picks, and usually the defense will not defend the second pick. They will
defend the first cut by 2, then relax, thinking they have the play stopped. It's at this point that 1
will make the hard cut and get the lay-up.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

260
 1-4 Stack
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The 1-4 tends to "flatten" the defense. Here's just one play off that set.

Setup:
#1 is at the point, 2, 3,4 and
5 stack across, at the free-
throw line extended.

1 dribbles left.

4 drops down to the left block

area. And 5 slides down next
to 4, to set a double screen.

2 moves a little toward the

top to receive the pass from
1 (diagram c).

3 cuts baseline around the

double screen.

1 passes sharply back to 2.

2 passes to the cutting 3

down on the block for the
easy lay-up.

If 3 does not get the pass, 5

flashes to the high post and
3 moves out to the right
corner. A 2 to 5, or a 2 to 5
to 4 play are then options.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

261
 1-4 High Post Pick and Roll
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Use this if the defense is in man-to-man. This is a simple high post pick and roll where the pass
goes to the player rolling off the screen.

Setup: (blue = offense, red = defense)

#1 is at the point, 2, 3,4 and 5 stack across, at

the free-throw line extended.

1 calls the play and starts to dribble to the right

to clear a passing lane for himself. A jab step
to the right or a pass fake to the right might
work as well.

#4 sets a pick for 5 and seals the #5 defender.

5 cuts around the pick. 4's defender will

probably switch and go with 5 on the cut.

5 takes the #4 defender with him to the

baseline (out of the way and out of the paint).

4 now has inside position on the #5 defender

and cuts to the hoop, for the lob pass from 1.
Make sure your players know correct
screening techniques.

See Setting Screens.

See Pick Drill.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

262
 1-4 Stack, Post-Point Pick ‘n Roll
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Use this if the defense is in man-to-man. This play uses a simple high post screen for the point
guard, and then the seal and roll by the screener. The same side wing slides to the corner to
clear his defender out, and also for the outlet pass to the corner (3-point shot).

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

263
 1-4 Stack Low
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

“Pinball”
This play works well if you have an outstanding point guard (#1), and the defense is in man-to-
man.
Setup:
#1 is at the point.
Set the stack down low, with your best three point
shooters at the #2 and #3 spots, and your best
post players at the #4 and #5 positions.
Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.
Running the play:
Your outstanding point guard (#1), will try to drive
on his man. He may create his own shot, or as
the defense collapses on him, he dishes off to an
open teammate. This could be an open post
player, or an open corner 3-point shot. #2 flares
to the three-point line after the screen. #3 moves
out to the top and is the prevent man on defense.

Here's a play (below) that I saw the San Antonio Spurs run against the Nets in the NBA
playoffs. This play was designed to get the ball into the big guy (Tim Duncan) on the low post.

Start with a low stack with the post players inside (see Diagram A). #2 will split out to the
three-point arc and receive the pass from #1. Meanwhile, #4 sets a screen for #5. #5 cuts
around the screen to the ball-side low post looking for the pass from #2, and the shot.

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

264
“America’s Play”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by:
Coach Ken Sartini (aka "Coach Sar"), Arlington Hts, IL.

Coach Sar says he heard Coach Lou Henson describe this play at a coach's clinic as
"America's Play", because everyone in America runs it. When adapting this play to your team,
put your best shooters in the #2 and #3 positions.
See Diagram A.
#1 dribbles to the right wing (free-throw line extended
area).

Meanwhile #4 and #5 set a double, staggered screen

for your best shooter (#2). Notice that #2 first moves
inside to the low block area before making the cut
around the double screen. If open, he/she receives the
pass from #1 for the shot, either a two or three-pointer
(see Diagram B).

After #2 cuts around the screen, #5 moves to the ball-

side low block for either the quick-hitting pass from #1
or to post up. This is an especially good option if #5's
defender pops out on top to help with the screen for #2,
leaving #5 open.

But if #5's defender stays with him/her, then #5 moves

to the weak-side elbow, creating a "clear-out" for #1 to
dribble penetrate (see Diagram C). In fact, at the start
of the play, when #1 dribbles and reaches the wing
area... if at that point, he feels he can beat the defender
off the dribble, then he can take it straight to the hoop
for the lay-up, or dish inside, or kick out to the corner to
#3. But if your game situation calls for a three-pointer,
then #1 should pull up at the wing and look for the pass
to #2 coming off the staggered screen.

#3 is also a good outside shooter. As another option,

#1 can pass to #3. #3's defender may drop down to
help leaving #3 wide open in the corner. Also, earlier in
the play (before #5 moves to the low block), #3 could
come open on a back-cut to the hoop if his/her defender
is over-playing and denying the pass in the corner.

265
 Michigan
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

We run this play from our basic 3-out, 2-in motion offense. #1 is point guard, #2 and #3 are the
right and left wings, and #4 and #5 are the right and left low post players. This can be run in
either direction, right or left. The first pass from the point guard determines the direction of the
play.
Setup:
#1 calls "Michigan", and immediately the two
post players move up to the elbows and the two
wings drop down into the corners.

When everyone is set, #1 yells "Go" and #2 cuts

out toward the wing to receive the pass from #1.

The ballside post (#4) immediately moves over to

screen for the opposite post (#5), and to make
spacing for the cut by #1.

#1 makes the basket cut, looking for the pass

from #2. If the pass is not there, she moves out to
the opposite corner. #3 moves out to the point as
soon as #1 vacates the point.

#4 has set the screen for #5, but #5 delays until

she sees that #1 has already made her cut
through (otherwise if #5 leaves too soon, #1 and
#5 will collide, with no spacing). After #1 cuts
through, #5 cuts hard off the screen to the ballside
low block, looking for the pass from #2.

#2 has several options: pass to #1, pass to #5,

shoot the 3-pointer, or drive her man. If #5 does
not receive the pass, she can optionally set a
backscreen for #2

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

266
 “Ohio”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by:
Coach Ken Sartini (aka "Coach Sar"), Arlington Hts, IL.

This play works well if your point guard is receiving a lot of ball pressure out on top.

See Diagram A. #5 sets a high screen for #1, who dribbles

to the right wing, free-throw line extended area.

Meanwhile, #2 sets a diagonal screen for #4. #1 looks to

pass to #4 for the quick lay-up. If unable to get the quick
pass, then #4 will post up on the low block still looking for
the pass from #1 (see Diagram B).

#5 screens for #2, who comes off the screen looking for a
three-pointer.

#5 has two options... either to move to the opposite low

block, or step back toward the ball for the pass and short
jump shot. This is a good option especially if his/her
defender gives help on his last screen.

#1 has the option of passing to #4 on the low block, #5 at

the elbow, #2 for a three-pointer, or a skip pass to #3 for a
three-pointer. If nothing develops, you will end up in either
a 3-out, 2-in set, or a 1-3-1 and you can run your standard
motion from there.

#3 has to make sure that he/she is in a passing lane at all

times for a skip pass and possible three-pointer. If #3 is a
good outside shooter, he/she will like this role. Also #3 will
act like a decoy and initially drive his/her defender low.
Once #5 makes the last screen, then #3 flashes high.

267
 “Demon”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by:
Coach Ken Sartini (aka "Coach Sar"), Arlington Hts, IL.

Here's another play submitted by Coach Sar. As in any play, adjust the player positions on the
floor to fit your personnel. If you have a talented big man who can jump and get above the rim,
this play could result in an "alley-OOP", back-side dunk or lay-in (remember Michigan State
with Magic to Kelser?).

See Diagram A.

#1 dribbles into the forecourt with #5 trailing.

Meanwhile, #2 drives his man to the low block and
#3 runs baseline off a screen from #4.

#1 passes back to #5. #2 comes up the lane and

makes a hard cut out to the wing. It is important that
#2's cut takes him above the free-throw line
extended for a better passing angle for the eventual
lob pass.

See Diagram B. #4 moves up to the ball-side elbow

- free throw line area and will set a back-screen. #5
passes to #2, makes a V-cut and goes around #4's
back-screen to the hoop (weak-side). After #5 clears
the screen, #4 rolls off the screen down to the ball-
side block (see Diagram C). #1 replaces #5.

Here are the options:

1. The high lob, back-door pass to #5. The pass
goes above the rim to the backside of the hoop
where #5 can jump and either dunk it, or lay it in.
(This will take some practice between #2 and #5 to
perfect the timing and trajectory of the pass).

2. #2 can pass to #4 posting on the block.

3. #2 passes to #3 in the corner.

268
 Delay Spread Offense -- “Butter"
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This offensive half-court set is used when

we want to stall and take time off the
clock, or when we want to go for a last
shot, or when we want to go for only a
good, high percentage shot.

Also, if you have the lead and the

opponent changes to zone defense, this
can also be a counter strategy to get the
zone defense to come out and play man-
to-man. You can hold the ball until they
come out of their zone.

See the diagram. We use a basic "4-corner" setup with 2,4,3 and 5 on the corners, and the
point guard #1 is free to dribble, move around and cut inside the four corners.

The point guard #1 (the “chaser”) can dribble-penetrate the middle of the box, but as she picks
up a defender, or the double team comes, she should quickly dish the ball off to one of the four
corner players. The corner player can just hold the ball until challenged by a defender, or pass
to another corner player, or back to the point guard. All passes must be crisp and accurate and
high percentage. Do not throw across court into traffic, where it could be intercepted and taken
for the game-winning lay-up on the other end. When you pass, fake a pass one way, and pass
another. You can look the defender off to open the passing lane. If you are in trouble with a
double-team, or can't find someone to pass to, call a time-out (but you must know if you have
any time-outs left, otherwise it's a technical foul on you). If #2, #4, #3 and #5 are being guarded
closely and being denied the ball, #2 and #4 can screen and replace each other, and so can #3
and #5.

Here's a little tip that works sometimes for an easy lay-up. The point guard dribble-penetrates
the middle to the circle, but then pops back out with a pass to a corner. She gets the ball back
and does this a couple more times. Now the defense is expecting her to pass back out the next
time she goes in, and so they overplay for the pass... but this time she makes the hesitation
move and then the quick drive to the hoop for the easy lay-up. But it doesn't always work out
like this, so if the defender challenges the point guard's lay-up, she should just dribble it back
out or get it out to a corner... remember, only uncontested, easy lay-ups.

Rules of the "Butter" (or 4-Corners) Offense

A. "Chaser" (#1) rules.
1. When dribbling, pass before the double-team arrives.
2. Then, after passing, cut and get open to receive the pass back immediately.
3. If denied the pass back, then either make a basket cut to the hoop, or replace either
#2 or #3 in the corner.

B. Rules for the wings (#2 and #3).

1. Stay in the corners, about 6 feet from the sideline and the half-court line.
2. After receiving the pass, if not pressured, hold the ball until the defense comes and
pass back to #1.
3. If the pass to #1 is being denied, dribble inside and become the new "chaser" and
replace #1 who goes to the vacated corner.

269
C. Rules for the posts (#4 and #5).
1. If the pass goes to the opposite corner, the weakside post flashes to the ballside low
block. If the pass goes to #4 in the right corner, #5 should flash to the right low
block (Diagram B).
2. If a post player's defender goes to trap the chaser (#1), then cut to the basket
(Diagram C).
3. If the chaser or a wing is in trouble or stops her dribble, cut up the sideline to the
free-throw line extended level to receive the pass (Diagram D). If the post defender
overplays and denies this pass, then backcut to the hoop (Diagram E).

Situation 1, we have a small lead with only a minute to go in the game.

In this situation the only acceptable shot that is permitted is the uncontested lay-up. At this
point in the game, the concept that is very important for everyone to understand is: "The clock
is your enemy!" (Al McGuire, Marquette U National Champs). We have the lead and don't need
any more points or shots... we just have to keep the ball out of the hands of the opponent so
they can't score, as we run time off the clock. So then, you ask, why even shoot the
uncontested lay-up, because we could miss it and the opponent could get another possession.
Here's my thinking. I would shoot the uncontested lay-up because it's a 90 percent shot, and it
can put the "last nail in the coffin" for the opponent. Just trying to run "butter" and taking time
off the clock is not always a guarantee that we won't make a turnover, or that the defense won't
steal the ball. Also, they will foul us, and I would rather have an uncontested lay-up than a 1-
and-1, high-pressure free throw. It's all how you play the odds, and the uncontested lay-up is a
good bet. Coaches, this is the time to have your best ball-handlers and best free-throw
shooters in the game.

270
Situation 2, we are going for the last shot of a quarter.
You can also use "Butter" to stall the clock for the last shot of a quarter. When the coach yells
"Go" (usually about 10 seconds left), then the corners move in and you start working to get a
good shot off. If the shot is taken with about 4-5 seconds left in the period, it may give you time
for a quick rebound and a second shot, but not enough time for the opponent to take it all the
way down and get a shot. But don't foul going for the rebound, especially if the free-throw
bonus is on.

Situation 3, “soft butter”… it’s near the end of the game but we’re not quite ready to go
into a full delay.
We may be up by 8 points with 5 or 6 minutes left in the game. We do not want to go into a full
delay and lose sight of continuing to score. But we would like to be patient and run some time
off the clock. We may go into what we amusingly call our “soft butter” offense using the 4-
corners offense, but still looking for a good, high-percentage shot, or a chance to go to the free-
throw line. The defense may think we are in a full-delay, but when they least expect it, we will
attack the basket for a lay-up.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

271
 3-on-3 Plays
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

There are a lot of 3-on-3 tournaments out there that you can get into. Although, generally I'm
not a great fan of these events (no refs, street ball, injuries, lack of sportsmanship, etc), you
can use these events to perfect your motion offense screen, seal and roll plays. Then when
basketball season starts, these simple plays will be a part of your team game and "second
nature".

In 3-on-3 tournaments, play with teammates from your school team... players whose abilities
(strengths and weaknesses) you are already know and whom you will be playing with next
season. Learn to play together and "read" what each other is doing. Have fun and remember
your sportsmanship. These battles sometimes become heated and very personal... don't lose
your cool.

Strong defense and rebounding will win many of these games. Outside shooting is difficult on
windy days outdoors, or when looking into a bright sun... get the ball inside.

Parents... let the kids play. Nowadays I see parents coaching 3-on-3 teams! I think this is not
a good trend. Kids today have almost all their play-time structured by parents and coaches.
When I was a kid (long ago!), we would just get a bunch of kids together, choose up sides and
play. We worked out any close calls or differences of opinion on our own without a lot of fights
(because we all wanted to keep playing, and if we got into a fight, we were done). Kids need to
learn these skills in dealing with other kids and how to work things out. I believe they really
don't need parents yelling at them, or the other team, or (if there is one) the ref. Let them
coach themselves and see what they can come up with on their own... you might be surprised!
These events should just be fun things... not the world championships.

Having said all that, kids here's some simple pick (screen) plays that may work well for you.
First learn how to set a good screen and how to seal the person you screened, and then roll to
the open spot for the pass. Read this page on the proper way to set screenstting Screens
(Picks)tting Screens (Picks)tting Screens (Picks).

The secret to all these screen plays is this. Realize that the person setting the screen will often
be the person receiving the pass for the shot. So if you set a screen correctly, you may
actually be setting yourself up for an easy shot. After you set the screen, "seal" (box-out) the
person you are screening, so that you get inside position on him/her. Then when your
teammate cuts around the screen, he/she could be open for the shot, but chances are the
defense will "switch" and your defender will go with the cutter. Now if you have sealed (boxed-
out) correctly, you can step toward the hoop for the pass and shot. The other important
element is the cutter must "clear out" if he/she doesn't receive the pass, so you maintain
spacing.

Here are some simple, but very effective plays if run correctly. These plays are all part of any
motion offense that your school team might want to use, and you will find many of these same
plays on my motion options and motion offense drills pages.

272
Give and Go
The give and go involves a V-
cut by #2 to receive the ball, and
a fake step left and lane cut by
#1 for the pass and lay-up.

Pick and Roll

The pick 'n roll works if #2 seals
the #1 defender correctly.

Screen Away
#2 makes a V-cut to receive the
pass from #1. #1 passes to #2,
and "screens away" for #3 on
the opposite wing. #3 rubs off
the screen and cuts to the hoop.
Make sure that #3 waits for the
screen to arrive, and that #1
sets the correct angle on the
screen. Also, make sure that #1
seals the defender, and then
rolls to the hoop after #3 cuts
around the screen. #2 can pass
to either cutter.

Down-screen Curl and Pin

#2 sets a down-screen for #3.
The low post player (#3) curls
around the screen for the pass
and shot. #2 pins (seals) the #3
defender and gets inside
position. If the defense
switches, then #2 should be
open for the pass, assuming #3
clears out to the opposite side.
Work this on both sides of the
court.

273
 Back-screen and Pin
#5 (low post) comes up and sets
a back- screen for the wing (#3).
The wing cuts backdoor around
the screen to the hoop for the
pass and shot. #5 who has
screened the #3 defender,
"pins" the defender and gets
inside position. If the defense
switches, he/she (#5) should be
open after releasing to the hoop
for the pass and lay-up,
assuming that #3 clears out to
the opposite side.

Feed the Low Post, Defender

Behind
The wing player should to try to
make the pass to the low post
when the defender is playing
behind him/her. Once the pass
is made, the opposite post
should move to the high post, to
allow spacing for #4 to make the
post move on his defender. #2
can cut to the corner for the
"inside-out" pass and shot.

Defender Fronting the Low Post

#5 has to recognize this situation, and then flash to the ball-side high post position to receive
the pass from #1. #4 should "pin", or seal, his defender and get inside position for the bounce
pass (or high lob) from #5. The passing must be quick from #2 to #5 to #4. The other option
here is having #4 pin the defender and "step-off" toward the hoop for the high lob pass directly
from #2 to #4.

Double Low Post Pick and Seal

Use two post players working together, reading the defense, and screening for each other. #4
sets a screen for #5, who cuts around the screen for the pass and shot (option 1). #4 seals the
#5 defender. If the defense switches and #5 does not receive the pass, then #4 should be open
with inside position. (option 2).

274
 Opening Tip-Off Play
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Jump ball plays used to be more important when every jump ball was actually "jumped". Now
with the changing possession arrow, getting the opening tip is not a big advantage since you
will get the next possession anyway. If you have little chance of getting possession off the tip,
just set up around the circle in a defensive line-up (maybe even two guards back) and concede
the tip, but not a lay-up.

But, if you do have a strong advantage in getting the opening tip (a tall center or a good leaper
as your jumper), here's a play you can try to get off to a quick start. A quick lay-up in the
opening seconds can be a good psychological boost for your team. In a close game, little
things like one additional possession and two extra points can be the difference in winning and
losing.

See the diagrams below. Have your best jumper obviously jump center. Have your players
practice this against each other to find out who is the best “tipper”. Have a strong post player
(#4) line-up on the circle on the offensive end of the circle. Have two quick players (#1 and #2)
line up on opposite sides of the circle at the half-court line. One player (#3) stays back to
prevent the opponent's fast break.

As the ball goes up, #1 and #2 quickly release up the sides into the forecourt. Caution... if they
leave too soon, the ball will be awarded to the opponent. I believe this is a risk worth taking
because the refs won't usually make this call (and you get the breakaway lay-up). And, if the
call is made, the opponent gets the ball out-of-bounds on the sideline and you can either set up
your half-court defense, or attempt to pressure and steal the inbounds pass. You get the next
possession anyway, so it's not a big loss for the opponent be awarded the ball (especially if you
prevent them from scoring).

Back to the play... the ball is tipped to #4 who immediately pivots and passes quickly, or simply
"redirects" (tips) the ball to either #1 or #2. You now have a 2-on-1 fast break and a great
chance for the opening lay-up. #4 and #5 are "trailers" in the play. If the opponent gets the tip,
things make backfire on you, and everyone must sprint back on defense.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

275
 Sideline Out-Of-Bounds Play
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This sideline out-of-bounds play was contributed by Tracy Fontenot, who is the girls' coach at
Sacred Heart High School in Ville Platte, La. Tracy has been coaching girls varsity basketball
for 10 years. Thanks for your contribution Tracy!

This play has slight variations depend-

ing on whether you are against man-to-
man, or a zone.

Here is our basic setup:

#2 is our "shooter".
#5 our best rebounder.
#4 our best post player.

#2 screens down for #1, and then uses

the staggered screen set by #5 and #4
(screen the screener).
We want to get the ball to #2, our
shooter, either a direct pass from #3 or
from #1. #2 is looking for the shot or to
pass to #4 posting up (with #5 in
rebounding position). Or once #2 gets
the ball, you can have #5 flash high
and clear out for the lob to #4, or use
the high-low option.

VS 2-3 Zone
#2 screens down the same way for #1.
#1 must come to the ball (want to draw
the play-side guard (G) up to clear wing
area). #2 then curls under to wing area
using 4 screen on the forward (F). We
use the same options from there.

Vs 2-3 Zone Variation

We have used this option against the
zone and have been successful also
(especially when scouted on the 1st
option).

#2 screens down the same way for #1.

#1 must come up to the free throw line,
and then follows #2 on the baseline.
#2 basically clears out the baseline for
#1.

276
 Sideline Out-Of-Bounds Play #2
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This sideline out-of-bounds play uses a basic box formation. Have your best offensive guard be
the in-bounds passer, as he will be getting the return pass for the lay-up.

Use the box setup as in Diagram A. Your post players are at the elbows, and your wings (2 and
3) are on the low blocks.

When the play starts, 4 and 5 set picks down low for 2 and 3.
#2 and #3 cut off the screens to the 3-point area. The in-bounds pass goes to #3, while #2
serves as a safety valve and also stays back on defense.

After #3 receives the ball, #5 then moves out toward #1 and sets a backscreen for #1. #1 cuts
hard off #5's screen (on the baseline backdoor side) and goes to the hoop. #3 makes the pass
back to #1 for the layup. A second option would be the pass to #5, who seals and rolls off the
back-screen to the hoop.

If the pass is well-defended, #3 passes instead out to the point to #2, and #1 goes through and
fills the opposite wing, and you are in your half-court 3-out, 2-in offensive set.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

277
 Out-of-bounds play #1, or "Box"
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Remember that the most important thing in taking the ball out-of-bounds is
making a good pass inbound. Don't force a bad pass just to complete this play.

Call "Box"
Set up in the box formation as in Diagram A.

See Diagram B.
5 starts the play by yelling "go!". 3 v-cuts in and drops back for the outside pass, and safety.
2 sets pick for 1, so that 1 can cut to the left corner. 1 cuts to left corner and shoots if she gets
the ball.

See Diagram C.
4 moves over and sets pick for 2, and then 2 cuts hard to the basket on the right side of the
lane for the open lay-up (Diagram D)

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

278
 "Stack" Out-of-bounds Plays
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Here are some plays using the old "stack" setup. The most important thing is to make a good
pass in-bounds. Do not force a bad pass just to complete either of these plays.

"Stack 1" (see left diagram)

It's amazing how often I see this very simple play result in an easy lay-up for the 3rd player in
the stack! The first two players in the stack are good outside shooters and split right and left.
Usually the defenders will follow them. In the confusion, the 3rd player in the stack slips into the
space vacated by the first two, and surprisingly often, will be open for a simple lay-up. The 4th
player in the stack drops back for safety outlet. If the pass goes to the corner or to the point, #5
should slip into the low post for a quick pass back (see red arrows).

"Wheel"
Look at the diagram on the right above. The stack setup is identical to "Stack 1". But this time,
#1 curls around the stack first looking for the pass and shot, and clears to the opposite corner if
no pass occurs. #2 delays slightly after #1, and curls around the stack also, looking for the
pass and shot. After the curl cuts go by, #3 slides into the paint, and #4 moves out to the point.
If the pass goes to the point (#4), #5 should slip into the opposite low post for the quick pass
back from #4.

“Stack 2”. Here is another stack play. See Diagram A below. 4 starts the play by yelling "go!"
1 and 5 cut to the hoop (Diagram B). 3 picks for 2. 2 cuts to the middle of the paint. 4 can hit
early cutters 1 or 5, or hit 2 coming over the middle. 3 is the outlet shot.

279
“Stack 5” (this play results in shot for #5). See Diagram A. 1 splits right, 2 splits left and
receives the pass from 5. 3 stays put and 4 splits out to receive the pass from 2. Diagram B…
3 sets a pick for 5 coming inbounds. Diagram C… 5 cuts around 3’s screen and gets the inside
pass from 4. 4 can also pass to 2 for the corner 3-pointer.

“Stack 3”
Here is another stack play.
#1, #2 and #4 set a triple screen as #3 cuts out to the short corner for the shot.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved

280
 "3" Out of Bounds Play
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This out of bounds play is set up for a 3-pointer from the corner, but there are other options too.

Remember that the most important thing in taking the ball out-of-bounds is making a good pass
inbound. Don't force a bad pass just to complete this play.

Setup: Have a good 3-point shooter take the ball out, as she will end up as the shooter. The
team sets up in a box formation.

Starting the play:

Diagram A.
Yell "Go!". The person on the right block (#1)
fakes in, then cuts out toward the corner and
get the in-bounds pass. #5 cuts to the low
block looking for the pass from #2 and the
easy layup. #3 cuts out to the top ballside
area. #4 tries to get inside position on the
opposite low block.

Diagram B.
The second pass is from #1 out to #3 on the
ballside wing. After making the pass, #1 sets
the double screen next to #5. #2 cuts hard
around the double screen to the ballside
corner, looking for the pass back from #3,
and the corner 3-point shot. (Diagram C)

281
 Out-of-bounds play #5, or "Line-Up", or “4-Down”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Remember that the most important thing in taking the ball out-of-bounds is making a good pass
inbound. Don't force a bad pass just to complete this play.

Call "4-Down"

Set up like this. You will note that the setup is the
same as the 1-4 stacklow play except #5 vacates
the corner position to make the inbounds pass,
and his spot is taken by #1.

The two inside players screen for the corner

players, who cut to the hoop, looking for the pass
and shot.

After screening for #4, #2 should go to the corner

and look for the pass for the 3-point shot.

#3 always moves out to the point (after making

the screen), to serve as a defensive safety, or for
a long outlet pass.

If the pass is made to #3, #5 should slip inbounds

to the opposite low post area for a quick pass
back from #3 (see red arrows).

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

282
 Out-of-Bounds Play “54”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Here's a simple but effective out-of-bounds play designed to get a lay-up for one of your post
players. A box formation is used and note that #5 and #4 (your two post players) are opposite
each other. You could also call it "45" to confuse the opponent, but it's the same play.

See the diagrams below. #5 will set a pick on #4's defender. The in-bounds pass goes into the
ball-side corner to #2. Then #4 cuts around #5's screen for the possible pass and lay-up.
Chances are the defense will switch on the screen and #5's defender will go with #4. So #4
clears out if she doesn't receive the pass. Then #5, if she has properly sealed off the person
she screened, should be able to simply roll to the ball-side block for the pass and lay-up.

Other options include a three-point shot from #2, or from #1 on the wing.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

283
 Out-of-bounds play – “Spread”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This play starts with 4 across, down low spread setup (Diagram A).

The guts of the play is with your two strong low post players who position themselves at each
low block. It is a pick and seal play that is very simple, and amazingly effective. The ball-side
low post (#4) sets a pick for the opposite low post (#5) and seals the defender for inside
position. #5 cuts around the screen to the middle of the lane looking for the pass and the easy,
point blank shot (see Diagram B). Now, look at Diagram C... if the #4's defender switches and
picks up #5, then #4 should have inside position (if he/she sealed the defender correctly), and
should get the pass for the easy lay-in.

Meanwhile, your outside players are making their cuts. #2 (your good outside shooter) makes
a V-cut out and cuts back to the corner, looking for the pass and the three-point shot. After
your post players get a couple easy lay-ups, the defense will "sag" into the paint and then #2
should get some good opportunities. #1 makes a cut out to the top of the ball-side three-point
circle, looking for a pass, and also acts as the one player back on defense.

After making the in-bounds pass, #3 either becomes a re-bounder (if the pass goes inside), or
cuts out to the ball-side corner. If the in-bounds pass went out on top to #1, then #3 should cut
quickly to the corner and look for the pass back from #1 and the potential three-point corner
shot.

Lots of options for such a simple little play!

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

284
 Out-of-Bounds Plays vs the 2-3 Zone
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Many teams will play a 2-3 zone to defend against the out-of-bounds play under the basket.
Here are some plays you can run against a 2-3 zone.

Play #1, “Splitter”

Diagram A. Notice that the defense is aligned in a 2-3 zone. #3 has the ball out of bounds. #5
lines up above the blocks, between the #4 and #5 defenders. #4 stacks outside the 1
defender. #1 and #2 form a mini-stack above the #1 defender.

When 1 yells "go", #5 seals the inside defender. #2 (your best shooter) cuts around #4's
screen to the ball-side corner. #2 could get the pass here and the three-point shot. Now if the
#4 defender to moves out toward the corner, #4 slides down the lane into the gap looking for
the pass and shot (Diagram B). You should have a 2-on-1 situation with the #4 defender.
Either #2 or #4 should be open.

Play #2, “Stack Screen”

Diagram A. Your best outside shooter is #2, and #4 and #5 are post players. #1 is the point
guard. #2 flashes out to the corner looking for the three-pointer, or to take the #3 defender with
him/her. #1 is your safety and splits out to the ball-side wing.
Diagram B. If #2 is open in the corner, that's where the pass goes for the three-point shot.
Meanwhile, #5 sets a screen on the middle defender, and #4 slides into the gap created by the
screen. If the #3 defender goes to the corner, then #4 should be wide open for the easy shot.
Another option could be this pass sequence: #3 to #2 to #4.

285
Play #3, “Indiana”

Here’s another baseline out-of-bounds play you can run against the 2-3 zone.

Diagram A. Your strong post player (5) sets a screen on the middle defender X4. 4 cuts
around the screen, moving out to the short corner or corner area, calling “ball, ball, ball”. This
should get the X5 defender to move outside also onto 4. Now 5 seals for inside position, gets
the inbounds pass and the power lay-up (Diagram B).

Notice that 2 can cut to the opposite short corner for a shot, or maybe even steal the inside
position from the X3 defender for a lay-up. 1 is our safety for the outlet pass if nothing
develops inside. After making the inbounds pass, 3 should move to the opposite corner-wing
area.

Play #4, "Middle"

See the diagrams below. Put your best shooters on the blocks. They will split out wide to the
corners looking for the pass and corner 3-point shot. Stack your two post players in the middle
near the free-throw line. After 1 and 2 start their cuts to the corners, hopefully the outside low
defenders will go with them to the corners. 3 and 4 cut around the middle defender to each
block... one should be open for the lay-up. The first time you run this play, the low defenders
may not move out to the corner, so look to hit a 3-pointer first. Then the next time, beat them
inside.

286
Play #5, "Offset"
See the diagrams below. Notice the setup, like an offset box. This play will get us a corner 3-
point shot the first time we run it, and the inside shot the second time. Notice that our post
players 3 and 4 screen the middle and outside low defenders. Our best shooter (2) slips into
the corner for the pass and shot. Now see Diagram C. The next time, let the outside defender
slip out to the corner, and 4 should be open inside for the pass and shot. 1 has to occupy the
X2 defender so that X2 will not cover the corner.

Play #6, "Box"

This is a very effective play if you have a good tall post player with long arms. See the
diagrams below. 2 tries to duck inside the weakside low defender calling "ball, ball, ball" to
occupy that defender. 1 drops out to the point. 3 screens the backside of the middle low
defender, pinning him/her underneath the basket. 4 slides in behind 3's screen for the lob pass
and shot.

Also check out the Pinball out-of-bounds play... there is an option to run against the 2-3 zone.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002-2004, All rights reserved.

287
 Out-of-bounds Plays “Box 1” and “Box 3”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Use the simple box formation to run these plays. The set-up is identical for both plays, making
it easy for the players to learn. See Diagram A. The two post players (#4 and #5) are
positioned at the ball-side low block and elbow, while #1 and #3 are on the weak-side elbow
and block. #2 is a good passer and shooter, and in-bounds the ball.

“Box 1”
On “Go”, #4 sets a pick for #5 so that #5 can cut to the opposite block. #4 will then seal, or
pin, the defender that she/he screens, and then “roll” to the hoop for the pass and lay-up. #2
could pass to #5, or if the defense switches the screen, #4 should be open. #3 cuts around
#1’s screen and moves out to the top. #1 cuts to the weak-side corner, or could optionally
make a V-cut and go right back to where she/he started at the weak-side elbow. If nothing is
open inside, look to either #1 or #3 for a three-pointer.

“Box 3”
Use the same set-up as above (see Diagram A). #1, #3, #4 and #5 all make the same screens
and cuts as in “Box 1” above. This time we are looking for a three-pointer from our shooter #2.
#2 passes out on top to #3, makes a V-cut toward #5 and then quickly out to the ball-side
corner. #3 passes to #2 who takes the three-point shot from the corner.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

288
 Out-of-Bounds Play “Box Wide”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Here is a very simple but effective baseline out-of-bounds play that creates a possible three-
point shot for your best shooter, or an inside shot for your best post player.

This play uses the familiar “box” formation, but moves the two post players (O4 and O5) wide.
This creates a better angle for the screen. See Diagram A. You can change the numbers to fit
your personnel. On “go”, O5 sets a screen for O1 (a good outside shooter). O1 cuts to the
three-point arc looking for the pass and the open three-point shot. This is often open because
the X5 defender is often reluctant to move outside.

Now look at Diagram B. If the defense switches the screen and the X5 defender moves
outside on O1, then O5 seals and has inside position on the smaller X1 defender. So you have
your strong, tall post player in a position to beat a smaller defender. O5 cuts to the hoop
looking for the pass and shot. If the X4 defender picks up O5, then O4 may be open.

O2 moves out on top as a safety.

Copyright 2002-2004, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

289
 Out-of-Bounds Play "Box Around"
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Here's another baseline OB play starting from a "box" formation. See the diagrams below.
We'll pass the ball outside, eventually to the point. O4 moves to the short corner. O5 initially
"digs in" to see if he/she can get the quick inside pass. After passing out to O2, the inbounder
O3 curls around O5 looking for the pass in the middle from O1, and the easy shot.

Copyright 2002-2004, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

290
 Out-of-Bounds Play “Double Stack”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Set-up this play with a double stack. Have your two post players position themselves on the
low blocks. Have your two best outside shooting guards stack on each side right behind the
post players (see Diagram A).

#1 and #2 make V-cuts toward the paint, and then cut to the corners for the possible pass and
three-point shot.

The post player nearest the ball (#4) sets a screen for the opposite post player (#5), who cuts
across the lane for the pass and power lay-up (Diagram B).

#4 seals, or "pins" the #5 defender to establish inside position. If the defense switches the
screen, then #4 should be open for the pass and lay-up (Diagram C).

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

291
 Out-of-Bounds Play, “3–Across”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Three players stack across the free-throw line, with #2 as your best shooter, #1 is your point
guard, and #4 and #5 are post players. #4 sets the screen for both #5 and #2 (holds the
screen until #2 clears around). #5 cuts first around the screen to the hoop. #2 cuts over the
screen to the ball-side short corner (or corner if you are looking for the three-pointer). #4 then
releases and rolls to the weak-side block, with a great chance of being open for the pass. #1 is
your safety outlet and man back to prevent the opponent's fast break. #3 passes to any open
player.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

292
 Out-of-Bounds Play "3-Down"
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This baseline OB play uses a 3-across low stack set (see diagrams). The play is a simple
backscreen by the middle post player O4 for our point guard O1. If the defense fails to switch
the backscreen, O1 should get the pass for the lay-up. If the defense switches the screen, our
post player O4 should be able to seal the smaller X1 defender and roll to the hoop for the pass
and lay-up. O2 cuts to the corner and could shoot the 3-pointer. O3 moves out on top as our
safety.

After running this successfully a couple times, then run option 2 (see diagram below). This
time, O4 again looks like he/she is going to move up and set the backscreen. Instead, O4
makes a quick cut back to the ball for the pass and lay-up.

Copyright 2002-2004, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

293
 Out-of-Bounds Play “Pinball”
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by:
Coach Ken Sartini (aka "Coach Sar"), Arlington Hts, IL.
This plays starts out as a "pick the picker" play, which works well against man-to-man defense
(there is also a zone option seen below). Refer to the diagrams below. Set up as in Diagram
A. #2 splits out to the ball-side wing. #3 fakes and cuts over #5's screen near the ball-side
elbow, and goes to the ball-side corner. Meanwhile #4 sets a pick for #5 (see Diagram B). #5
cuts hard around the screen looking for the pass and lay-up. #4 seals the person he/she
screened and rolls to the hoop, also looking for the pass and lay-up.

If neither #4 or #5 is open, the pass goes into the corner to #3 (Diagram C). #3 passes out to
#2. Meanwhile, #1 steps inbounds and sets a screen for #3. #4 and #5 also set staggered
screens for #3. #3 cuts along the baseline to the opposite corner, looking for the pass from #2.
#3 can take the outside shot, or pass down to #5 posting up on the low block.

Zone Option
If the defense is in a zone, you can run it a little differently. Set up the play and run it exactly
the same as in Diagrams A and B above. Now refer to Diagram D below. Assuming #4 and #5
are not open for the inbounds pass, #1 passes to #3 in the corner. #1 then cuts hard to the
weak-side and screens the backside of the zone, which should be overloaded on the ball-side.
#3 again cuts along the baseline, getting screens from #4 and #5 and cuts outside of #1,
looking for the pass from #2 and the shot.

Another option is seen in Diagram E. Again the inbounds pass goes to #3 and #1 cuts to the
opposite wing, receives the pass from #2, and passes into #5 posting up on the low block.

Still another option is seen in Diagram F. This time #3, after passing out to #2, sets a screen
for #1, who cuts to the corner for the pass back from #2 and the three-pointer shot. #3 cuts to
the weak-side as seen previously in Diagram E.

294
 Offense for the Last Few Seconds of the Game
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The game is tied, or your team is down 1 or 2 points, with 4 seconds left in the game. Since
you are not playing in the NBA (where they get the ball at half-court), you must go the full
length of the floor. Here is one strategy you could try. This assumes you have at least one
time-out left.

Break the remaining time up into two segments. Since the clock doesn’t start until a player
touches the ball, first cut the court in two and make the pass to half-court and immediately call
time-out. While you are explaining the play to your team, have your assistant go over to the ref
and inform him quietly what you are doing, and that you will be calling time-out and want the
clock stopped immediately. This puts the ref on the spot and he won’t be able to say that he
didn’t hear you call time-out. Ask the ref also to inform the clock-keeper. If done correctly, you
should only lose 1 second with the pass to half court. See Diagram A. Have two players at
half-court and two players deep. Have the two half court players run deep, and the two deep
players cut to the ball at half-court. #3 is your best long passer. Call time-out as soon as the
ball is caught.

Now, you have the ball on the sideline at half-court with two or three seconds left on the clock.
Once again, the clock doesn’t start until the ball touches a player. I think your best options for
a clear shot are (1) ball-side corner, (2) weak-side wing (using a skip pass), the lob to your tall
post player in the lane. You must instruct your players that whoever receives the ball, must
shoot it… there is no time for a pass or dribble. See Diagram B. Set your players up in a tight
“diamond” formation. Have your best shooter #2 cut through the diamond to the ball-side
corner for the pass and shot. Have your other good outside shooter #1 cut to the weak-side
wing, looking for the skip pass and three-point shot. #4 cuts toward the ball, 3-point arc area,
while #5 tries to get position for the long lob pass to the lane. #3 is your strong-armed, best
passer and must find the open receiver. If no-one is open, #3 should make the lob pass to #5,
hoping that there could be contact and a foul going for the pass… you could win it on the free-
throw line.

The odds are against you, but at least you have a chance if you have a plan, and have
practiced for this situation.

295
 Desperation, Last Second Full-Court Play
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

You only have a few seconds left and must go the length of the floor, and you need a three-
pointer. This play might at least get you a final shot.

Setup:
Have your best long passer make the inbounds
pass. Place your best three-point shooters at half
court near the sides. Put your tallest, best jumper
at the free-throw line.

Running the play:

On "go", #5 cuts hard to the half court line an
receives the high pass, while #1 and #2 cut to the
three-point arc on either side. #5 catches the ball,
pivots and fires the pass to either #1 or #2, who
gets the shot for the three-pointer. You could also
have #4 cut out to the ball-side corner for the pass
from the wing (if the wing is covered) for another
optional three-point shot... but the amount of time
left may not permit another pass.

It's a desperation attempt, but it may at least give

you a chance to pull it off!

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

296
 Buzzer-Beater from Half-Court
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by:
Coach Ken Sartini (aka "Coach Sar"), Arlington Hts, IL.

Here's the situation: the game is tied, or your team is down 1 or 2 points, with a few seconds
left in the game. You have the ball out-of-bounds at the half-court line (or just inside half-court).
Here's a play you can try with several options.

See the diagrams below. You can change the player assignments to fit your team's strengths.
Have your two three-point shooters (#2 and #3) start down low, with your posts (#4 and #5)
spaced out on the three-point arc (or higher) as seen in Diagram A. #2 and #3 will set back-
screens for the post players, and #1 may attempt the long pass to either #4 or #5 for the lay-in
(Diagram B). Now, if the defense switches and sags and denies those passes, or if you need a
three-pointer, look to Diagram C... after setting the screens, #2 and #3 roll out to the three-point
arc for the pass and shot.

Coach Sar says that in his experience, oftentimes the #5 defender does not like to leave his
man and give help defense. In this case, you could switch the roles of #5 and #3, especially if
you have a very athletic #3 (one of those slender, long-armed, quick kids that can really jump,
catch the ball and finish). This option may also work too if you have a #5 who can step outside
and shoot the three-pointer.

Now suppose the defense decides not to guard the in-bounder, but instead positions him/her in
the paint to prevent the long pass (see Diagram D below). Run the play just the same
(Diagram E), but hit then in-bounder (#1) with the return pass for the 3-point shot (Diagram F).

One way to set this up, assuming you have a time-out, is to get ready to run the play. Then if
you notice that the in-bounder is not being guarded, call time-out and have your team go to this
option instead. If the players know both options, or you have no time-outs left, just yell "Option
1" ("1" for the in-bounder, the point guard).

297
 Half-Court Sideline Play
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by:
Coach Ken Sartini (aka "Coach Sar"), Arlington Hts, IL.

Here is a play you can run from the half-court sideline for a potential last second shot.

See the diagrams below.

Diagram A. #3 must read the defender. If #3's defender is playing down in the paint, #4
screens him/her and #3 V-cuts out for the skip pass. #4 posts up on the block and #3 can
either take the shot or #3 and #4 can run a two-man game.

Diagram B. Now if the #3 defender is playing out on #3 then the second read is #3 cutting
baseline off double staggered screens by #4 and #1, to the ball-side corner. After screening,
#4 moves up to the high-post.

Diagram C. #4 drops down and sets a screen for #1, while #5 moves to the high post and also
screens for #1. #1 cuts around the double staggered screen to the point, looking for the pass
and shot.

Diagram D. #5 slides to the ball-side elbow and #4 moves to the weak-side low block. The
pass from #2 could go to #3, #5 or #1.

Diagram E. If #2's defender is sagging way off, #2 could get the return pass and shot.

298
 Defense 1 on 1 Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Set-up:
Use both ends of the court and make four lines, one under each basket with the players facing
the free throw line, and one at each free throw line with players facing the basket.

The Drill:
The defensive players are under the basket; the offensive players are at the free throw line.
The first player in the defensive line passes the ball to the offensive player at the free throw
line, and closes-out aggressively. The offensive player tries to score, by shooting or driving to
the hoop. The defender should play aggressively and box-out after any shot. Once the offense
scores or the defense stops her, it's done, and they pass to next defensive player in line on the
baseline. The rotation is that the offensive players go to the defense line and vice-versa.

The defensive players should work on proper stance and footwork (see Basic Defense), and
box-out on any shots. The defense should close-out initially with the strong foot forward and
that hand up toward offensive player. Over-guard the offensive player's strong side. The other
hand should be low, out to the side, palm up. Proper footwork means sliding with the offensive
player (don't cross your feet), and staying between the player and the basket. Watch the belly-
button, contest all shots with a hand up at the shooter.

You can make a game of it and have your players or managers keep score. Losers run.

Full-Court Drill

This is a good full-court conditioning drill, while

working on defensive footwork. See the diagram.

Start with a line at one end of the floor. The first

player in line becomes the defender. The next person
in line attempts to dribble the entire length of the floor
in a straight line, without having to cross-over or
change direction. The defender, by using correct
footwork, must try to "turn" the defender as many
times as he can... i.e. force him to change direction or
cross-over dribble. Once they reach the opposite end,
the pair moves over to the opposite side of the floor
and the original defender now becomes the dribbler
and vice-versa for the trip back up the floor.
Meanwhile, the next twosome can start up the
opposite side of the floor.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

299
 Defense Z-Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This drill works on proper defensive footwork, slides and sprints. I am frequently shouting
"move your feet, don't reach in!" at my players when they are on defense, and this drill
emphasizes that.
Set-up:
See the diagram. Place cones or balls at the
specified places on the court (top of the key, on each
end; and each mid-court sideline). Form a single line
at the corner of the left baseline. The first player in
line should turn around and face the baseline.

The Drill:
First Option: Sliding the whole way.
The first player in line starts the drill by sliding to the
first cone at the top of the arc. She should use
proper stance and sliding technique (see Basic
Defense). and should be facing the baseline. When
she reaches the cone, she pivots off her lead foot
and slides to the next cone at half-court sideline.
She continues pivoting and sliding to the next cone
at the top of the far end arc, and then to the baseline
corner. After reaching the corner, she sprints along
the baseline to the other corner, and zig-zags her
way back up the court. The second player in line
starts after the person in front of her reaches the first
cone. Have all players do this, watching and
stopping to demon-strate correct stance, footwork,
and slides. Careful not to overdo this drill at first, as
players can become very tired doing this drill.

Second Option: alternate slides and sprints.

Do the drill the same way, with the player sliding to the first cone. After reaching the first cone,
have her pivot and sprint (as though she were beaten) to the half court sideline cone, and seal
the sideline off. Then resume sliding to the next cone, and then sprint again. Alternate slide and
sprint every other cone.

Third Option: Go man to man against an offensive player.

The drill is the same except now you add a ball-handler. The offensive player dribbles to each
cone while the defender slides and stays in front of her. You can have the offensive players
start out at a slower speed at first, and eventually work up to full speed, to see if the defender
can stay with her. If the defender gets beat, she must turn and sprint after the offensive player,
and get back into proper sliding position if she can. After reaching the far baseline, rotate the
offensive players to defense, and vice-versa, and return up the court.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

300
 Defense Shell Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This drill focuses on the basic concepts of "on-ball", "deny", and "help-side" (see Basic
Defense).

Set-up:
Use a half court setup with a total of eight players. Four offensive players are positioned
around the three point arc. Start with two wings and two players in the corners. Match-up four
defensive players with each of the offensive players. You could also use five on each team with
a point guard, two wings and two corners. Additional players can sub in and out at your
discretion.

The Drill:
The offensive players are stationary, no cuts or dribbling. This is a defensive drill and the
offensive players simply pass the ball sharply around the arc. Make sure they make good
passes (use this as a passing drill also), make sure they receive the ball in "triple threat"
position, and have them make some skip passes too. The defensive players are not to steal or
intercept the ball, since this is drill designed to emphasize proper positioning on the floor. The
defensive players must work on proper relationships in positioning with the offensive player
they are guarding.

If the defender's man has the ball, she should be applying "on-ball" pressure, and force the
offensive player toward the sideline or baseline.

If her player is one pass away, she should be in "deny", but not a complete dead-ball denial as
seen at the bottom of this page. She should be a little up the line and a step or two toward the
ball (see Diagrams A and B). This way, she is in position to steal the pass, yet is still able to
give help to the on-ball defender if the ball-handler tries to dribble-penetrate.

If she is two passes away, she should be in "help-side". If the ball is above the free-throw line
(Diagram A), the help-side defender should have one foot in the lane. If the ball is below the
free throw line (Diagram B), the help-side defenders should be straddling the "help-side line".
For more of an explanation, see Basic Defense.

Once you feel your team has an understanding of these basic relationships, and all players
have been on offense and defense, you can let them play half court all out with cutting,
screens, shooting, etc. Watch the defenders carefully for proper defensive positioning. Blow
your whistle when you need to make points with the players... somebody messed up, or
somebody did something really well.

301
Full Denial. Diagrams C and D above.
Now let's assume that the ball-handler has given up her dribble. She no longer has the option
of dribble-penetration, so defenders whose player is one pass away can now be in complete
deny, on the line.

Help and Recover. Diagrams E and F below teach how to give help and recover on the
perimeter. #1 tries to dribble-penetrate. The #2 defender gives help and #1 is prevented from
penetrating, and has to dish back out to #2 (Diagram F). The #2 defender then has to rotate
quickly out to on-ball defense on #2, and the #1 and #4 defenders are now in deny, a little up
the line and a step or two toward the ball, while the #3 defender moves into help-side (Diagram
F).

Defending the Cutter. Diagram G teaches how to

defend the cutter after the ball is passed to the
corner. The #2 defender steps in front of the cutter
and stays between the man and the ball throughout
the cut, and then these two rotate over to the
opposite corner. #3 and # 1 offensive players
rotate to the right. Notice how the #3 and #1
defenders give help on the cut inside.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

302
 Defense Man-to-Man Positioning Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Use this drill to help teach the man-to-man concepts of on-ball defense, deny and help-side
(See Basic Defense first). Also see the Shell Drill.

Setup:
See the diagrams below. Three offensive players are set up on the perimeter as in Diagram A.
Defenders start from the three lines at the end-line.

Drill:
The coach ("C") passes to one of the three offensive players who stay put. There is no scoring,
passing, attacking in this drill. This drill simply emphasizes how the defenders should position
themselves in a man-to-man defense. In Diagram A, the coach passed to #2, so the #2
defender makes a good close-out and plays "on-ball" defense. The #1 defender sprints out into
a "deny" position (one pass away from the ball), and assumes a position a little up the line and
a step or two toward the ball-handler (to prevent not only the pass, but dribble-penetration).
The #3 defender sprints out to "help-side" defense, dropping down into the lane (two passes
away from the ball). The coach makes any corrections in the players alignment, and then the
ball is passed back to the coach for the next three defenders in line. The current defenders
become offense and the offensive players go to the back of the defensive lines.

Note in Diagram C, the pass goes to the point, and the #1 defender sprints out and make a
good "close-out", while the two wing defenders sprint out into "deny" defense. Diagram D is
the same as Diagram A, only to the opposite wing.

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

303
 Deny, Corner Trap Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This is a defensive drill that emphasizes defensive slides, forcing the opponent to the baseline,
and then trapping at the baseline.

Setup: (blue = assistants, red = defense)

Use both sides of the half court, with an assistant
holding a ball on each wing, free-throw line
extended. He should hold the ball extended out
with one hand toward the defender (#1).

The Drill:
Diagram A. The defenders at the free-throw line
(#1 and #2) slide over and back twice and touch
the ball each time, being vocal ("deny, deny,
deny"). On the third slide, before she can touch
the ball, the assistant puts the ball on the floor
and starts dribbling. The defender forces him to
the baseline, where the low block defenders (#'s 3
or 4) seal off the baseline and prevent further
penetration along the line, and the two defenders
trap him in the corner, or along the baseline
(Diagram B).

Once the assistant is trapped, the low block

defender steps up to the free-throw line, the next
player in line becomes the new low block
defender, and #1 goes to the rear of the line.

Pointers:
1. Make sure the defense prevents penetration
along the baseline.
2. Don't allow the ball-handler to split the trap.
Trappers get "knee to knee".
3. When trapping, don't reach in. The height of the
trappers' hands should mirror the height of the
ball.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

304
 Piston Full-Court Offense-Defense Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This full court drill emphasizes the speed dribble and lay-up, defensive hustle, and conditioning.

Setup:
Pair up, each player has a partner, and each twosome has a
ball. Use both the left and right sides of the floor.

The Drill:
The first twosome on each end start with one player
sprinting up to the wing and other passing in-bounds quickly
to her. The ball receiver speed dribbles the length of the
court and goes in hard for the lay-up. The in-bounds passer,
after making the in-bounds pass, becomes a defensive
player and sprints the length of the floor, and tries to catch
up, and get ahead of the ball-handler, and prevent the lay-
up. The shooter then grabs the rebound, steps out of
bounds and the roles are reversed for going back up the
floor, on the opposite site of the court.

Run both sides of the floor. The next twosome in line starts
when the first twosome reaches half court. The drill is
continuous, no stopping.

The idea is to teach the defender to sprint and pursue the

offensive player.

Option:
You can also run this drill from the half-court line.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

305
 Take The Charge Defensive Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This is a defensive drill that teaches players how to take the charge under the basket.

Setup: (blue = offense, red = defense, yellow = coach or manager).

Defensive player under the basket in help mode against the yellow coach. Blue line is offense.
Place a floor mat under the basket to cushion the fall for the defender.

The Drill:
First player in the blue line dribbles to the hoop
for the lay-up. Stress that the offensive player
must take it all the way to the hoop and make
contact with the defender. The defender steps
into the offensive player's lane, plants her feet
with a wide stance and braces for the contact.
Teach the defender that when the contact
occurs, avoid injury by just "sitting down" on the
mat, with the butt making initial contact with the
floor, not the back or shoulders. Immediately
after the contact, the defensive player pops back
up quickly, the offensive player moves to back of
the line, and the next blue player drives for the
next contact. Have each player, defend 5 or 6 in
a row.

Pointers:
1. Make sure the defensive player gets into correct position before the offensive player arrives.

2. Make sure her feet are planted, and that she does not move, turn her hips, etc. The only
movement should be the backward fall when contact is made. Any other movement may result
in a blocking foul instead of a charge.

3. The defender should be vocal and yell when she gets hit ("OH!!!")... and make an academy
award "flop" back onto the mat! You've got to sometimes sell it to the ref.

4. Have an extra manager or assistant under the basket to help catch the offensive player after
contact is made, to avoid injury.

5. Advise your players that since the officials do not always call the charging foul, best not take
the charge if you are in foul-trouble. It's a judgement call and you are at the mercy of the
officials.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

306
 3-on-3 Defensive Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This defensive drill will help pick up your team's defensive intensity, because it is a competition.
Give out some award to the winners... a bag of candy, free pop, etc. Or just make all the losers
run and the winners get to watch.

Setup:
Divide your squad into 3-man teams (you may have one or two 4-man teams where the players
rotate in and out, if the numbers don't come out exactly even). These teams will take turns
competing against each other as outlined below. Only two teams will be on the floor at a given
time, offense and defense. Split the teams up fairly (no “stacked” teams), and have at least
one guard and one post player on each team.

The Drill:
Play half-court, man-to-man defense at all times. Coaches referee. Points are scored only by
the defense. The defense gets one point whenever they stop the offense and get possession
either by a defensive rebound, a steal, a forced turn-over, forced bad pass, etc. The idea is for
the defensive team to stay on the floor as long as they can, because it's the only way you can
accumulate points.

No points are awarded for baskets made. However, if the offense scores, then the defensive
team must leave the floor and the offense now becomes the defense (enabling them a chance
to accumulate points), and a new team comes out on offense. Also, if the offense commits a
turnover, or fails to score, they must leave the court and a new team comes out on offense. So
there is always a penalty for failure... the team who fails (whether offense or defense) must
leave the floor.

If the defense commits a foul, this also results in them being kicked off the court and the
offense now becomes the defense and a new team comes out on offense.

Pick a set number of points... the first team to obtain that point total are the winners.

This drill will help pick up your intensity, and the players usually enjoy this "game".

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

307
 Learning the Jump Stop
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

The jump stop is helpful offensive footwork that can be used at the end of a dribble, or to
receive a pass and be in triple threat position. At the end of a speed dribble, young players will
often stop, fall forward from their momentum, and get a traveling call. Ending the speed dribble
with a jump stop will prevent the traveling violation. The jump stop is executed by the player,
who is on the run, taking one small step and then landing on both feet simultaneously in proper
balance (not leaning forward). After a jump stop, either foot can be used as the pivot foot. This
is especially helpful for the low post player.

Here is a drill for teaching the jump stop.

First demonstrate the jump stop to your players.
Have all the players lineup on the end-line, with adequate spacing. Start this drill at slow speed
initially. Have the players jog down the floor slowly. When you blow your whistle, they come to
a jump stop. Yell "go" and they start again. Every-time you blow the whistle, they jump stop. Do
this back and forth, up and down the court. When they look like they are getting the hang of it,
have them sprint and do the drill. Then give everyone a ball, and dribble slowly down the floor,
doing jump stops. Eventually work up to the speed dribble and jump stop.

Receiving the pass with a jump stop.

Form two sets of lines, one at an end-line, the other at half court, with the lines facing each
other (see diagram A). This drill is good for learning to receive the pass with a jump stop, and is
also a good passing and conditioning drill.

Passers make good chest passes. Make sure

they don't lob these passes. Passes should
have "zip", speed. The passer then follows his
pass and sprints to the rear of the opposite
line.

The receivers move toward the ball and

receive it with a jump stop, and hold the triple
threat position briefly, and then make the pass
to the next player in the opposite line, follow
the pass, and get into the opposite line.

Make sure passes are crisp, and the receivers

are coming to the ball and are jump stopping.
Check their triple threat position. Players
should be sprinting to the opposite line... get a
little conditioning in here too.

You can also use this drill to teach the one-two

step stop.

Jump Stop and Pivoting Drill

Here is another simple drill for teaching the jump stop and pivoting all at once. Players should
pair up together on a side or endline. One player dribbles forward about 10 feet, stops with a
two-footed jump stop, and then pivots several times and finally passes back to his/her partner,
who repeats this procedure, while the first player returns to the endline.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

308
 4-Corners Footwork Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This drill teaches a few things at once, the jump-stop, reverse pivot, and crisp passing.

It starts with 4 lines, a ball at the front of each line. The 4 lines begin in 4 corners of a square,
about 25 feet apart facing each other.

On the whistle, all 4 lines speed dribble toward each other with a target near the top of the arc.
All 4 players jump-stop about 3 feet before they collide (forming a small circle) and reverse
pivot to face the line to their right or left (decided prior to whistle), and make a chest pass to the
person at the front of the line. Passers go to line they passed to and next 4 players go as soon
as they receive the ball.

Timing is important so that all 4 lines are passing, jump-stopping, and beginning at the same
time. When this drill is running smoothly it looks like a dance but and when the timing is bad, it
looks like chaos. After 20 passes or so, call switch and they pivot/pass the opposite direction.
This drill is good for teaching the jump-stop and reverse pivot and it makes them think a little bit
too.

309
 Footwork Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Every player must learn proper footwork to become a good player. He/she must learn how to
execute the jump-stop, forward and reverse pivot, and make certain cuts without the ball, such
as the V-cut. He/she must learn the "triple-threat" position. Here is a drill that has the players
execute all of these moves plus take a shot, follow the shot for the rebound, and make a good
pass.

See also: Fundamentals, Jump-Stop, Offensive Tips, and Cutting and Faking.
Refer to the diagram. The players form two lines, one for the passers and one for the movers-
shooters.
Start the drill with the player in the line on the right
wing cutting sharply toward the corner, where he
makes a jump-stop (JS), and then does a reverse
pivot (RP), and then cuts to the block. There he
makes a V-cut (VC) back out to the elbow or free-
throw line extended area. There he does a forward
pivot (FP) and receives the pass in triple threat
position (TT). Finally, he takes the shot, follows his
rebound, gets the rebound and passes to the next
person in the passing line who does not have a ball.
He follows his pass to the rear of the passing line.
The passer goes to the rear of the shooting line.

Pointers:
Make sure the jump-stop and pivots are executed correctly. Stress the footwork in this drill.

Jump-stop: hop and land on both feet simultaneously.

Reverse pivot: After the jump-stop, pivot on the inside (left) foot toward the open floor.

V-cut: Plant the inside (right) foot and push off it hard extending your left leg the opposite
direction to make the sharp cut to the free-throw line extended area.

Forward Pivot: At the end of the V-cut, make a sharp forward pivot by pivoting on the baseline
(right) foot, and face the passer and receive the pass in triple threat position.
At first, go through the drill slowly with the players, instructing and executing each move for
them. Have the players go slow-motion at first, then speed it up once they start becoming
proficient. Running this drill for 5-10 minutes each practice will rapidly improve these basic
footwork skills.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

310
 Pick Drills
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

It is important that your players know how to set correct screens. The first drill is a pass and
"screen away" drill that helps stress all the ingredients of setting good screens, and teaches the
pick and roll move. The second drill is a screen set for the ball-handler, with execution of the
pick and roll move. For the important basics of setting screens, see "Setting Screens".

Drill #1. Pass and screen-away.

Create three lines out along the 3-point arc corresponding to a point guard, and both wing
positions (see diagram). Have an assistant or manager be the token defender on the left wing.
The point guard starts with the ball by passing to the right wing. He then "screens away" for the
left wing, setting the pick on the defender. The wing player cuts around the screen and gets the
pass from the right wing, and takes it to the hoop. The screener should "roll" off the pick after
his teammate cuts around. See "Setting Screens" for correct screening techniques, and the
pick and roll technique. Have the players rotate right wing, to point, to left wing.

Make sure that the screeners make contact, get wide and strong and stationary with arms in,
and make sure they have the correct angle on the screen. Make sure the player cutting off the
screen waits for the screen to develop, and "rubs off" the screen correctly. Make sure the pivot
on the roll move is toward the cutter, not away... a player should not turn his back to his
teammate.

Make sure as always that players hustle, and the passes are sharp. Once you feel that your
team is making good screens, "go live". Break up into groups of three, and put a defender on
each offensive player. Tell the defenders to allow the first pass to the right wing, but then play
tough "D". You can now also teach your defense how to fight through, and slide behind a
screen, and how to call a "switch" on defense. You can also start with a pass to the left wing,
and screen right, or let it up to the point guard to go either way.
Look at the diagrams below for common screening errors.

Drill #2. Front screen set for the ball-handler.

#1 and #2 have defenders on them. #2 sets a front screen for #1 (Diagram A). #1 dribbles
around the screen, "brushing off" the screener. If the defense does not switch, #1 takes it in for
the lay-up (Diagram B), and #2 will roll as the trailer for the rebound. Now see Diagram C for
the next option.

311
 #1 dribbles around the screen. If the
defenders switch men, then #1 dribbles
another two or three steps to clear the
screen. Meanwhile, #2 seals off the #1
defender and rolls to the hoop. #1 makes
the bounce pass to #2 who takes it for
either the lay-up, or the in-the-paint
jumper.

Common Screening Errors

312
 Drills for Teaching the 3-2 Motion Offense
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

First read “Motion Offense”.

This article features some break down drills for teaching the 3-2 motion offense. These drills
may involve only certain positions, and not the entire team. You may want to work with the
perimeter players, while on the other end, your assistant works with the post players, or vice-
versa.
V-Cut Drill
Teach your perimeter players to V-cut, replace
themselves, and receive the pass. Make sure
they catch the ball in triple threat position. Use
groups of three, and start with no defense, or
token defense (no deny). The players reverse the
ball around several times. Then you yell “Go!”,
and anything goes with the offense attempting a
quick score, using a dribble move, a cut and pass,
screen, back-cut, etc.

V-Cut, Back-Cut Drill

After teaching the V-cut, teach the back-cut,
which is used when the defender over-plays, or
denies, the pass. Have your #2 defender deny
the pass, and teach #2 to recognize this situation
and make the back-cut for the pass from #1.
Initially, use token defense, and then go 2-on-2
with hard defense. The #2 offensive player must
learn to read the defender, and learn when to v-
cut, and when to back-cut.

Point-Guard Give ‘n Go Drill

Again, use the 2-on-2 setup. The #2 defender
plays “soft” and allows the pass from #1 to #2. #1
fakes left, and makes the basket cut looking for
the return pass from #2. Have the #1 defender
play token defense at first. Then “go live”. If the
#1 defender over-plays the passing lane (because
he knows the drill), then the point guard can fake
the cut and pop back out for the pass and outside
shot. If the #2 defender “cheats” toward the
passing lane, then #2 offensive player can fake
the pass, and dribble-penetrate to the hoop.

313
Dribble-Entry, Rotate Drill
Now teach that if #1 is not able to make the pass
to the wing, he may simply dribble to the wing and
replace the wing. The wing player must recognize
this, and then back-cut to the hoop. He may cut
all the way through to the opposite wing, or he
can button-hook at the low post if he feels he can
score on his defender down low. The opposite
wing replaces #1 at the point. Rotate around
several times (go left also) and then yell “Go!”,
and finish the set with a pass to a cutter for the
lay-up or shot.

On-Ball Screen and Roll Drill

Again, use the 2-on-2 setup. #1 has the ball. #2
comes from his wing and sets a screen for #1. #1
dribbles around the screen to the hoop. #2 seals
the #1 defender and rolls to the hoop. For correct
screening techniques see “Setting Screens”.

Also reverse the rolls. Have #1 pass to #2 on the

wing and then follow his pass and screen for #2.
#2 goes around the screen and takes it to the
hoop, while #1 seals and rolls to the hoop after
the screen.

Screen Away Drill

(See “Setting Screens”). Teach all your players
correct screening techniques with this drill. Use
three lines. #1 passes to #2, and “screens away”
for #3 on the opposite wing (use a coach or
manager as a token defender). #3 rubs off the
screen and cuts to the hoop. Make sure that #3
waits for the screen to arrive, and that #1 sets the
correct angle on the screen. Also, make sure that
#1 seals the defender, and then rolls to the hoop
after #3 cuts around the screen. #2 can pass to
either cutter. Although not shown in the diagram,
have #2 make a v-cut to receive the ball… again
reinforcing that there is no standing still to receive
a pass.

314
Down-screen Curl Drill
Teach your wings how to down-screen for the low
post. The low post player curls around the screen
for the pass and jump shot. Work both sides of
the floor. Start with the #5 defender playing token
defense, and progress to hard defense.

Back-screen Drill
Teach the low post players how to correctly back-
screen for the wing. The wing behind the screen
for the pass from #1. Show token defense at first,
and have the #5 defender let #3 cut to the hoop
for the pass and lay-up.

Then teach the "back-screen pin". In this case,

have the #5 defender switch on the back-screen
and pick up the cutter #3. #3 recognizes that he
is covered and moves out to the opposite short
corner (for spacing). Meanwhile, #5 who has
screened the #3 defender, also "pins" the
defender thereby gaining inside position. He rolls
to the hoop for the pass and lay-up. Again, start
with token defense.

Then progress to hard defense allowing the

defense to either fight through the screen, or
switch. In either case, the offense must learn to
read the defense... if the switch is made, use the
back-screen pin.

Feed the Low Post, Defender Behind Drill

Teach the wing players to try to make the pass to
the low post when the defender is playing behind
him. You can also place a defender on the wing
player, so he has to “step-around” to make the
pass. #4 must get wide with arms out to receive
the ball. Once the pass is made, the opposite
post should recognize that he should move to the
high post, to allow spacing for #4 to make the post
move on his defender.

315
 Defender Fronting the Low Post Drill
Have your low post dead-fronted. Teach #5 to
recognize this situation, and then flash to the ball-
side high post position to receive the pass from
#2. #4 should “pin”, or seal, his defender and get
inside position for the pass from #5. Have all your
post players take turns, to learn to recognize this
situation.
The other option to be practiced here is having #4
pin the defender and “step-off” toward the hoop
for the high lob pass from #2 to #4

Posts 2-on-2 Drill

Now use three perimeter players to rotate the ball
(you can have them v-cut as in drill #1 above).
The two offensive post players learn to work
together, reading the defense as learned above,
and work on screening for each other also. When
they receive the ball in the low post, let them
make a post move on their defender. Use token
defense at first, and progress to hard defense.

Post players…
Your post players must learn how to screen for each other, and how to "pin" the defender after
the screen, for inside position. This is very important for getting easy, inside baskets. See the
diagram below. If the ball-side post player cannot get open for the pass, he can screen away
for the opposite post player, who comes to the ball. If he does not receive the pass, or if the
defense switches on the screen, he can move out to the short corner (for spacing), Now the
other post player should have inside position if he correctly pinned his defender when setting
the screen. Incorporate these concepts in the "Posts 2-on-2 Drill" above. Be innovative!
Create your own drills to help teach the “motion offense”.

Rather than a lot of set plays, teach your players how to fake and cut, screen, pass, go
backdoor, feed both the low and high posts, etc.

316
Scrimmage type drills
To get them to move and execute the cuts and screens outlined above, practice half-court 5 on
5, but set some rules. One time, tell them that no-one is allowed to shoot until at least two
screens have been made... you count them out loud from the sideline. Another time, they are
not allowed to shoot until the ball has gotten into the low post at least once, and then into the
high post another time. Another time, the rule is no dribbling... only passing. The only dribble
permitted is a one or two bounce dribble inside for the lay-up. Any "unnecessary" dribbling on
the perimeter, and the other 5 is awarded the ball.

This is fun for your players. Keep score, alternate possessions, and make both teams play
under the same offensive rules that you impose. The players will enjoy this and instead of
learning set plays, they will start learning basic motion offense and how to "play the game".

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

317
Transition Offensive Drills
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

There are several drills that can be use to help with your transition offense. Before proceeding
here, read the page on Transition Offense first. The transition offense and fast break can be
broken down into its components when practicing and doing drills.

Rebound and outlet pass

First, to get the break going, you must box-out, get the defensive rebound and the quick outlet
pass. Some coaches teach getting the outlet pass to the ball-side wing, while others teach
passing the outlet directly to the point guard in the center near the free throw line. Design your
drill depending on which method you like.

Have two offensive and defensive re-bounders near the basket. I you are teaching the wing
outlet, have a guard on each wing (free-throw line extended). The coach shoots the ball up and
the re-bounders fight for position and get the rebound. If the offense gets the ball, they return it
to the coach for another shot. When the defender gets the rebound, he pivots immediately on
his outside foot toward the sideline, wheels and throws the two-handed overhead pass to the
wing (see Rebounding Tips). Repeat this over and over, to both sides. From time to time, have
another player, manager or assistant step into the outlet passing lane, so that the re-bounder
learns to look first for his receiver, before blindly making a bad pass.

For the center outlet pass, use this same drill, except instead of the wings, just have your point
guard in the center above the free throw line. Put a defender on him and impress upon him that
he has to work hard after the rebound to get open and get the pass. In this offensive scheme,
the point guard must get the ball. The re-bounders, instead of pivoting to the outside wing, are
now looking up the middle. Once the point guard gets the ball, he pivots and starts the speed
dribble up court. Once he reaches mid-court, the drill is over, and he passes back to the coach.

Filling the Lanes

Run 5 on 5, full court. Start the drill with both teams in a half
court situation. The coach puts the ball up on the rim and
players fight for position and rebound. If the offense gets the
rebound, start the drill over. Once the defense rebounds,
they should get the outlet and then fill the three lanes, and
run the fast break full court, with the trailer and preventer
coming last (see Diagram A).

If the defense steals or intercepts a pass, have them start

their own fast break. If the defense stops the break in the
half court (without getting the ball), start the drill over on that
end of the floor for the other five players.

318
Pointers:
1. Make sure the outlet is clean and the pass is not forced.

2. Try to get the ball centered, if possible.

3. Make sure the lanes are filled quickly, and make sure each player knows his assignment.

4. The point guard should speed dribble the ball up the middle lane and stop his penetration at
his own free throw line. He looks to pass to his wings, or can pop the free throw line jumper. If
all three lanes are not filled (just two), and he has a two on one situation, he can take it to the
hoop for the lay-up, or dish off to his teammate.

5. The wings should be looking for the pass from the point, and take it in strong for the lay-up. If
the point guard pops the jumper, the wings should crash the boards for the offensive rebound.
If neither happens, the wings should cross under the basket and fill the opposite corner-wing
area. As they "clear out", the point guard should veer off to the right side of the free throw
circle, and the trailer should be coming through for the pass. This all takes timing. If the trailer
gets there too soon, the paint will be congested. If he's too late, the defense is already in
position.

6. If the defense, steals the ball during the break, have them push it back up for their own
score. You want to make sure the prevent man is holding back and knows how to do his job.

Finishing the break

These drills will help your guards and wings to finish the break with a score.

3- on-1, 3-on-2 Drills

Have three lines corresponding to the three lanes of the fast break, at the half-court line. Have
your point guards in the middle lane, and your wings on the outside lanes, in the positions
where they usually play in a game. Have one defender in the paint. I would suggest having
your players who usually play the "prevent" position as the in-the-paint defender, because this
will be a good defensive drill for him to stop the break. Have the point guard run the 3-on-1
break. Make sure the offense knows their assignments as pointed out above in points 4 and 5.
Once they are proficient at breaking the one man defense, have them go 3-on-2.

Also see: Pitch 'n Fire Drill, Piston Full Court Drill, 4 on 4 Transition, Rebound-Outlet-Break
Drill.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

319
 Fast-Break, Full-Court Passing Drills -- 2-on-0, 2-on-1, 2-on-2
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

These full-court, fast-break drills emphasize passing and receiving on the move and finishing
the break with a lay-up, or finishing in a 2-on-1 or 2-on-2 situation. We run through all the sets
of drills below, starting with the 2-on-0 drills, and then progressing into the 2-on-1 and finally
the 2-on-2 drills. We run all these drills in about 10 minutes, and we do them almost every
practice.

2-on-0 Passing Drills

See the diagram on the left below. Here players pair up and run (not shuffle sideways) up the
floor passing back and forth to each other. The last pass results in a lay-up. The pair gets off
the court and line up on the far baseline now, getting ready to come back down the court after
all the other pairs have finished. After all pairs have moved up the floor, we then start back
down the court to complete the trip both ways.
We run several trips, starting with sharp two-handed chest passes up and back. Then we do
bounce passes up and back. Next, we do two-handed overhead passes and finally around-the-
back passes up and back.

Pointers:
(1) Make sure your players are talking and the passer is yelling the receiver's name, while the
receiver is yelling "ball".
(2) The last pass that sets up the lay-up is always a bounce pass.
(3) No dribbling is allowed, except if needed to finish the lay-up.
(4) Make sure everyone is running hard, not jogging.

2-on-1 Drill
See the middle diagram below. Now we add a defender who runs ahead of the two passers
and tries to defend in a 2-on-1 situation. The defender usually just moves up the floor and tries
to defend at the end. However, the defender may try to jump between the passers anywhere
on the floor to steal the pass. If the ball is stolen or there is a turnover or a missed pass, the
three players just move into line at the far end of the floor. When the last three-some has
finished, we come back down the court to complete the trip.

Pointers: (also apply to the 2-on-2 drill below)

(1) Make sure the offensive players are talking as above.
(2) Keep dribbling to a minimum... only when necessary to beat the defense.
(3) When finishing the 2-on-1 break, we teach the player who has the ball at about the level of
the free-throw line to make a power dribble, or "take", to the hoop, looking for either the lay-up
or the foul. If the defender comes up high on him/her, then he/she passes off to the teammate
cutting to the hoop.

2-on-2 Drill
Finally, we finish by adding a second defender who must trail the break and may not leave the
end-line until the offense has cleared the top of the key or 3-point arc. The first defender sprints
up the floor and tries to stop, or delay, the 2-on-1 break, while the second defender is sprinting
up the floor to provide defensive help at the end. The offense must move quickly and make
quick decisions, otherwise they lose their 2-on-1 advantage. Both offensive and defensive
players should be "talking", communicating.

320
Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

321
 Pitch 'n Fire Full-Court Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This offensive drill emphasizes full-court offensive transition skills and conditioning. Players will
use the speed dribble, jump stop, passing and receiving on the move, and the lay-up. The re-
bounder is taught to get the ball out of the net (after the basket is made) and get the ball in-
bounds quickly.

Setup:
Pair up, each player has a partner, and each twosome has a
ball. Use both the left and right sides of the floor.

The Drill:
The first twosome on each end start with one player
sprinting up to the wing and other passing in-bounds quickly
to her. The ball receiver speed dribbles the length of the
court to the free throw line, and passes off to her partner,
who has cut full-speed up the sideline, and then 45 degrees
to the hoop, for the lay-up. The non-shooter grabs the
rebound out of the net, before it can hit the floor, steps out of
bounds and passes quickly into her partner, who is now on
the opposite wing, and they repeat the same drill going back
up the floor on the opposite side of the floor.

Run both sides of the floor. The next twosome in line starts
when the first twosome reaches half court. The drill is
continuous, no stopping.

Pointers:
1. Stress that the re-bounder quickly snatch the ball out of
the net and get it in-bounds, and her partner should be
ready for the reception on the wing.
2. The dribbler speed dribbles and comes to a jump stop
before making the pass for the lay-up.
3. The shooter receives the pass on the move, makes the
jump stop to get control, and lays the ball in off the glass.
4. A good conditioning drill!

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

322
 4 on 4 Transition
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This drill emphasizes the transition game (see Transition Offense, Transition Defense), both
offensive and defensive skills.

Setup: (red is offense, blue is defense, yellow is the

coach with the ball).

Running the drill:

The four offensive players line up on the end line,
while the four defensive players line up at the level of
the free throw line.

The coach has the ball and simultaneously yells the

names of two of the defensive players (in this
diagram, #'s 2 and 4) and throws the ball to the
offense.

The offense immediately tries to get the fast break

going. The defense tries to stop the break. In order
to give the offense a head start, the two defensive
players whose names the coach called out, have to
first go touch the end line, and then sprint back to
help on defense.

The offense tries to score. If the defense steals the

ball or gets the rebound, or gets possession after a
made basket, they quickly push the ball back up the
floor for their own fast break and score. Once they
score, or are stopped, the ball goes back to the
coach, the players line up again, and it starts all over
again, but this time with the blue team on the end
line, and the red team defending.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved

323
 The Rebound-Outlet-Break Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

by Tim Marshall
Head Girls Basketball Coach
J.C. Penney High School
Hamilton, Missouri.

Objective
The objectives of the R-O-B Drill include both offensive and defensive skills during the
transition phase of going from one side to the other, as in offense to defense and vice versa.

Set-up
To set up the drill you will need 2 re-bounders(R1 & R2), 2 shooters(S1& S2), 2 outlets(O1 &
O2), 1 defender(D1), and the entry passer(M).

To Begin
R1 and R2 start on the blocks facing S1 and S2. M will pass to S1 or S2 - we will go with S1 to
explain the drill.(diagram 2)

When S1 catches the ball:

- R1 must call "ball" and cover S1 immediately.
- R2 must cover S2 and deny pass.
- S1 catches the ball and shoots immediately.*
- R1 must contest shot, yell "shot", and screen S1.
- R2 hears "shot" and screens S2.
*alternative is to allow one pass to S2 to work on pass denial and R2's communication -
"ball", "shot", etc.

When shot occurs:

- R1 and R2 are to screen out shooters until ball hits floor.
- R1 and R2 hold screens whether shot is made or not.
- S1 and S2 battle to get offensive rebounds.

If R1 gets rebound:
- O1 calls for "outlet" while moving up the floor.
- O2 breaks for basket.
- S1 must pressure pass, then retreats on 'D' after throw.
- S2 must hustle back to stop O2.
- D1 drops back to stop 2-on-1 break.
324
 - O1 and O2 try to score on D1 before help arrives(S1& S2).

Drill Rotation:
- R1 and R2 become S1 and S2.
- S1 and S2 become O1 and O2.
- If O1 shoots ball, he becomes D1.*
- D1 and O2 go to R1 and R2 lines.
*Shooter becomes defender

Variables:
- If S1 or S2 get the rebound, then R1 and R2 must run two walls.*
- Anyone who makes a turnover must run two walls.
- If O1 forces turnover passing to O2, he runs two walls and O2 goes to D1.
*S1 and S2 remain as shooters

What we are trying to accomplish:

1. Transition
A. We want to instill in the defense to become the offense immediately by finding the
outlet, pushing the ball up the floor as quickly as possible and gaining the advantage -
ex. 2 on 1 break. We must do this before the opponents can get back and 'help out' on
defense at the other end of the floor.

B. We want the offensive players to battle for offensive rebounds, put pressure on the
opposing passer, and still get back on defense as quickly as possible.

2. Rebounding
A. The objective here on defense is to teach proper blocking-out techniques and
sustaining the screen as long as possible.

B. On offense we try to instill a more aggressive attitude toward the non- shooter in
going after offensive rebounds and the shooter to follow his shot.

3. Communication
A. The re-bounders are to communicate where the "ball" is when their man has the ball,
and to tell everyone that a "shot" has gone up, which will tell teammates it is time to
block out.(This can be enhanced by allowing S1 and S2 to pass the ball before
shooting.)

B. We also want re-bounders to get in the habit of getting the ball to an "outlet" as
quickly as possible.

325
As with most drills, there are many variations that you can use to meet the needs of your
players. We found this drill to be successful for players who needed work on communication,
pushing the ball up the floor, and especially in getting good position and blocking out on the
defensive end of the boards.

326
 11-Man Drill (Full Court)
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by Sherry Gels

7th grade girls coach
Talawanda Middle School
Oxford, Ohio

This is a good full-court drill that emphasizes 3-on-2 offense vs. defense, rebounding, outlet
pass, transition and conditioning. And the players like running this drill. You need a minimum of
eleven players to do this drill. In the diagram below, I have actually used 15 players. There is
also a half-court version that you can use as a pre-game warm-up, and this only requires a
minimum of seven players.

Set-up:
Refer to the diagram at the left. You will start with a
3-on-2 situation with 1,2 and 3 on offense vs. 4 and
5. Two defensive players are waiting on the
opposite end of the floor, and there are four lines,
two along each sideline.

The drill:
1, 2 and 3 try to score against 4 and 5. When a
shot is taken (even if it is made), the rebounder
makes the quick outlet pass to either 6 or 7 who
step inbounds from the sidelines for the outlet pass.
Now the rebounder, 6 and 7 break down the floor
where the other two defenders are waiting for them.
After the shot, the 8 and 9 come in for the outlet
pass.

Let's back up to the initial 3-on-2 with 1, 2 and 3 vs. 4 and 5. Here are some more rules.
1. Only one shot is allowed.

2. No matter who rebounds, whether offense or defense, that person outlets to the sidelines
and is part of the next offense transitioning down court. If a defender makes a steal, that
person is the new offensive person along with the two outlet players.

3. Of the 5 players involved in the initial 3-on-2, the four that do not get the rebound or steal,
immediately yell "defense". The first two to yell it become the next two defenders and the other
two go to the ends of the two lines on opposite sides.

Go to the next page to see the 7-Man Drill.

327
 7-Man Half Court Drill
Here is the half-court version that can be used if you only have seven players. You can also
use this as a pre-game warm-up drill.
Set-up:
Again, the players will be going 3-on-2. Start on the
baseline with just one player in the middle, and two
lines on opposite sides... see diagram.
Defenders 4 and 5 are in position. #1 outlet passes
to #3 (or 2). All three offensive players sprint or
speed dribble to the half-court line, touch the line and
then turn around and go 3-on-2 vs. the two defensive
players.

The same rules apply as in the full-court drill above,

except that the player who gets the rebound or steal,
instead of making the outlet to the side, runs quickly
out-of-bounds in the center under the basket (where
#1 started initially) and then passes inbounds to
either of the next two players in line (either 6 or 7).

Again, the four who did not get the rebound immediately yell "defense". The first two to yell it
become the next two defenders on that end and the other two go to the ends of the two lines on
opposite sides.

Copyright 2002 James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

328
 Low Post Offensive Drills
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This page consists of a series of drills that will help develop the offensive skills of your low post
players. See also: Low Post Moves.

Single Person Drills

The first two drills are done with only one player. So the player can do these anytime, alone.
The first drill is the classic "Mikan drill", which gives the player a feel for how the ball reacts off
the glass and improves his/her "touch" under the basket as well as footwork. The second drill
is "Roll and Retrieve, Power Lay-up drill".

Mikan Drill
Do this drill right under the basket. Become familiar with how the ball comes off the backboard,
and at different angles. Start by standing right under the basket. Step on the left foot and do a
baby hook lay-up on the right side, using the backboard. Catch the rebound and step on the
right foot and do the baby hook lay-up on the left side using your left hand. No dribbling is
allowed. Repeat this continuously alternating right and left sides for a couple minutes. This will
help you with your lay-ups, both right and left-handed, and give you a better feel for the
backboard.

Roll and Retrieve, Power Lay-up Drill

In this drill, the player has the ball at the right elbow and rolls it on the floor toward the right low
block. He/she runs after the ball, retrieves it, squares up to the basket, makes a pump fake,
and makes the power lay-up, or bank-shot off the glass. Make ten shots on one side and then
repeat the drill on the left side.

Three Person Drills

The following drills are done with three players. Diagram A shows the set-up for the next three
drills. Do each of these drills for one or two minutes and then rotate players, so that each
player gets a chance to perform the moves.

Drop Step Drill

Player #1 starts under the basket. He/she sprints out,
jump stops, and retrieves the ball lying on the left
block. He/she makes a head-shoulder fake toward the
lane, and then executes the drop step move by
extending the outside (right) leg toward the baseline
and pivoting. He/she makes a one-bounce power-
dribble adjustment and powers the ball up off the glass
using the left hand. He/she then sprints back under
the basket, V-cuts out to the right block, jump stops,
retrieves the ball on the right block and does the
baseline drop-step move on the right block. He/she
continues back and forth from block to block for one to
two minutes. Players #2 and #3 rebound and place
the ball on the blocks for player #1. After one or two
minutes, the players rotate and #2 now does the
moves.

329
 Jump Hook to the Lane Drill
The same set-up and procedure are used in this drill. This time, instead of making the baseline
drop step move, the player fakes the baseline drop step. He/she drops the inside leg toward
the lane and hoop, and does the one-handed jump hook move, extending the shooting arm
high while keeping his/her body between the ball and the defender.

Turn and Shoot Drill

Again, the same set-up (Diagram A) is used as in the Drop Step Drill. This time player #1,
sprints out from under the basket, jump stops, retrieves the ball, makes a head-shoulder fake
toward the lane, pivots on the outside foot and shoots the short bank-shot off the glass. He/she
then sprints back under the hoop, V-cuts out to the right block and repeats the move on the
right side (jump stop, retrieve ball, fake to the lane, pivot on the left foot, and bank it in).

Power Shot Drill

(Diagram B) This drill will simulate contact when
going up for the shot. Players should learn to "finish"
even when under pressure.

In this drill, the ball is placed on the floor, in the lane

near the basket, between defenders #2 and #3.
Players #2 and #3 extend their arms high over their
heads and keep them there at all times. #1 runs in
and picks up the ball and puts it under his/her chin
with elbows out in a strong position. He/she then tries
to power the shot up between the arms of the
defenders. The defenders may "body up" and bump
the shooter, and may actually hit his/her shooting arm,
but may not jump or attempt to block the shot. After a
few attempts, rotate players.

If you want, you can even include boxing-out and

rebounding in this drill by adding the 3-Man
Rebounding Drill after each shot is taken.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

330
 Basic Dribbling Drills
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Do these drills at the start of each practice, and all season long. We usually precede these
drills with our ball-handling drills. Do each of these drills for one minute. These drills can be
done at home, without the team. With the team, we have one of our best dribblers lead the drill
by facing the team. The team is spread out and follows the leader who calls out and does the
various dribbling drills.

Dribbling Eights
This drill is similar to the ball-handling Figure Eights drill except now the ball is dribbled through
your legs in a figure-of-eight motion. Use both hands and be sure to look up while doing this
drill. (1 minute)

Up and Downs
Start by dribbling the ball in front of you so that the ball reaches your waist high. Gradually,
bounce the ball harder and harder until you are dribbling the ball as high as you can without
jumping. Then gradually dribble the ball lower and lower until you are on one knee, finishing as
close to the floor as possible. Pound the ball quickly to keep it going. Then do it with the other
hand.

Kills
Dribble the ball waist high, then suddenly "kill" it by dribbling it as low as you can, hold this for a
few seconds, then bring it back up to waist high. Do this several times with each hand.

Circle Dribbles
This drill is similar to "Circles" (see Ball Handling) except now the ball is dribbled.
Dribble around your left leg then your right. Next, using both hands, dribble around both legs
which should be together. Next, kneel down on one knee and dribble around your body and
under your leg. After that, switch knees and continue. Then, while on your knees, dribble
around your body, using both hands.

Back and Forth Between the Legs

Get crouched over with your right knee and leg forward. V-dribble the ball behind the extended
leg. Repeat behind the other leg.

Crossover Dribbles
Dribble with your right hand. Bounce the ball once on the right side, then cross the ball over in
front of you by bouncing it to the left. The left hand now bounces it on the left once, and then
crossover back to the right, where the right takes over again. Repeat this procedure.

V-Dribble in Front
Start with the right hand and dribble once on the right side. Then dribble the ball in front you, as
if you were going to cross over to the left side. Instead of getting it with your left hand, roll your
right hand over the top of the ball, and bring it back to the right. Keep dribbling like this: right
then cross over V-dribble. Repeat with the left hand.

See Dribbling for details of the control dribble, speed dribble, crossover dribble, in and out
dribble, hesitation dribble, behind the back dribble, and through the legs dribble.
See also: Ball Handling, Dribble Tag

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

331
 Tight Chairs Dribbling Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This drill will improve dribbling and dribble moves with many repetitions in a short period of
time. Inform players that they can also do this drill at home in their basement or driveway.
Set-up:
Set up six chairs or cones as indicated in the diagram. We usually start with the left hand, so
we face the row of chairs on the right with their seats facing the endline, while the seats of the
left row of chairs face the half-court line. This is so the dribbler can hit the seat of the chair with
his off hand as he/she makes a dribble move.

The Drill:
Each player has a ball and will dribble between the chairs,
making a prescribed dribble-move at each chair. We do the
same move at each of the six chairs and will do one or two
"laps" through the chairs for each dribble move (depending on
how much time we want to spend on the drill). Some of the
dribble moves (see Dribbling) that we use are:
(1) the crossover dribble
(2) in-and-out move
(3) behind the back move
(4) thru the legs dribble
(5) spin move

We start with the left hand. After doing all the moves left-handed, we turn the chairs around,
start from the opposite side and do all the same moves with the right hand.

Pointers:
We want the drill up-tempo, at "game-speed". Stress that your players "attack" the chair and
keep their eyes forward.
This drill will help develop your player's dribble moves and ball-handling. We have all players,
including post players, do this drill. You may be surprised at the improvement that you will see
over the course of the season if you frequent this drill for 5-10 minutes.

Copyright 2002-2004, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

332
 "Sideline Dribbling Drills"
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net
Also see: “Dribbling“.
If done every practice for 10-15 minutes, these are the drills that can really make a difference in
your team's ball-handling and dribbling skills by the end of the season. These skills are the
foundation for many of the offensive moves that the player makes when she has the ball.

Sideline Moves Drill

(See Diagram A) Have your players pair up along the sideline spread out. The first player in
each pair dribbles from sideline to sideline right-handed, and then back left-handed. The coach
will let the players know which move he wants them to execute at the half way point going
across (right-handed), and then again coming back (left-handed). The ball is then passed to her
partner, who goes next. Have each player do each of the moves down and back twice before
moving onto he next move.

333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
Below are the moves you should work on. You may vary these from
day to day. But have them try even the difficult moves... challenge
them... even if the ball does end up rolling all over the place!

1. control dribble with change to speed dribble

2. speed dribble with change to control dribble
3. crossover dribble
4. in and out move (fake crossover)
5. hesitation move (rock back, then go!)
6. pull back and crossover move
7. step out (sideways) and crossover move
8. through the legs
9. behind the back
10. spin move

For explanations of some of these moves, see Dribbling.

To see animated examples of these moves, see Steph's Dribbling
Drills.

Stutter Drill
(See Diagram B) You can use the same sideline setup as above
with partners, or choose to run your entire team, sideline to sideline
with this drill (and then after a few trips you are finished in half the
time).

This time the players again will start dribbling across right-handed.
When they have reached about 1/3 across, you blow the whistle
and they stationary "stutter" dribble with legs pistoning up and
down and pounding the dribble hard and low, the player bent over
forward at the waist with knees bent. After five seconds blow the
whistle again, and they resume dribbling across. When they reach
2/3 across, blow the whistle again and they resume the stationary
"stutter" dribble. Whistle again and they finish across. They pivot
and come back, now with the left hand, doing their stutter dribbles
at the 1/3 and 2/3 marks again.

After you do this drill a few times, you won't have to blow the
whistle... the kids will know where to stop and stutter, and know to
stutter for a 5-count before going again.

345
 Full Court Dribbling Drills
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

These full court dribbling drills feature the speed dribble, lay-ups, using the weak hand, and the
hesitation move. They are also all good conditioning drills.
5-Minute Drill
Have your players line-up behind #1, on the baseline (see
diagram). #1 speed dribbles down the court with the left
hand. When she reaches point B, she angles toward the
basket for the left-handed lay-up. She gets her rebound,
and starts back up the floor on the opposite side, again
using the left hand, finishes the lay-up and moves to the
end of the line.

The next player starts as soon as the preceding player

reaches half court. Have all the players go around several
times.

You can set a time limit (such as 5 minutes), and require

the players to make a certain number of lay-ups in that
time. If they fail to "beat the clock", you have them run! --
maybe speed dribble up and back two more times (even
more dribbling practice).

You can also run this drill first with the right hand, and then
do the left (even more conditioning).

Variation #1, Hesitation Move.

Have each player do a "hesitation" move when she reaches points A, B, C and D.

Variation #2, Finish the Lay-up Against Pressure.

Place a defender in the paint at each end (a coach or manager), who offers a token defense
against the lay-up... no blocks or steals allowed (nothing that would slow the flow of the drill).

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

346
 Dribbling Moves Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Use this full-court dribbling drill to practice specific dribbling moves.

Refer to Diagram A. Use two lines, and start out using the right-handed dribble. On each end of
the floor, have an assistant or manager stand at the arc as a token, stationary defender (does
not actually steal the ball or defend). Each player should have a ball. The player starts at the
half-court sideline and dribbles up to the token defender, and then executes the dribble move
that you have told the group to do. This could be a hesitation (rocker) move, an "in and out"
move, a stutter move, a crossover dribble, a rocker step combined with a crossover dribble, a
stutter cross-over, a behind the back move, a through the legs move, etc. (see Dribbling). After
making the move, he dribbles around and shoots the lay-up (or a jump stop and short jumper
on the crossover move to the lane). He gets his own rebound, dribbles to the opposite corner,
pivots dribbles up the sideline and makes another move there and gets into the line going the
other way.

You can practice some or all of the dribbling moves above. Then have the lines face the
opposite direction (Diagram B) and repeat all these moves with the left-hand.

Note that the upper part of each diagram shows the crossover move to the lane, while each
lower court shows the non-crossover move... this is just for illustration. Have all players do the
same move on both ends of the floor.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

347
 Dribble Tag Ball Handling Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This drill will improve ball-handling and the kids seem to like it. It is similar to the kid's game
"tag."

Set-up:
Every player on the team has a ball, and is restricted to a half court area. All the players must
dribble the entire time.

The Drill:
Start the game with one player as "it". While maintaining her dribble, she must try to tag
another player, who is then "it". Players try to avoid getting tagged and becoming "it". They
must stay within the half court area and must continue dribbling. If a player leaves the area, or
double-dribbles, stops her dribble, or gets tagged, then she is "it".

This drill will help develop ball handling, and to avoid getting tagged, players must keep their
heads up. If you have a large group with some good ball handlers, and some not so good, you
can put the better dribblers on one end, and the other group on the other end, so the same kids
don't get picked on all the time. You can vary this drill by making them use the opposite (weak)
hand only.

Also see:
Dribbling
Basic Dribbling Drills
Ball Handling

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

348
 Team Shooting Drills
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Here are several team shooting drills that we like. We rotate these drills from practice to
practice, trying to avoid boredom from the same old drill.

Drill 1: "12 Sets"

Have players partner-up and use all of your baskets. Each
player will shoot 12 sets of shots. Each set consists of a 3-
pointer (yellow), a shot-fake with jump shot (green), a catch
and shoot jump shot (blue), and a lay-up (pink). We start in
one corner and rotate around each of the 12 spots (seen in
black in the diagram). The partner rebounds and passes
back to the shooter. We rotate shooters after each set of
four, so the shooter becomes the rebounder and vice-
versa.

Drill 2: "3-2-1" Shooting

This is a fun competitive drill. Have players partner-up and
use all of your baskets. Each player will shoot nine sets of
shots (see diagram). Each set consists of a 3-pointer, a
shot-fake with jump shot, and a lay-up. We start in one
corner and rotate around each of the nine spots (seen in
black in the diagram). The partner rebounds and passes
back to the shooter. We rotate shooters after each set of
"3-2-1", so the shooter becomes the rebounder and vice-
versa. The two players compete against each other and
keep track of their individual scores. Each made 3-pointer =
3 points, a jump shot = 2 points, and a lay-up = 1 point.
The loser does push-ups.

Drill 3: "45" Shooting

This is another fun, challenging drill. We use both baskets with half of the team at each end.
Each player will shoot nine sets of shots. We start in one corner and rotate around each of the
nine spots (seen in black in the diagram). Each set consists of a 3-pointer and a mid-range
jump shot.

A rebounder rebounds the 3-point shot and passes back

to the shooter who shot fakes and shoots a mid-range
jumper. After the jump shot, the shooter becomes the
rebounder for the next shooter. Each player keeps track
of his/her own score. Three-pointers = 3 points and mid-
range jumpers = 2 points. A perfect score would be 45
(nine 3's and nine 2's). Each player must try to achieve a
score that you set for them (for varsity, we use a score of
28). Any player who does not achieve the target score
does push-ups. We intentionally make the target score
somewhat difficult to achieve, so a lot of players usually
end up doing push-ups!

349
Drill 4: "Team Shooting"
We use two lines. The shooting line is at the point. The wing passes to the shooter who takes
the 3-point shot, follows his shot, gets the rebound and goes to the passing line. Passers move
to the shooting line. Everyone will shoot two "3's". Next, the shooter will receive the pass, shot
fake, take one or two dribbles and shoot the jump shot. Everyone shoots two jumpers. Next,
our shooter will start at the free-throw line, cut outside and then back-cut to receive the pass for
a pull-up jump shot. Everyone does two of these. Next, the shooter again starts at the free-
throw line, cuts outside, back-cuts, receives the pass and dribbles in for the lay-up. After
completing this rotation, we will move the passing line to the left wing and repeat all the same
shots with the pass coming from the left wing.

Copyright 2002-2005, James A. Gels, all rights reserved

350
 2 Man Shooting Drills
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Here are several partner shooting drills. Have each player get a partner and use all of your
baskets. Make sure players receive the pass in triple threat position, and use correct shooting
form (See Set Shot shooting form).

Drill #1, Catch and Shoot.
Player #1 makes a good chest pass to player #2. #1
follows the pass and closes-out on #2, but does not try to
block the shot or simply fly by the shooter. #2 takes the
shot (no dribbling) and follows it for the rebound. Now
player #2 passes back out to player #1 (who is at position
A) and closes-out on #1, who is now the shooter. After
both players have shot from position A, they move next to
position B, and on around the circle and then back
around again (E->D->C->B->A). If you are coaching
younger players, have them move in closer so that
correct shooting form is not compromised.

Drill #2, Ball Fake and Shoot Jumper.

Follow the same procedure as in Drill #1, but this time have your shooter first make a ball fake
or jab step, move around the defender using no more than one or two dribbles, and then shoot
the jump shot. He can move in either direction, using a pump fake and moving right, or a ball
fake and crossover dribble to his left.

Drill #3, Fake and Drive for the Lay-up.

Again, the same procedure is used. This time the receiver makes a shot fake and explodes
through the defender (rub off his shoulder) for the drive to the hoop and lay-up.

Drill #4, Anything Goes!

Same procedure as above, but now the shooter has all of the above options and the defender
plays all out defense.

Drill #5, Elbow Shooting.

Player #1 is the re-bounder for player #2. #2 starts at the
left elbow, fakes left and cuts to the right elbow. #1 passes
to #2 so that the pass arrives at the right elbow the same
time #2 does. #2 plants the inside foot, squares up and
takes the shot. Make sure that correct shooting form is
being used and that the shooter does not "drift" sideways.
#1 rebounds the shot and passes back to #2 for the shot
now at the left elbow. #2 continues moving back and forth
from elbow to elbow for a total of ten shots. Then the
players switch roles and #1 is the shooter for ten shots.
You can repeat this for as many sets as you want, getting
20, 30, 40 or 50 shots for each player.

The elbow shooting drill can be modified. You can have the shooter catch the ball, make a
shot fake, cross-over dribble to the middle of the paint (between the free throw line and the
circle hash marks) for the short jumper. This is especially useful for your post players, helping
them to acquire that "soft touch" on the short, point blank jumper.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

351
 Pairs-Shooting Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This drill will help shooting, spotting up, and will emphasize that shooters should follow their
shots. In addition, this drill also helps passing skills.

Set-up:
Each player gets a partner, preferably with another player who plays a similar position. That is,
the a perimeter player should pair up with another perimeter player, and post players should
pair up together. Each pair has a ball. Use all the baskets in the gym.

The Drill:
For perimeter players: One player starts on the right wing (player #1) and the other starts
opposite on the left wing (player #2). Player #1 on the right wing shoots, follows her shot,
rebounds and passes out to her partner (#2) on the left wing. Player #1 then spots up at
another place on the perimeter. Player #2 takes her shot, follows it, rebounds, and passes to
#1, who is now spotted up in a different location. This rotation continues, with the players
moving around to all the locations that they will normally shoot from in a game... corners, top of
the key, etc.

For post players: Use the same drill as above except the post players should be taking their
shots inside, in the paint, around the hoop, and can actually work on their post-up moves. After
rebounding, the player can dribble the ball out and pass down into the post to his partner.

Make sure the shooters are squared up, using good technique, elbow in, follow through, no
drifting sideways, no dribbling. Shooters should receive the ball in "triple threat" position.
Make sure the passes are sharp and accurate. Players should sprint after the ball and to their
shooting spots... no loafing! Do this for several minutes, blow the whistle, and have the pairs
rotate baskets.

For a variation, do the same drill but instead of spot stationary shooting, have the shooter fake
the shot, dribble adjust, and then take the jumper.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

352
 Close-out Shooting Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This drill gets your players to practice shooting contested shots, which is more game-like.

Setup:
Use three players at each basket, with one ball. Use all the baskets in the gym if you need to.
Have the players shoot from areas on the floor where they will usually be in a game.

The Drill:
Start with two players on the right wing (#1 and #2) and one on the left wing #3 (see Diagram
A).

#1 shoots, follows her shot and gets the rebound and then passes to #3, and defensively
"closes-out" on #3 with hand up so as to contest or distract the shooter (Diagram B). Do not
actually attempt to block the shot. The shooter can take one quick dribble sideways to get
open. Then #3 shoots, follows her shot, rebounds and passes to #2, and closes-out. Now #2
shoots and follows the same procedure.

This rotation continues for several minutes. Then you can change baskets, or change the
location of the shots and use the corners, or high-low.

Make sure the passes are crisp and accurate, the players sprint, the defense makes good
close-outs (with baseline foot back), and the shooters are squared up, using good shooting
technique with proper ball "rotation".

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

353
 2 on 1 Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This offensive drill helps players read the defense in a 2 on 1 situation, and helps them to learn
when to take it to the hoop or pass off to their teammate.

Setup:
Make two lines, one with perimeter players out at half
court on the left sideline. The other line is made up of
your post players, and is opposite along the right
baseline.
There is a token defender (maybe a manager or an
assistant) on the guards. One of your post players is
the other defender in the paint area and will try to stop
the 2 on 1 break.

The Drill:
Player #1 has the ball, makes a fake or jab step, and
goes around the token defender. He then dribbles
toward the hoop, and tries to exploit the 2 on 1 situation
with the defender. Th first player in the post line along
the baseline is his teammate. The guard has to decide
whether to take it to the hoop, stop and pop a jumper, or
pass off to his teammate. He should try to get the
defender to commit himself so he can take advantage.
If the defender comes up, he should pass to the post
player. The post player should maintain proper
spacing, and if he gets the ball, take it strong to the
hoop and lay it in off the glass (or slam dunk it). If the
defender lays back, the guard should take it to
the hoop. In this drill, discourage the outside jumper.
The offense should try to get a lay-up every time.

The rotation is that #1 now starts a new line on the right

sideline (see the diagram to the right). #2 starts a new
post line along the left baseline. Use the same
defender until all the post players have been on offense,
then use another post player as the defender.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

354
 3 Man 2 Ball Shooting Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Setup:
Have three players and two balls at a basket. Use the side baskets too. Each group has a
shooter, rebounder, and passer.
Players should shoot from areas where they usually shoot from in a game.

Wing-to-Wing Motion: (Diagram A)

The shooter starts at the right wing with a ball, the passer at the free-throw line with another
ball, and the rebounder in the center of the lane. The shooter shoots then sprints to the
opposite wing, spots-up, and shoots again. He/she keeps repeating this, going wing-to-wing
without dribbling. The rebounder rebounds each shot, passes to the passer, who passes to
the shooter. Run this for 1 minute. Then change roles, with each player taking a turn at each
of the three positions.

Important Points:
Make sure the shooter is squared up each time and stationary, not moving sideways.
Avoid dribbling. Make crisp, sharp passes. No dogging it -- sprint. You can make a
competitive game out of this drill by keeping score.

Baseline to Free Throw Circle Motion: (Diagram B)

The shooter moves back and forth from the baseline to the free throw circle.

Corner-to-Corner Motion: (Diagram C)

The shooter moves from corner to corner.

For a variation, have the shooter fake the shot. Have the defender "fly" at the shooter, and
then the shooter dribble adjusts and shoots the jumper.

Copyright 2002, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

355
Three Line Lay-up Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This pre-game warm-up drill helps improve players' passing, cutting, receiving and ability to
make lay-ups.

Setup:
Two players start at the top of the key, one player in the right corner, and the rest of the players
lineup at half-court near the right sideline.

The first two players in line have balls.

Drill:
Player #1 passes to player #2 and cuts down the right sideline, then makes sharp cut to the
basket. Player #2 passes the ball back to #1 who shoots a lay-up (see diagram A). After
shooting, #1 goes to the top-of-the-key line.

Player #2 rebounds the shot and passes to player #4 in the corner. Player #2 then follows her
pass and goes to the corner. Player #4 passes to the next player in line, and follows her pass,
going to the end of half-court line.

See also: Lay-ups

356
 Free Throw Shooting Drills
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Drill 1. "1-and-1"
Have your team break up into pairs, or threes, and use all the baskets for free-throw shooting.
Instead of shooting 5, 10 or 20 consecutive free-throws, have them shoot like in a game
situation, shooting the "1 and 1". If the shooter misses the first of the "1 and 1", he/she runs a
lap and doesn’t get the second shot. If the first shot is made, but the second is missed, another
lap is run. Each player has to make a certain number of free-throws (maybe 10). Shooters who
miss a lot, will be running a lot of laps and this is good for simulating game fatigue (and the
pressure to make each shot).

Drill 2. "Plus 2, Minus 2"

Have shooters pair up (or in 3's). Each player will shoot sets of two free-throws. If the shot is
swished (nothing but net), he/she gets +1. A miss is -1. A shot that is made but not swished is
0. Any time one player gets to +2, his partner(s) must do five push-ups. Any time a player gets
to -2, he/she must do five push-ups. Do the drill for 5 minutes.

Drill 3. "Shoot 10"

Have shooters pair up (or in 3's). Each player will shoot ten free-throws. This is more of an
individual drill, and each shooter's goal is to make 8 of 10 free-throws. If he fails to make 8, he
must do ten push-ups, or run laps.

Drill 4. "Shooter-Rebounder-Runner"
This drill attempts to simulate the game situation where the free-shooter is fatigued. Use all
your baskets and break the players up into groups of three. At each basket, there is one
shooter, one rebounder and one "runner". The shooter shoots two free-throws, while the
rebounder rebounds for the shooter, and the runner sprints a lap.
After shooting the two free-throws, the shooter now becomes the rebounder, the rebounder
becomes the runner, and the runner (who is now tired from running) becomes the shooter of
the next two shots. Continue this rotation.

You can continue running this drill for a specified time period, or until each player has shot a
specified number of free-throws (say 20).

Drill 5. "team competition"

Do this drill at the end of practice when players are tired. We want to simulate a game situation.
Use both ends of the court, half of the team on one basket, the other half on the other basket.
Tell the kids we are pretending the game is tied at 50-50. Then first player in each line will
shoot the first of a 1 and 1 free throw. If the first is made, then the player shoots the bonus. If
the other team misses the first shot, they may not shoot again until the other team has
completed the bonus shot. Keep track of the score with each free throw. Then the next player
in each line does the 1 and 1, and so forth. The first team to say 60 is the winner. If there is
time, play the best 2 out of 3 games. The losers have to run. A player from the losing team who
made all her free throws can be rewarded by not having to run.

Note: make sure each player gets to shoot...the above example is for 5 players on each team.
If you only have four on each team, make the starting score 52 - 52 and the winning score 60,
so each player gets to shoot. If you have 12 players, use 48 - 48 as the starting score, etc.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

357
 Low Post Power Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Your post players must learn how to "finish" and score against a defender. See the diagram.

#1 posts up on the low block. #2 plays defense. The coach or manager makes the pass into
the low post player, #1. #1 executes the drop step to the baseline move (see “Post Moves”)
and tries to score against the defender. Initially, have your defender allow the drop step move,
but contest the shot. #1 now becomes the defender and the #2 defender goes to the end of the
line. The next person in line becomes the offensive player.
Variations.
Next have your players rotate through each of the
following moves:
1. drop step to the lane and jump hook.
2. turn and shoot move
3. up and under move.

Eventually, go "live" with the offensive player

permitted to do any of the moves, and the
defender playing all out defense.

Then move to the opposite low block and work

that side of the basket.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

358
 Pairs Passing Drills
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

(Note: at the bottom, read the proper techniques for the chest pass, bounce pass, and
overhead pass.)

You must do passing drills and never assume your players are good passers. Poor passing will
destroy an offense faster than anything. Excellent, crisp passing makes it all work. Most
turnovers are related to bad passing or receiving. All players must become good at the chest
pass, bounce pass and overhead pass.

Set-up:
Have each player get a partner, and each pair has a ball, so they can "play catch" with each
other. Have the partners separate about 12 - 15 feet (comfortable passing distance), and face
each other.

Chest pass
Have the players practice each of the three basic passes, starting with the chest pass.
Demonstrate the proper techniques with "stepping into" the pass with one foot forward. Snap
the pass, with the thumbs going through the ball and extending toward the receiver. Make sure
the players pass the ball crisply, and not "lob" their passes. Hit the receiver in the chest. The
receiver should show a target with her hands extended toward the passer. Feet should be
squared and shoulder-width apart. Have the passers alternate the lead foot.

Bounce Pass
Next, work on bounce passes. The ball should hit the ground about three-quarters from the
receiver and bounce right to his chest. Again make sure players are alternating their lead foot.

Overhead Pass
Next, work on the two-handed overhead pass or outlet pass. Have the partners move a little
farther apart, so that you are working on a longer pass. Players should snap their passes with
some arc, but be sure that they are not lobbing their passes too high. The arc should be just
enough to get over the extended hands of a defender, but not so high that the pass "floats".
Alternate the lead foot with each pass. This pass can be thrown hard, and is effective as the
outlet pass after a rebound, to start the fast break. It is also good for throwing over zone
defenses ("skip passes"). To simulate the outlet pass, after receiving the ball, have the passer
turn his back to the receiver, then simulate pulling the ball in, pivot, and make the overhead
pass.

Pairs Shuffle Drill (passing on the move)

Have all the pair partners line up on one end-line. Each pair has a ball. The players are about
12 - 15 feet apart. The first pair starts, shuffling the full length of the floor in a straight line and
back again, making accurate chest passes back and forth the entire way, with no traveling or
dribbling.

Pairs Full-Court Dribble-Pass Drill

(See diagram A) Two lines on one end of the court as shown below in diagram A, with the left
line players each having a ball. The first player (player A) in left line speed dribbles up to the
three-point line and passes to player B sprinting up the side line, who catches the ball, speed
dribbles to the half-court line and passes back to player A. Player A then dribbles to the top of
the circle, passes back to player B cutting to the hoop for the lay-up. Player A gets the rebound
and drill repeats going back up the opposite sideline. The second players in line start off once
the previous twosome has reached half court. You can vary this by requiring a jump stop
before each pass and after each reception.

359
Pairs Passing, Find the Receiver
(Diagram B above) Often I see kids make a bad pass because they actually threw the ball
before first locating their receiver (especially against a full-court press). Kids must learn to
look before they pass! With this drill, the passer must first find the receiver before making the
pass. Refer to diagram B above. Use both baskets. Have a line under each basket. The first
player in line (player #1) speed dribbles out to the three-point line, make a jump stop and a
reverse pivot. Meanwhile, the next player in line (player #2) sprints out to either corner (mix it
up so the passer has to look to find her). The passer makes the crisp chest pass to #2, cuts to
the hoop, receives the pass back from #2, and finishes the lay-up. #2 rebounds, and now
becomes player #1 and dribbles out and repeats the drill.

See also: 3-Man Passing Drills

Learning the Jump Stop (passing drill)

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

360
 Rapid-Fire Passing Drills
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

One-Ball Rapid Fire

Setup:
Have your players line up facing a solid wall, about two feet from the wall (or a toss-back
rebounding device).
Drill:
Each player begins rapid fire passing against the wall, moving back about two feet with each
pass until 10 feet away (5th pass). Then he starts moving closer to wall by two feet with each
pass, until 10 passes are completed. Repeat this 10-pass cycle until each player has made a
total 20 passes.
Pointers:
Make sure good passing technique is used, and passers step-into the pass. Have them
practice their "no look" passes.

Two-Ball Rapid Fire

Setup:
Use groups of four or five players. There is one passer about 6 feet away from and facing a
line of receivers (the rest of the group). The passer has a ball and so does one of the
receivers.
Drill:
On "Go", the passer passes quickly to any receiver, and the receiver who already has a ball
passes simultaneously back to the passer. The passes keep going back and forth to any
receiver who does not have the ball. Do as many chest passes as you can in 60 seconds and
then rotate.
Pointers:
Use good passing technique while keeping your eyes focused forward and not directly at the
receiver. Have your hands up and ready to receive the pass. Use your peripheral vision to see
the incoming pass.

361
 3 Man Passing Drills
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Form groups of three. Each group has a ball.

"Monkey in the Middle"
Line up the passers about 15 feet apart (comfortable passing distance). The third man in each
group is the "monkey in the middle" and tries to steal or deflect the ball, while the two outside
players try to pass to each other.

No dribbling is allowed. No easy lob passes over the defender are permitted. The passers can
work on pivoting and ball fakes to clear the passing lane. For example, the passer can fake an
overhead pass to get the defender to raise his hands, then make a crisp bounce pass.

Rotation: There's a couple ways of doing this. One easy way is to simply change the middle
man every minute, when you blow the whistle. Each person takes a turn in the middle.
Or, whenever the defender deflects the ball, the passer now becomes the "monkey in the
middle". If no deflections in 30 seconds, switch defenders.
Two Variations:
(1) Defender plays up tight on the passer (Diagram A).
After the pass is made, the defender sprints to the receiver
and again tries to deflect the pass. The new passer may not
pass until the defender is in position.

(2) Defender plays tight on the receiver, trying to deny the

pass. The group is confined to a given area on the floor.
The receiver must try to get open by V-cutting, back-cutting,
making contact with the defender and "bouncing off", etc.

3 Man Weave (passing on the move)

This old drill is still a good one. Have each of your three-
somes line up at one end-line. They should be spread out
so that one is in the middle and one on each sideline.
The middle man starts the weave by yelling "go" or slapping
the ball, and then passing to one of the wing players. He
then cuts around the back of the player he just passed to.
The wing player with the ball now passes to the opposite
wing player and cuts around and behind him. The wing with
the ball now passes to the original middle man and cuts
around him. And so it goes (see diagram). No dribbling is
allowed. The ball should never touch the floor. Receivers
should move toward the ball, and show a target for the
passer. The players should stay wide and always cut
around and behind the player they just passed to.

The next three-some can start once the previous group is

making their move to the hoop for the lay-up. Start a new
line as the far end, and when all groups have come to that
end-line, go back the other way.

See also: Pairs Passing Drills, Learning the Jump Stop (passing drill)
362
 Laker Drill -- Full-Court Passing and Lay-up Against Pressure
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This full court drill emphasizes passing, the speed dribble and lay-up against pressure,
defensive hustle, and conditioning.

Drill:
Use three lines. #1 throws the ball off the
backboard, gets the rebound and outlets to
either wing. Each player sprints up the floor,
staying in his lane. After passing to a wing, the
wing passes back to #1 and then #1 passes off
to the opposite wing, and so it goes.

Once the ball crosses half court, the wing who

received it across half court speed dribbles in for
the lay-up. Meanwhile the opposite wing
becomes a defender and sprints to the hoop to
either challenge the lay-up or take the charge.
#1 rebounds and starts the drill back up the
floor.

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

363
 Passing Drill 3-on-3
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This drill is more game-like with defenders pressuring the passer and receiver.

Setup:
Use three guards and three post players. You
can divide your 12-man squad into two groups
and use both ends of the court.

#1 is at the point. Place two defenders just above

the elbows (like against a 2-3 zone). Put a
defensive post in the middle of the lane, and two
offensive post players half way up the lane on
each side.

Running the drill:

Your point guard (#1), will dribble penetrate and
split the two defenders and pass to either post
player. The #3 defender will try to deny this pass.
The receiving post player can either shoot, make
a power move to the hoop, or dish off to the
opposite post, who finishes the lay-up.

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

364
 5-Man Weave Passing and Transition Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by:
Coach Thomas Koeller
Southwestern High School
Hazel Green, WI

Here is a variation of the old three man weave. In this

drill, five players are used and run the traditional weave
up the floor.

It becomes a transition drill on the way back. Coming

back up the floor, it is a full-court 3-on-2 situation. The
two defenders are (1) the player who shot the lay-up and
(2) the person who made the assist pass for the lay-up.
These two players play defense while the other three
attempt to push the ball up the floor and score.

365
 Triangle Passing Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Contributed by:
Tony Gregory
Louisville, KY

The pairs passing drills and 3-man passing drills can become boring if done every practice. Try
this "triangle" passing drill for some variety. This drill can be done well by younger players who
are not yet adept at full-court drills, such as the weave drill.

You can use both baskets and divide the squad into two groups. At each basket, create three
passing lines about 12 to 15 feet apart. One line is at the top of the key, another in the right
short corner area, and a third in the left short corner area. As an option, you can use cones or
marks on the floor, so that the lines don't "creep" inward.

To run the drill, start at the top of key station and

either pass to right or left (can go either direction).
The players start behind the cones, step out to
receive the pass and pass to the next station in
same direction. After the players make their pass,
they sprint to the next line in the same direction as
the ball, following their pass - no walking. After a
few sequences, change direction and also
alternate between chest passes, bounce passes,
and overhead passing.

This drill goes quickly and after a few iterations they get pretty good at it. The drill keeps them
moving, and provides a lot of touches in a short amount of time while improving their passing
techniques.

Pointers: Make sure correct passing techniques are used, that the players "step out" to meet
the pass, and that the players receive the ball and place it in triple threat position.

366
 Press Break Passing Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This drill teaches players facing full-court pressure and a trap, not to panic, to locate a receiver
and make a good, crisp pass. Often the first pass after the in-bounds pass is the crucial pass in
breaking the press, and is also the one often intercepted by the defense

This drill practices the in-bounds pass reception and

the first pass up the court, either to the center on the
ball-side sideline.

Use three lines for the offensive players (yellow).

Use three defenders (assistants). Have two set the
trap, after allowing the in-bounds pass. Have the
third defender play the gap between the two
offensive receivers and try to intercept the pass. You
could use a manager or coach to make the in-
bounds pass.

The offensive #1 player receives the in-bounds pass,

and immediately tries to locate the open receiver and
make the correct pass, with "zip". The passer should
use an "air" pass if possible (as the bounce-pass is
easier to intercept), and may need to use a head,
shoulder or pass fake to free up a receiver.

See also: Beat the Full-Court Press, Beating the 1-2-

1-1 Press

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

367
 Circle Box-Out Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This drill has players work on their boxing out technique.

Setup:
Have 10 (or 12) players get into position around the free throw circle. You can really use any
number of players as long as they have room to maneuver. The players should pair up with a
partner. Have guards go against guards, post players against post players. Have five
defensive players spread around the circle, and their offensive partners outside the circle. They
should be facing each other.

The Drill:
The coach puts the ball in the center of the circle, gets out of the way, and blows the whistle.
The offensive players try to get inside and get the ball. The defenders should immediately
pivot, put their backsides into the offensive players and keep them outside away from the ball.
They should continue boxing out for a count of 5. Then switch offense and defense.
Make sure defenders are using correct boxing out technique (see Rebounding), and do not
hold the offensive players. You can keep score and the losers run. Any holding fouls, give a
point to the offensive team. This puts pressure on each player to do his part in keeping his
man out.

See also: “Rebounding”, “Rebounding 2 Man Drill”

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

368
 Rebounding Box-Out Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Here's a good rebounding, box-out drill, as well as a shooting drill.

Setup:
Make two lines... the shooting line on the wing, and
the defense, box-out line at the free-throw line.

Drill:
Give the ball to the wing player. Have the first player
in the defensive line move over to defend the wing
player. Have the wing take a good shot (defense
should let him/her shoot the shot). Then as soon as
the shot is released, the defender turns and boxes
the shooter out and gets the rebound (even if the
shot is made). The shooter tries to get the rebound
(but no second shots are allowed as this is mainly a
box-out drill).

If the offensive player gets the rebound, the defender has to run a lap. They get the message
soon about the importance of boxing out.

As an added feature, I also want to stress the importance of making good passes. So I want to
see a good pass from the rebounder back out to the next player in the shooting line. If the
rebounder makes a bad pass out, he/she runs a lap!

Copyright 2003, James A. Gels, all rights reserved.

369
 Rebounding 2 Man Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This rebounding drill stresses the basics of boxing out, being aggressive, and making the outlet
pass, and "finishing" on the offensive glass.

Setup: See the diagram.

Create two rows, one on each side of the free throw lane with the players facing the basket.
The first two players step forward and position themselves down by the blocks and face the
next player in line, as they will be the two defenders. The next players in each line will be the
two offensive players. Have a player in each corner for the outlet pass. The coach, or manager,
stands at the free throw line and shoots the ball for the rebounders. For better balance, put
your post players in one line, and perimeter players in the other line, so they will be playing
against a player of the similar size and position.

The Drill:
The coach shoots the ball. The defenders work on boxing out and getting the rebound. Once
they get the rebound, they make the outlet pass and the next group takes over. The two
defenders then rotate to the outlet positions, and the outlet players go to the back of the
offensive lines. The offensive players should be aggressive and try to get inside and get the
offensive rebound. If they do, they should power it back up to the hoop. The pairs play until
either the offense scores or the defense rebounds and outlet passes. Then you rotate to the
next group. The offensive players are now the defenders.

Make sure all players hustle and are aggressive. Make sure they are using good rebounding
technique... with proper boxing out, attacking the ball, and good outlet passing of defense, and
similar techniques on offense, with the addition of powering the ball back up to the hoop.

See "Rebounding”, for a description of these techniques, and "Rebounding Circle Drill”.

One Man Option: You can also run this drill with just one line, one defender and one outlet
receiver.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

370
 3-Man Rebounding, PowerUp Drill
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

This drill stresses boxing out and rebounding, as well as low post offensive power moves. This
is a good drill for your inside post players.

Have three players under the basket. The coach or a manager shoots the ball up. All three
players work for position and go for the rebound. The player who gets the rebound powers the
ball back to the hoop while the other two are on defense and try to stop him. No dribbling is
permitted except for a one-bounce dribble adjust. The offensive player should be thinking
three-point play (the old fashioned three pointer), the basket and a foul.

This drill not only stresses rebounding fundamentals and aggressiveness, but also power
offensive moves, as well as "in the paint" defense and shot blocking.

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

371
 Hustle Drills
Coach’s Clipboard, http://www.coachesclipboard.net

Drill #1.
This is a good drill for emphasizing hustle and going for loose balls. It also works one-on-one
offensive skills, man-to-man defensive skills, and rebounding. A "laid back" player can actually
be taught to hustle, and get after the ball and the opponent.

Setup: see the diagram. Divide the team into

two groups. They will be competing against each
other, so even out the speed and talent. Line each
team up along a sideline. Each player is given a
number, 1,2 ,3, etc (see diagram). Try to align
your post players into the #1 and 2 spots, and the
guards further out (#3 - 5). Have the players get
down on their knees, or all fours, facing away from
the floor. Have a coach or manager check to make
sure they don't peek! If they cheat, the other team
gets a point.

Starting the Play:

The coach places the ball somewhere on the floor,
equidistant from each team. You could place it out high, or even down in the paint. Coach then
yells a number 1 thru 5. The player from each team whose number he calls, runs out and gets
the loose ball. The player who gets the ball, then takes it to the hoop and tries to score, while
the other player defends against her. Keep playing until the offense scores, or the defense gets
the ball. Award one point for getting the loose ball, and another point if she scores. Play to 10.
Losers run!

Options:
1. You can call more than one number at a time... e.g. "2 and 5!", or "everybody". Be careful
though, if you call too many at one time, there could be a collision going for the ball. Make sure
you rotate the numbers called, so that all players are eventually called.
2. If defense fouls, have the offensive player shoot one free throw. If she makes it, it counts as
a score.

Drill #2
See the diagram at the right. This drill features grabbing a rebound,
making an outlet pass, running after a loose ball, and then a layup.
Start with a player in the lane on each end of the floor. The coach (C)
and an assistant (A) will set up on the wings for the outlet pass. The
player puts the ball up on the rim or backboard, grabs the rebound,
and makes a strong two-handed overhead pass to the coach (or
assistant) on the wing. The coach then rolls the ball up the floor. The
player sprints after the ball, retrieves it and takes it in for a layup.
Then he/she rebounds and outlet passes to the assistant on the
opposite wing and the procedure repeats on that side.

Run the drill in one direction (right hand layups) and then reverse it
on the opposite side (left hand layups).

Copyright James A. Gels 2002, All rights reserved.

372